GE Fanuc 18i TA manual

DATASHEET
FANUC
A20B-2100-0230/03A
OTHER SYMBOLS:
RGB ELEKTRONIKA AGACIAK CIACIEK
SPÓŁKA JAWNA
Jana Dlugosza 2-6 Street
51-162 Wrocław
Poland
www.rgbelektronika.pl
[email protected]
+48 71 325 15 05
www.rgbautomatyka.pl
www.rgbautomatyka.pl
www.rgbelektronika.pl
YOUR
PARTNER IN
MAINTENANCE
Repair this product with RGB ELEKTRONIKA
LINEAR
ENCODERS
ORDER A DIAGNOSIS ∠
PLC
SYSTEMS
INDUSTRIAL
COMPUTERS
ENCODERS
CNC
CONTROLS
SERVO AMPLIFIERS
MOTORS
CNC
MACHINES
OUR SERVICES
SERVO
DRIVERS
POWER
SUPPLIERS
OPERATOR
PANELS
At our premises in Wrocław, we have a fully equipped servicing facility. Here we perform all the repair
works and test each later sold unit. Our trained employees, equipped with a wide variety of tools and
having several testing stands at their disposal, are a guarantee of the highest quality service.
Buy this product at RGB AUTOMATYKA
BUY ∠
GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i / 160i / 180i / 210i /
160is / 180is / 210is - Model A
Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-63003EN/04
July 2000
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may
be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
B–63003EN/04
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
PREFACE
B–63003EN/04
PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required
for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manual
outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,
as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies
additional information on using these components. Refer to individual
manuals for the detailed specifications of each component.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :
Product Name
Abbreviations
FANUC Series 16i–TA
16i–TA
FANUC Series 16i–MA
16i–MA
FANUC Series 18i–TA
18i–TA
FANUC Series 18i–MA
18i–MA
FANUC Series 21i–TA
21i–TA
FANUC Series 21i–MA
21i–MA
FANUC Series 20i–TA
20i–TA
FANUC Series 20i–FA
20i–FA
FANUC Series 160i–TA
160i–TA
FANUC Series 160i–MA
160i–MA
FANUC Series 180i–TA
180i–TA
FANUC Series 180i–MA
180i–MA
FANUC Series 210i–TA
210i–TA
FANUC Series 210i–MA
210i–MA
FANUC Series 160is–TA
160is–TA
FANUC Series 160is–MA
160is–MA
FANUC Series 180is–TA
180is–TA
FANUC Series 180is–MA
180is–MA
FANUC Series 210is–TA
210is–TA
FANUC Series 210is–MA
210is–MA
Series 16i
Series 18i
Series 21i
Series 20i
Series 160i
Series 180i
Series 210i
Series 160is
Series 180is
Series 210is
p–1
PREFACE
Organization of this
manuals
B–63003EN/04
This manual consists of chapters 1 to 15 and appendixes at the end of the
book.
Chapter and title
Contents
Chapter 1
CONFIGURATION
Provides general information related to the connection of the i Series CNC, as well as an
introduction to detailed information.
Chapter 2
TOTAL CONNECTION DAIGRAMS
Describes how to connect peripheral units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 3
INSTALLATION
Describes the installation requirements for using the i Series CNC.
1) Required power supply capacity
2) Heat output
3) Locations of connectors on the control unit
4) Action against noise
Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION
Describes how to make connections related to the power supply of the i Series CNC.
Chapter 5
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIOHERALS
Describes how to connect the following peripheral devices to the i Series CNC:
1) MDI unit
2) I/O device (RS–232–C)
3) High–speed skip (HDI)
Chapter 6
SPINDLE CONNECTION
Describes how to connect spindle–related units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 7
SERVO INTERFACE
Describes how to connect servo–related units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 8
CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
Describes the interface unique to the i Series CNC that offers built–in personal computer
capabilities.
Chapter 9
Describes how to connect a FANUC Intelligent terminal type 2 to the i Series CNC.
FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
Chapter 10
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Describes how to connect machine interface I/O with the FANUC I/O Link.
Chapter 11
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.
Be sure to read this chapter.
Chapter 12
Describes the remote buffer, DNC1, and DNC2 interfaces that can be used with the i Series CNC.
REMOTE
BUFFER
INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
Chapter 13
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the i Series CNC.
Chapter 14
Describes how to connect the i Series CNC to networks.
CONNECTION TO OTHER NET–WORKS
Chapter 15
Describes the connection unique to Series 160is/180is/210is of the integrated type.
CONNECTING TO THE INTERGRATED
TYPE Series 160is/180is/210is
APPENDIX
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
G)
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
ABOUT the MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
p–2
PREFACE
B–63003EN/04
Related manuals
– Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/
180i/210i/160is/180is
The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series
18i, Series 21i Series 160i and Series 180i, Series 210i .
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
List of the Manuals Related to Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is
Specification
number
Manual name
DESCRIPTIONS
B–63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware)
B–63003EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (Function)
B–63003EN–1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63004EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63014EN
Series 21i/210i–TA OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63084EN
Series 21i/210i–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63094EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL
B–63010EN
Series 21i/210i–MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL
B–63010EN
MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–61803E–1
FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–66102E
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1/SA5 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)
B–61863
FANUC PMC–MODEL SC/NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)
B–61863–1
FAPT LADDER–II OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–66184EN
FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63284EN
FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63294EN
FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63304EN
FANUC Symbolic CAP T Basic Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62824EN
FANUC Symbolic CAP T C/Y–axis Module V1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62824E–1
FANUC DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62694EN
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL
B–62714EN
FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63354EN
p–3
*
PREFACE
– Series 20i
B–63003EN/04
The table below lists manuals related to MODEL–A of Series 20i.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Manuals Related
Manual name
Specification
Number
DESCRIPTIONS
B–63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
B–63003EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
B–63003EN–1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For LATHE)
B–63374EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For MILLING)
B–63384EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance
(For LATHE)
B–62204E–1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machining Guidance
(For MILLING)
B–62174E–1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–63005EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
B–63380EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compiler /Macro Executer)
B–61803E–1
p–4
*
PREFACE
B–63003EN/04
Related manuals of
SERVO MOTOR
α series, β series
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series, β series
Manual name
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS
Specification
number
B–65142E
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS
B–65152E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
PARAMETER MANUAL
B–65160E
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS
B–65162E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series DESCRIPTIONS
B–65232EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65235EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series (I/O Link Option)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Related manuals of
Loader control option
Manual name
FANUC Series 21/16/160/18/180/16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i
LOADER CONTROL CONNECTION MANUAL
Related manuals of
I/O–Unit and other
Manual name
B–65245EN
Specification
number
B–62443EN–2
Specification
number
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A CONNECTION/MAINTENANCE B–61813E
MANUAL
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B CONNECTION/MAINTENANCE B–62163E
MANUAL
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL
B–62714EN
FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS
B–61782E
FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS
B–61992E
Related manuals of
OPEN CNC
Manual name
Specification
number
FANUC MMC–IV OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62494E
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(LADDER EDITING PACKAGE)
B–62884EN
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(Basic Operation Package 1 (for Windows 95/NT))
B–62994EN
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(CNC Screen Display Function)
B–63164EN
p–5
B–63003EN/04
Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1
CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1
Configurations of LCD–mounted Type Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2
Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2
HARDWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
Heat Output of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3
Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4
Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.6
Measures Against Surges due to Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1
Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2
Installing the Stand–alone Type Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CABLING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
29
29
32
34
34
35
38
40
40
42
44
46
47
50
52
52
53
54
54
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.1
4.2
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Power Supply for the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
+24V Input Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Power–on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4
Power–off Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1
Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–1
56
57
57
58
60
61
62
63
63
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
B–63003EN/04
Battery in the Intelligent Terminal (3 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.1
CONNECTION OF MDI UNIT (LCD–MOUNTED TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.1.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.1.2
Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD–mounted Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.1.3
Connection with the Standard MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.1.4
Key Layout of Separate–type MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.1.5
61–Key MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.1.6
Connecting to the MDI Unit for the FS20i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2
CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNITS
(FOR THE STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2.2
Connection with the 10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.2.3
Connection with the 7.2″ LCD Unit Via the Display Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2.4
Connecting to the 7.2″ LCD Unit by the Display Link (Multiple Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.5
Connection of the Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit Via the Display Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.2.6
Connection with an Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3
CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.3.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.3.2
Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.3
RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.4
RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.5
FANUC Handy File Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4
CONNECTING THE HIGH–SPEED SKIP (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.4.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.4.2
Connection to the High–speed Skip (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.4.3
Input Signal Rules for the High–speed Skip (HDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.1
SERIAL SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
ANALOG SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
POSITION CODER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
132
134
142
143
7. SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.1
CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Separate Detector Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
Connection of Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
Linear Scale Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7
Stand–alone Type Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–2
145
146
146
147
149
149
150
151
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B–63003EN/04
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.1.10
7.1.11
7.1.12
7.1.13
7.1.14
Input Signal Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Battery for Separate Absolute Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Between the Basic Unit and Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Servo Check Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
156
158
159
160
161
163
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF FDDS (FLOPPY DISK DRIVES) (SIGNAL & POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1
Use Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2
Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION TO THE FULL–KEYBOARD AND MOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1
Full Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.2
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF HDD (HARD DISK DRIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF THE PC INTERFACE CONNECTOR PANEL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.1
Centronics Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.2
Serial Port 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISA EXPANSION UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.1
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.2
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
167
170
173
173
174
175
176
177
179
181
182
183
183
185
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1
Intelligent Terminal Having Neither Soft Keys nor a Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2
Intelligent Terminal Having Soft Keys but No Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.3
Intelligent Terminal Having a Touch Panel but No Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.1
Installation Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.2
Power Supply Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.3
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6
INSTALLATION SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.1
Connector Layout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.2
Main Power Supply Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.3
Floppy Disk Drive (Signal and Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.3.1 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.3.2 Handling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.4
High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.5
Typewriter–style Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.6
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–3
187
187
188
189
189
191
192
193
193
194
194
195
196
196
197
198
200
200
201
202
203
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B–63003EN/04
9.7.7
Centronics Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.8
Serial Port 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.9
Serial Port 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7.10 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8
ISA EXPANSION BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8.1
Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8.2
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
205
206
207
208
208
209
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.3 Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.3 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.4 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.5 DI (Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.7 DI/DO Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.8 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.9 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.10 2A Output DO Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.11 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.12 Analog Input Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.13 Analog Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.14 Analog Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.15 Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.16 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.17 Connecting to the Manual Pulse Generator on the FS20i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.18 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.19 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.20 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.21 Distribution I/O Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT) . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.1 Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.2 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.5 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.7 Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.8 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5.9 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–4
212
213
215
216
220
224
225
225
226
227
229
230
232
233
235
236
237
238
239
241
242
244
245
246
249
250
255
258
261
261
262
263
264
266
267
270
271
272
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B–63003EN/04
10.5.10 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER
MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1 Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.2 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.5 DO (Output Signal) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.6 Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.7 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.8 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.9 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 CONNECTION OF MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.3 Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.5 PMC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.6 Major Connection Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.7 State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.8 Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.9 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector Locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.10 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.11 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.1 Input Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.2 Output Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8.4 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT TYPE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9.1 Input Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9.2 Output Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9.3 Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9.4 Dimensions of Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.3.1 I/O Link interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.11 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT β SERIES WITH I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.11.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.11.3 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.11.4 Address Assignment by Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.12 CONNECTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION I/O MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . .
10.12.1 Differences between the FS0 Standard Machine Operator’s Panel and Distribution
I/O Machine Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–5
274
278
278
279
280
281
285
287
287
288
290
294
294
296
297
299
310
311
311
312
313
314
316
317
318
320
321
323
324
325
326
330
333
334
334
335
338
338
341
341
342
343
343
344
344
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.12.2
10.12.3
10.12.4
10.12.5
10.12.6
10.12.7
10.12.8
10.12.9
10.12.10
10.12.11
10.12.12
10.12.13
10.12.14
10.12.15
B–63003EN/04
Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Mounting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stop Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General–purpose DI Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General–purpose DO Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Signal Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
346
347
348
349
350
354
355
355
356
358
359
361
364
367
11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) . . . . . . 378
12.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 DNC2 INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.1 Multipoint Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.2 Point–to–point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
381
383
385
386
386
387
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS . . . . . . . .
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECOMMENDED CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
389
390
391
391
392
394
394
14. CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE Series 160is/180is/210is . . . . . . . . . 396
15.1 OVERALL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.1 Names of Control Unit Parts and Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.2 Installation Environment Conditions of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3 CONNECTING TO PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.1 Backup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.2 Ethernet (10Base–T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–6
397
398
398
398
399
399
402
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B–63003EN/04
15.3.3
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
B.1
B.2
B.3
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDITIONAL TARGET MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOARD–MOUNTED CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.1
Vertical–type Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.2
Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw–fixing Connector Housings) .
B.4
CABLE CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5
RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
474
474
474
474
475
478
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
G.1
G.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPARISON BETWEEN MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
AND Pentium VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.3
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.3.1
Connector Positions (Basic Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.3.2
HDD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.3.3
PC Separate Wiring Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.3.4
Connecting the HDD Unit and PC Separate Wiring Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.4
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c–7
515
516
518
518
519
520
521
522
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
1
CONFIGURATION
1
1. CONFIGURATION
1.1
CONTROL UNIT
CONFIGURATION
AND COMPONENT
NAMES
B–63003EN/04
The i series control units are divided into two types: the LCD–mounted
type and stand–alone type.
LCD–mounted type control units have a built–in display. Stand–alone
type control units have a separate display unit. In the following sections,
the LCD–mounted type is also referred to as the LCD–mounted type, and
the stand–alone type is also referred to as the stand–alone type.
The configuration and component names of each type are shown in the
figures given below. This manual explains how to attach the connectors
shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses () in the
figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual.
The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1.1.1
Configurations of
LCD–mounted Type
Control Units
Series 16i/18i/21i/20i LCD–mounted type control units (A circle in the
table denotes that a unit is available.)
Display
8.4″ TFT color
LCD
10.4″ TFT
color LCD
10.4″ TFT
color LCD
(with touch
panel)
7.2″ STN
monochrome
LCD
9.5″ STN
monochrome
LCD
2
Expansion slot
Soft key
16i
18i
21i
20i
Remarks
None
5+2
f
f
f
f
2
5+2
f
f
f
f
3
5+2
f
f
(*1)
4
5+2
f
f
(*1)
None
10+2
f
f
f
2
10+2
f
f
f
3
10+2
f
f
(*1)
4
10+2
f
f
(*1)
None
None
f
f
f
2
None
f
f
f
3
None
f
f
(*1)
4
None
f
f
(*1)
None
5+2
f
f
f
2
5+2
f
f
f
3
5+2
f
f
(*1)
4
5+2
f
f
(*1)
None
10+2
f
f
f
2
10+2
f
f
f
3
10+2
f
f
(*1)
4
19+2
f
f
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 The same LCD–mounted type control units as those of the
Series 16i/18i/21i are used in the Series 160i/180i/210i
when an HSSB interface board is inserted into an option slot
to connect an intelligent terminal.
Series 160i/180i/210i LCD–mounted type control units (A circle denotes
that a unit is available.)
Display
10.4″ TFT
color LCD
10.4″ TFT
color LCD
10.4″ TFT
color LCD
(with touch
panel)
Expansion slot
Soft key
160i
180i
210i
Remarks
None
None
f
f
f
(*2)
2
None
f
f
f
(*2)
3
None
f
f
(*2)
4
None
f
f
(*2)
None
10+2
f
f
f
(*2)
2
10+2
f
f
f
(*2)
3
10+2
f
f
(*2)
4
10+2
f
f
(*2)
None
None
f
f
f
(*2)
2
None
f
f
f
(*2)
3
None
f
f
(*2)
4
None
f
f
(*2)
NOTE
2 These control units are Series 160i/180i/210i control units
incorporating PC functions.
3
1. CONFIGURATION
1.1.2
Configurations of
Stand–alone Type
Control Units
B–63003EN/04
Series 16i/18i/21i stand–alone type control units (A circle in the table
denotes that a unit is available.)
The stand–alone type control unit is not available on the Series 20i.
Slot rack name
Expansion
slot
Mini
slot
16i
18i
21i
Remarks
Single–slot rack
None
2
f
f
f
(*NOTE)
2
4
f
f
f
(*NOTE)
3–slot rack
NOTE
All the stand–alone type control units of the Series
160i/180i/210i are designed to connect an intelligent
terminal by inserting an HSSB interface board into a mini
slot. These control units are the same as those of the Series
16i/18i/21i.
Series 16i/18i/21i display units (A circle in the table denotes that a unit
is available.)
Display
Soft
key
Graphic
display
160i
180i
210i
10.4″ TFT color LCD
10+2
Provided
f
f
f
10.4″ TFT color LCD
(with touch panel)
None
Provided
f
f
f
9.5″ STN
monochrome LCD
10+2
Provided
f
f
f
9.5″ STN
monochrome LCD
10+2
None
f
f
f
Remarks
Series 160i/180i/210i display units (intelligent terminals) (A circle
denotes that a unit is available.)
Display
Soft key
160i
180i
210i
10.4″ TFT color LCD
None
f
f
f
10.4″ TFT color LCD
10+2
f
f
f
10.4″ TFT color LCD
(with touch panel)
None
f
f
f
4
Remarks
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit
Liquid–crystal
display
Memory card
interface
Soft key switch
NOTE
This figure is a front view of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i
LCD–mounted type control unit with an 8.4″ TFT color
liquid–crystal display. The configurations of other control
units are basically the same as that shown above.
5
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit
Fan unit
Battery (4.4)
Unit rear panel
Fuse
Power supply
connector (4)
Softkey (5.1)
Serial spindle or
position
coder connector (6)
I/O Link
connector (9)
Analog spindle or
high–speed skip
connector (6) (5.3)
I/O device
interface
connector (5.2)
Servo motor
(FSSB) (7)
Servo check
board connector
(7)
MDI connector
(5.1)
NOTE
This figure is a rear view of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i LCD–mounted type control unit without
option slots. The configurations of the other control units of the Series 16i/18i/21i/20i and the
Series 160i/180i/210i LCD–mounted type control units with HSSB are basically the same as
that shown above.
6
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit
I/O device
interface
connector (5.2)
JD36B (right)
Fan unit
Servo motor
(FSSB) (7)
[COP10A]
Battery (4.4)
Analog spindle or
high–speed skip
connector (6) (5.3)
[JA40]
Unit rear panel
I/O Link
connector (10)
[JD1A]
Serial spindle or
position coder
connector (6)
[JA41]
Fuse
Power supply
connector (4)
[CP1A (right)]
[CP1B (left)]
Soft key (5.1)
FDD power
supply (8.3)
[CN2]
Servo check
board connector
(7) [CA54]
Full keyboard
(8.4)
[CD32]
MDI connector
(5.1)
[CA55]
Mouse (8.4)
[CD3B]
PC extension
(8.6)
[CNY1]
FDD signal (8.3)
[CD34]
PC side
RS–232C, 1st
channel (8.2)
[JD33]
HDD (8.5)
[CNH1]
NOTE
This figure shows a rear view of the Series 160i/180i/210i control unit with no option slot having
a 10.4″ TFT color LCD and incorporating PC functions.
7
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit
Rear of unit
Option board
For remote buffer, DNC1, or DNC2
RS–422
connector (12)
[JD6A]
RS–232C
connector (12)
[JD28A]
Rear of unit
Option board
For HSSB board
HSSB optical
connector (13)
[COP7]
8
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 The above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted type
control unit with option slots. The configurations of the
option slot portions of other LCD–mounted type control
units are the same as in the above figures.
2 When a loader control board is used, refer to the loader
control connection manual.
3 The optional functions shown below use option boards.
These option boards do not have connectors for connecting
external devices.
DC
D Symbol CAPi T
D RISC
9
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit
Rear side of unit
Option board
For sub–CPU card
Analog output
connector (6)
[JA40]
Servo unit
connector (FSSB)
(7) [COP10A]
(Near side)
Servo check board
connector
(Far side) (7) [CA54]
Connector for
serial spindle/
position coder (6)
[JA41]
Rear side of unit
Option board
For data server board
Data server AUI
interface connector
(14) [CD27)
IDE hard disk
connector (14)
[CNH1]
NOTE
The above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted type
control unit with option slots. The configurations of the
option slot portions of other LCD–mounted type control
units are the same as in the above figures.
10
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Stand–alone type control unit
Battery
(4.4)
Status display LED
I/O unit interface
connector (5.2)
[JD5A, JD5B]
Battery
(4.4)
Slot 3
I/O link connector
(10) [JD1A]
Slot 2
Connector for analog
spindle or high–speed
skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Memory card
interface
Connector for serial
spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Connector for CRT
link and MDI (5)
[JD45]
Power supply
connector (4)
[CP1A, CP1B]
Mini slot
Slot 12
LED indicator for
maintenance
Mini slot
Slot 11
Rotary switch for
maintenance
LCD connector (5)
[COP20A]
Servo check board
connector (7)
[CA54]
Mini slot
Slot 10
Servo unit (FSSB)
connector (7)
[COP10A]
Mini slot
Slot 9
11
GND connection
terminal
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Stand–alone type control unit
Sub–CPU board
Connector for analog
spindle or high–speed
skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Connector for serial
spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Servo check board
connector (7) [CA54]
Mini slots
Servo unit (FSSB)
connector (7)
[COP10A]
12
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Stand–alone type control unit (mini slots)
HSSB board
HSSB optical
connector (13)
C board
The C board has
no connector.
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
RS–232C
connector (12)
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
RS–422 connector
(12)
DNC1 board
RS–485 connector
(12)
13
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD unit for stand–alone type control unit
Liquid–crystal
display
Memory card
interface
Soft key switch
Connector for MDI
connection (5) [CA55]
I/O unit interface
connector (5) [JD36A]
LCD connector (5)
[COP20B]
Power supply connector
(5)
[CPIA (right)]
[CPIB (left)]
Fuse
14
GND connection
terminal
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
1.2
HARDWARE
OVERVIEW
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/
DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
Sub–CPU board
Sub–CPU for 2–path control
· 2–axis to 8–axis control
· Spindle interface
· Analog output
Loader control board
Mother board
High–precision contour control
function
CPU for controlling CNC
· Power supply
· 2–axis to 8–axis control
· Spindle interface
· LCD/MDI
· I/O link
· PMC–SB5/SB6
· Analog output/high–
speed DI
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
· PC functions
(for Series 160i
with PC functions)
HSSB interface board
Basic system
Loader control function
· 2–/4–axis control
Data server board
Data server function
RISC board
C board
C functions for PMC
CAP II board
High–speed serial bus
interface (for Series 160i only)
Graphic conversation
Options
The following types of units are
available:
D Unit without option slots
D Unit having two option slots
D Unit having three option slots
D Unit having four option slots
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (On a unit
having four option slots, only a data server board or HSSB interface board can fit into the slot furthest from the
LCD. On a unit having three option slots, only one of the above mentioned boards can fit into the center slot.)
Fig. 1.2 (a) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 16i/160i)
15
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
CAP II board
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/
DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
Graphic conversation
Loader control board
Sub–CPU board
Sub–CPU for 2–path control
· 2–axis to 6–axis control
· Spindle interface
· Analog output
Loader control function
· 2–/4–axis control
Data server board
Data server function
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC
· Power supply
· 2–axis to 6–axis control
· Spindle interface
· LCD/MDI
· I/O link
· PMC–SB5/SB6
· Analog output/high–
speed DI
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
· PC functions
(for Series 180i with
PC functions)
C board
C functions for PMC
HSSB interface board
Basic system
High–speed serial bus interface (for Series 210i only)
Options
The following types of units are available:
D Unit without option slots
D Unit having two option slots
D Unit having three option slots
D Unit having four option slots
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (On a unit
having four option slots, only a data server board or HSSB interface board can fit into the slot furthest from the
LCD. On a unit having three option slots, only one of the above mentioned boards can fit into the center slot.)
Fig. 1.2 (b) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 18i/180i)
16
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/
DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
C board
C functions for PMC
Symbol CAP iT board
Graphic conversation
Loader control board
(for T system only)
Loader control function
· 2–/4–axis control
HSSB interface board
High–speed serial bus interface (for Series 180i only)
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC
· Power supply
· 2–axis to 4–axis control
· Spindle interface
· LCD/MDI
· I/O link
· PMC–SA1/SA5
· Analog output/high–
speed DI
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
· PC functions
(for Series 210i with
PC functions)
Basic system
DATA SERVER board
DATA SERVER function
Options
A control unit without option slots
and a control unit having two
slots are available.
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
Fig. 1.2 (c) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 21i/210i)
17
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Serial communication board
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC
· Power supply
· 2–axis to 4–axis control
· Spindle interface
· LCD/MDI
· I/O link
· PMC–SA1/SA5
· Analog output
· RS–232C × 2
· Memory card interface
Remote buffer
(Only FS20i–FA)
Basic system
Options
A control unit without option slots
and a control unit having two
slots are available.
Two slots are provided only on
the FS20i–FA.
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
Fig. 1.2 (d) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 20i)
18
1. CONFIGURATION
B–63003EN/04
Three–slot rack
Option
slot 2
Slot 0
Single–slot rack
Option
slot 1
Mini slot 12
Mini slot 10
Mini slot 10
Mini slot 11
Mini slot 9
Mini slot 9
Options (mini slot)
HSSB interface
board
High–speed serial
bus interface
C board
C functions for PNC
Options (slot 3)
Options (slot 2)
Sub–CPU board
(for 16i/18i only)
RISC board
(for 16i/18i only)
Sub–CPU for
2–path control
· Axis control
· Spindle control
· Analog output
High–precision
contour control
function
DATA SERVER
board
DATA SERVER
function
Serial communication
board
Remote buffer/
DN1/DNC2
Loader control
board
Basic system (slot 1)
Main board
CPU for controlling CNC
· Power supply
· Axis control
· Spindle control
· LCD/MDI control
· I/O link control
· PMC control
· Analog output/high–speed DI
control
· Serial communication control
(RS–232–C)
· Memory card control
Loader control
function
Fig. 1.2 (e) Configuration of the stand–alone type control unit
NOTE
In the above description, the 16i/18i/21i include the 160i/180i/210i, respectively.
19
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
2
B–63003EN/04
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
20
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit (excluding the 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)
Mother board
L
C
24V–IN(CP1A)
24 VDC power
To I/O unit, etc.
24V–OUT(CP1B)
D
MDI UNIT
CK2
Soft key cable
MDI(CA55)
CK1
R232(JD36A)
R232(JD36B)
RS–232C I/O unit
RS–232C I/O unit
{
Touch panel
Analog output for tool drive
A–OUT&HDI(JA40)
High–speed skip input
Distributed I/O
board
CPD1
JA3
JD1B
DC24V
I/O Link(JD1A)
Manual pulse generator
Operator’s
panel
JD1A
DC24V
CPD1 Distributed
JD1B I/O board, I/O
unit, etc.
JD1A
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Position coder for analog spindle
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Circuit breaker
AC reactor
200VAC
200VAC
CX1A TB2
PSM
CX1B TB1
CX3
CX4
JX1B
MCC Circuit breaker
Position coder
CX1A TB1
CX2A JX1A
JY2
SPM
JA7B
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
To 2nd spindle
Serial spindle motor
TB2
CX2A
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
TB1
CX2B
FSSB(COP10A)
COP10B
SVM
JX1A
TB2
JF1
JX1B
Axis 1 servo motor
Axis 2 servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM
Axis 3 servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM
Axis 4 servo motor
COP10A
The maximum allowable number of controlled axes varies with the model. (In this figure, a 1–axis
amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V
CP11A
JF101
Linear scale, axis 1
JF102
Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B
JF103
Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A
JF104
Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1
JA4A
Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2 (cannot be used in 20i/21i/210i)
CP11A
SV–CHK(CA54)
JF101
Linear scale, axis 1
JF102
Linear scale, axis 2
JF103
Linear scale, axis 3
JF104
Linear scale, axis 4
Servo check board
21
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit (only for 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)
Soft key
cable
PC–dedicated
MDI unit
or
CK2
MDI(CA55)
MDI unit with PC
interface connector
unit
FA full keyboard
or
CK2
CK1
CK1
HDD(CNH1)
(*1)
(*1)
CNY2
Hard disk
unit
Hard disk
unit
PC
parallel
port
(JD9)
PC expansion
To
CNH1
(*1)
Hard disk
unit
PC
channel
2 R232
(JD36F)
(*1)
Mouse
(for development)
RS–232C I/O unit
Printer, etc.
{
KEYBOARD(CD32A)
{
MOUSE(CD32B)
PC channel 1
R232(JD33)
{
Full keyboard
(for development)
(*1)
Mouse
(for development)
RS–232C I/O unit
Touch panel
FDDSIGNAL(CD34)
FDDPOWER(CN2)
FLOPPY DISK
DRIVE
(for development)
NOTE
1 The hard disk unit cables, PC interface connector unit cable,
and FA full keyboard cable in the above diagram are
supplied by FANUC.
2 The units to be connected to the control section or unit must
not generate hazardous voltages even if an abnormality
such as malfunction occurs.
22
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
Option slot
LCD–mounted type control unit (only when optional functions are provided)
Serial communication
board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board
R232–3(JD28A)
RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board
or DNC2 board is used)
R422–1(JD6A)
RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or
DNC1 board is used)
Sub–CPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
Analog output for tool drive
A–OUT(JA40)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Position coder
{
Position coder
PSM
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card
FSSB(COP10A)
To 2nd spindle
Sub axis 1
servo motor
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
Sub axis 2
servo motor
COP10B
COP10A
SVM
Sub axis 3
servo motor
COP10B
COP10A
SVM
Sub axis 4
servo motor
COP10B
COP10A
SVM
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model
SV–CHK(CA54)
Servo check board
23
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type control unit (when optional functions are provided)
Option slot
Circuit breaker
Loader control board
200VAC
CX1A
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX3
TB2
PSM
CX1B TB1
TB2
COP10B
FSSB(COP10A)
COP10A
TB1
COP10B
CX4
CX2B JX1B
CX2A
SVM
CX2B
JX1A
TB2
JF1
JX1B
Loader axis 1 servo
motor
SVM
Loader axis 2 servo
motor
SVM
Loader axis 3 servo
motor
SVM
Loader axis 4 servo
motor
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
SV–CHK(CA54)
Loader control servo check board
24VDC
I/O Link(JD1A)
Distributed I/O
board
JA3
CPD1
JD1B
JD1A
24VDC
CPD1
JD1B
JD1A
Distributed
I/O board,
I/O unit, etc.
Data server board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
HDD(CNH1)
10BASE5(CD27)
Hard disk unit
Operator’s
panel for
loader
Power
magnetics
cabinet
The hard disk unit is mounted on the rear of
the MDI unit.
The cable for the hard disk unit is provided
by FANUC.
Ethernet
HSSB board
HSSB(COP7)
Personal computer or
intelligentterminal
24
(When an intelligent terminal is connected
using the HSSB interface, the model name
is 160i/180i/210i.)
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
Stand–alone type control unit (Except Series 20i)
Slot 0
Main board
24V–IN(CP1)
LCD(COP20A)
The soft key cable is
attached to the LC control
printed circuit board.
LCD UNIT
MDUNIT
To I/O unit
24V–OUT(CP2)
Optical fiber cable
24VDC
COP20B
CK2
CP1A CA55
CK1
24 VDC power
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
R232–1(JD5A)
RS–232C I/O unit
R232–2(JD5B)
RS–232C I/O unit
Analog output for tool drive
A–OUT&HDI(JA40)
High–speed skip input
Distributed
I/O board
CPD1
JA3
24VDC
Manual pulse generator
JD1B
I/O Link(JD1A)
Operator’s
panel
JD1A
CPD1
24VDC
JD1B
JD1A
Distributed
I/O board,
I/O unit, etc.
JD1B
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Servo motor
β amplifier
with I/O link
JD1A
Detachable LCD/MDI
LINK(JD45)
MDI unit
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Circuit breaker
AC reactor
CX1A TB2
PSM
CX1B TB1
CX3
CX4
JX1B
200VAC
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
Position coder
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
JY2
SPM
JA7B
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
Servo card
To 2nd spindle
Serial spindle motor
TB2
CX2A
COP10B
SVM
COP10A
TB1
CX2B
FSSB(COP10A)
COP10B
JX1A
TB2
JF1
JX1B
Axis 1 servo motor
Axis 2 servo motor
SVM
COP10A
COP10B
Axis 3 servo motor
SVM
COP10A
COP10B
Axis 4 servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model (In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
24VDC
CP11A
JF101
Linear scale, axis 1
JF102
Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B
JF103
Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A
JF104
Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1
JA4A
Separate detector interface unit 2
(cannot be used in 21i/210i)
SV–CHK(CA54)
Servo check board
25
Battery for absolute scale
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63003EN/04
slot 2
Stand–alone type control unit (Except Series 20i)
Data server board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
Hard disk unit
slot 3
Ethernet
Sub–CPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
Analog output for tool drive
A–OUT(JA40)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
{
Position coder
PSM
Position coder
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card
To second spindle
FSSB(COP10A)
COP10B
Optical fiber cable
(*1)
SVM
Sub axis 1
servo motor
SVM
Sub axis 2
servo motor
SVM
Sub axis 3
servo motor
SVM
Sub axis 4
servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model.
Servo check board
Serial communication
board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board
*1 With the MT system, this servo interface cannot be used.
Only the servo interface of the main board can be used.
RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)
R422–1
RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)
Mini slot
R232–3
Ethernet (cannot be
used with 21i/210i)
Mini slot
Mini slot
SV–CHK(CA54)
HSSB board
Ethernet
HSSB(COP7)
Personal Computer
Optical fiber cable
26
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3
INSTALLATION
27
3. INSTALLATION
3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS
OUTSIDE THE
CABINET
B–63003EN/04
The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on the
assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual
“cabinet” refers to the following:
D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the control unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Condition
Ambient
Temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Meters
above sea
level
Environment
Operating
Storage,
Transport
LCD–
mounted
type control
LCD–mounted
type control
unit and dis- Stand–alone
unit with PC
type control
play unit
unit
(except unit
and data server
with data
functions
server
function)
0°C to 58°C
0°C to 55°C
5°C to 53°C
–20°C to 60°C
Normal
75%RH or less, no condensation
10% to 75%RH,
no condensation
Short period
(less than 1
month)
95%RH or less, no condensation
10% to 90%RH,
no condensation
Operating
0.5 G or less
Non–operating
1.0 G or less
Operating
Up to 1000 m
Up to 1000 m
Non–operating
Up to 12000 m
Up to 12000 m
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent is
relatively high.)
28
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.2
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY
3.2.1
Power Supply
Capacities of
CNC–related Units
The following CNC–related units require an input power supply that
satisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of
24 VDC "10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripples
are also within "10% of the power supply voltage.
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity (for LCD–mounted type control units)
Power
supply
capacity
Remarks
—
1.6A
(*1)
f (*3)
—
1.7A
(*1)
f (*3)
f (*3)
—
1.9A
(*1)
—
f (*3)
f (*3)
—
2.0A
(*1)
f
f
—
—
f (*3) 1.5A
(*1)
—
f
f
—
—
f (*3) 1.7A
(*1)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
2.1A
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
2.3A
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
2.5A
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
2.6A
(*2)
HSSB board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
0.2A
Sub–CPU board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
0.7A
Loader control board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
0.5A
PMC C
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
0.3A
Serial communication board
(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.3A
CAP–II board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
0.5A
Symbol CAPi T board
—
—
f
—
—
—
f
0.5A
RISC board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
0.5A
Data server board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
0.5A
ISA expansion board
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
1.5 A max (*4)
PC interface connector unit
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
0A
Unit
16i
18i
21i
20i
160i
180i
210i
LCD–mounted Without option slots
type control
With 2 option slots
unit
f
f
—
—
f (*3)
f (*3)
f
f
—
—
f (*3)
With 3 option slots
f
f
—
—
With 4 option slots
f
f
—
Without option slots
—
—
With 2 option slots
—
LCD–mounted Without option slots
type control
With 2 option slots
unit (with PC
functions)
With 3 option slots
With 4 option slots
29
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option
boards are not included.
2 The liquid–crystal display, MDI unit, hard disk, and floppy
disk drive are included. Option boards are not included.
3 For the i series with HSSB, add the power supply capacity
of the HSSB board to the power supply capacity of each
control unit.
4 The value varies depending on the ISA board used.
5 For other peripheral units (such as I/O units), see Table
3.2.1 (c) and also refer to the relevant manuals.
Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply capacity (for stand–alone type control units)
Unit
Power
supply
capacity
Remarks
16i
18i
21i
160i
180i
210i
1–slot rack
f
f
f
f
f
f
1.8A
(*1, *2)
3–slot rack
f
f
f
f
f
f
2.3A
(*1, *2)
HSSB board
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.2A
Sub–CPU board
f
f
—
f
f
—
0.8A
PMC C
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.3A
Serial communication board
(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.3A
RISC board
f
f
—
f
f
—
0.5A
10.4″ LCD unit
f
f
f
—
—
—
1.0A
(*3)
9.5″ LCD unit
f
f
f
—
—
—
0.8A
(*3)
Stand–alone
type control unit
(including main
CPU board)
Intelligent
terminal type 2
(486DX4
version) with
ISA expansion
—
—
—
f
f
f
3.0A
(*2)
Intelligent
terminal type 2
(Pentium
version) with
ISA expansion
—
—
—
f
f
f
3.5A
(*2)
NOTE
1 Boards in option slots and mini slots are not included.
2 When an RS–232–C unit (with power supplied form the NC)
is connected to the RS–232–C port, +1 A is further required.
3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W.
30
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Table 3.2.1 (c) Power supply rating (peripheral units common to LCD–mounted type and separation type)
Power supply
capacity
16i
18i
21i
20i
160i
180i
210i
MDI unit
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0A
Operator’s panel I/O
module
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.35A
Connector panel I/O
module (basic)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.2A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/O
module (additional)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.1A+7.3mA×DI
Separate detector
interface unit
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.9A
Basic 4–axis
unit only
Separate detector
interface unit
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
1.5A
Basic 4 axes +
additional 4 axes
Unit
31
Remarks
3. INSTALLATION
3.3
DESIGN AND
INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS OF THE
MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET
B–63003EN/04
When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions
described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
D The cabinet must be fully closed.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
D The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of
each unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section 3.4.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION
If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail. (This
is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet. (This is not necessary for a unit
with fan.)
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
D The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolant
would directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a dust–proof
front panel, but the unit should not be placed in a location where
coolant would directly fall onto it.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.5 for details of noise
elimination/management.
D When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance.
The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced
easily when maintenance is performed.
D The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed near
the source of a strong magnetic field.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/O
module must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit and connector
panel I/O module must be installed in the direction shown in the
following figure. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above and
below the I/O unit are required for wiring and ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit
and connector panel I/O module.
32
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Top
Connector panel I/O module or
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)
Bottom
D Operating ambient temperature of control units with PC functions
A temperature sensor in each control unit monitors the temperature to
determine whether it is within the optimum range.
(1) When the temperature is out of range when the power is turned on
The control unit does not start until the temperature settles to within
the optimum range.
(2) If the temperature drifts out of range after normal start–up
Error occurs when the hard disk is accessed.
D A control unit with PC functions must be carefully isolated against
vibration.
The CNC control unit or hard disk unit itself may resonate at certain
frequencies. Perform a thorough check after mounting the CNC
control unit on the machine.
CAUTION
For a control unit with PC functions data stored on the hard
disk may be destroyed due to operator errors or accidents
even when the environmental conditions above are
satisfied. To guard against such data loss, back up the
important hard disk data regularly. In particular, never turn
off the power, even momentarily, while the hard disk is being
accessed is running, as doing so is highly likely to destroy
part of the contents of the disk. End users should be made
fully aware of this, to ensure that they do not inadvertently
lose important data.
D If a unit with PC functions is used, be careful when installing the MDI
unit.
(1) The MDI unit must be installed immediately below the control unit
allowing no space between the two units.
(2) The MDI unit must be installed vertically.
33
3. INSTALLATION
3.4
THERMAL DESIGN
OF THE CABINET
3.4.1
Temperature Rise
within the Cabinet
B–63003EN/04
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 13°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×13[°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 13°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 312W. If the actual internal
heat is 360W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 15°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger.
For the power magnetic cabinet containing a stand–alone type control
unit, the internal temperature rise must be suppressed to 10°C or less,
instead of 13°C.
34
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.4.2
Heat Output of Each
Unit
Table 3.4.2 (a) Heat output (for LCD–mounted type control unit)
Remarks
18i
21i
20i
160i
180i
f
f
f
f
f (*3)
f (*3)
f (*3) 33W
(*1)
f
f
f
f
f (*3)
f (*3)
f (*3) 37W
(*1)
With 3 option slots
f
f
—
—
f (*3)
f (*3)
—
39W
(*1)
With 4 option slots
f
f
—
—
f (*3)
f (*3)
—
40W
(*1)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
45W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
52W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
53W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
54W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
54W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
61W
(*2)
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
62W
(*2)
With 4 option slots
—
—
—
—
f
f
—
63W
(*2)
HSSB board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
3W
Sub–CPU board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
13W
Loader control board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
10W
PMC C
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
5W
Serial communication
board (remote buffer,
DNC1, DNC2)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
6W
CAP–II board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
10W
Symbol CAPi T board
—
—
f
—
—
—
f
10W
RISC board
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
9W
Data server board
f
f
f
—
f
f
f
9W
ISA expansion board
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
PC interface connector unit
—
—
—
—
f
f
f
LCD–mounted Without option slots
type control
With 2 option slots
unit
LCD–mounted Without option slots
type control
With 2 option slots
unit (with PC
functions)
(CPU: 486DX4) With 3 option slots
With 4 option slots
LCD–mounted Without option slots
type control
With 2 option slots
unit (with PC
functions)
(CPU: Pentium) With 3 option slots
Option board
(*5)
35
210i
Heat
output
(W)
16i
Unit
(*4)
0W
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option boards are not included.
2 The liquid–crystal display, MDI unit, hard disk, and floppy disk drive are included. Option boards
are not included.
3 For the i series with HSSB, add the heat output of the HSSB board to the heat output of each
control unit.
4 The value varies depending on the ISA board being used. Add the heat output of the ISA board
being used.
5 When option boards are used, the total heat output of the selected option boards must not
exceed the following value:
Rack type
Total heat output
2–slot rack
26W
3–slot rack
38W
4–slot rack
38W
Table 3.4.2 (b) Heat output (for stand–alone type control units)
Unit
16i
18i
21i
160i
180i
210i
Heat
output
Remarks
Stand–alone type
control unit
(including main
CPU board)
1–slot rack
f
f
f
f
f
f
35W
(*1)
3–slot rack
f
f
f
f
f
f
46W
(*1)
Option board
HSSB board
f
f
f
f
f
f
4W
Sub–CPU board
f
f
—
f
f
—
14W
PMC C
f
f
f
f
f
f
7W
Serial communication
board (remote buffer,
DNC1, DNC2)
f
f
f
f
f
f
7W
RISC board
f
f
—
f
f
—
12W
10.4″ LCD unit
f
f
f
—
—
—
18W
9.5″ LCD unit
f
f
f
—
—
—
14W
Intelligent terminal
type 2
(486DX4 version)
with ISA expansion
—
—
—
f
f
f
25W
(*2)
Intelligent terminal
type 2
(Pentium version)
with ISA expansion
—
—
—
f
f
f
37W
(*2)
NOTE
1 The indicated heat output values are the maximum values,
including the heat outputs of the boards in the option slots
and mini slots.
2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC and
memory cards are not included.
36
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Table 3.4.2 (c) Heat output (peripheral units common to LCD–mounted type and separation type)
Unit
Heat
output
(W)
16i
18i
21i
20i
160i
180i
210i
Remarks
MDI unit
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0W
Operator’s panel I/O
module
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
12W
(*1)
Connector panel I/O
module (basic)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
8W
(*1)
Connector panel I/O
module (additional)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
5W
(*1)
Separate detector
interface unit
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9W
Basic 4–axis unit
only(*2)
Separate detector
interface unit
f
f
—
—
f
f
—
14W
Basic 4 axes +
additional 4 axes(*2)
NOTE
1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module input
signals are ON.
2 Heat output generated within the separate detector is not
included.
37
3. INSTALLATION
3.4.3
Thermal Design of
Operator’s Panel
B–63003EN/04
With a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, the heat dissipating
capacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficient
mixing of the air inside the cabinet.
Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°C
Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°C
An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4 is
shown below.
Air guide
chamber
Machine operator’s panel
120–mm square fan
motor (for air mixing)
Fig. 3.4.3
Assume the following.
Thermal exchange rates : Coated metal surfaces 8 W/m2°C
: Plastic surfaces 3.7 W/m2°C
: Allowable temperature rise:
13°C higher than the exteriortemperature
Also, assume the following.
Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4(a):
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mm
Surface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections
: 0.2632 m2
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.
In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.4.4(a)
on the next page can be installed in this cabinet.
38
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Table 3.4.3
LCD–mounted type control unit with option 2 slots
37 W
Option board (PMC C language)
6W
Option board (DATA SERVER Board)
9W
Distributed operator’s panel I/O module
12 W
120–mm square fan motor for air mixing
8W
Total heat dissipation of the above
72 W
NOTE
The 12 W quoted for the I/O module of the distribution–type
operator’s panel represents an example heat output value
when half of all the input signals are turned on. This value
varies, depending on the mechanical configuration.
39
3. INSTALLATION
3.5
ACTION AGAINST
NOISE
3.5.1
Separating Signal
Lines
B–63003EN/04
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group
A
Signal line
DC solenoid (24VDC)
DC relay (24VDC)
B
Action
Bind the cables in group A
Primary AC power line
separately (Note 1) from groups B
Secondary AC power line
and C, or cover group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing the electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
power lines for the servo and
See Section 3.5.4 and connect
spindle motors)
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid
solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
Connect diodes with DC solenoid
and relay.
Bind the cables in group B
DI/DO cable between the CNC and separately from group A, or cover
power magnetics cabinet
group B with an electromagnetic
DI/DO cable between the CNC and shield.
machine
Separate group B as far from
Group C as possible.
24–VDC input power cables
connected to the control unit and It is more desirable to cover group
B with the shield.
its peripherals
Cable between the CNC and I/O Bind the cables in group C
separately from group A, or cover
Unit
Cable for position and velocity group C with an electromagnetic
shield.
feedback
C
Cable between the CNC and Separate group C as far from
Group B as possible.
spindle amplifier
Be sure to perform shield
Cable for the position coder
processing in Section 3.5.5.
Cable for the manual pulse
generator
Cable between the CNC and the
MDI
RS–232C and RS–422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield
40
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC
and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.
Power magnetics cabinet
Operator’s cabinet
24 VDC
power
supply
Spindle
amplifier
Servo
amplifier
CNC
control
unit
I/O unit
to motor
Duct
Cable of group A
Cable of group B, C
Section of duct
Group A
Group B, C
Cover
41
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.5.2
The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
Ground
D Signal grounding
Signal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electrical
signals.
D Grounding for protection
Grounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as to
shield against external and internal noise. This type of grounding
includes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels of
units, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.
D Protective grounding (PE)
Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection grounds
provided for equipment or between units to ground together at one
point as a grounding system.
42
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
LCD–mounted type i series CNC
Pendant box
Distributed
I/O
α amplifier
CNC
Frame
AC power
supply
24–V power
supply
Operator’s
panel
AC input
Pendant box
PE (ground plate of cabinet)
Cabinet on machine side
Stand–alone type i series CNC
Pendant box
Distributed
I/O
α amplifier
CNC
Display
AC power
supply
Frame
AC power
supply
24–V power
supply
Operator’s
panel
AC input
Frame
PE (ground plate of cabinet)
Cabinet on machine side
Path for grounding
Path for protective grounding (PE)
Notes on grounding
D The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω or
less (type D grounding).
D The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficient
cross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground
(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a cross
section equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)
D The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporated
into the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with the
ground wire disconnected.
43
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.5.3
Connecting the Signal
Ground (SG) of the
Control Unit
M4 stud
Grounding cable,
wire 2 mm2 or more
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
For the locations of the grounding terminals of other units, see
“EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT” in APPENDIX.
44
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Stand–alone type control unit
Single–slot rack
Three–slot rack
Signal ground terminal
M4
(threaded hole)
Signal ground terminal
(Faston terminal)
M3 (threaded hole)
Ground cable
2 mm2 or more
Grounding plate
of the cabinet
PE
Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Note that the grounding method differs depending on whether option slots
are present.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B–0166–K330).
45
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.4
Noise Suppressor
Notes on selecting the
spark killer
B–63003EN/04
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) :
Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C)
:
I2
10
∼
I2
(µF)
20
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
R
C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
Spark killer
AC
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
Note)
Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators
clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
+
–
Diode
DC relay
46
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Cable Clamp and
Shield Processing
If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, or
other device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. The
clamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stable
operation of the system.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40 to 80 mm
3.5.5
Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
47
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Control unit
Metal fittings
for clamp
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
board
Ground plate
Shield cover
Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
48
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Ground
plate
8mm
12mm
20mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp
A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)
49
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.5.6
To protect the devices from surge voltages due to lightening, it is
recommended to install surge–absorbing elements between the lines of
the input power and between one line and ground. This does not,
however, assure protection from all surges due to lightening.
The recommended items are as follows. (Items made by Okaya Denki
Sangyo Co.)
For the 200–V system
Measures Against
Surges due to
Lightning
Between lines
R S A S V–781BYZ–2
Between line and ground
R S A S V–781BXZ–4
For the 400–V system
Installation procedure
Between lines
R S A S V–152BYZ–2A
Between line and ground
R S A S V–801BXZ–4
The surge–absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to
lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the figure
below. The figure below shows an example in which an insulating
transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating
transformer is installed, surge–absorbing element (between line and
ground) is not required.
To CNC
Nonfuse
breaker
R
AC S
input T
Input
breaker
Insulating
transformer
Nonfuse
breaker
M
C
C
AC
reactor
Servo unit
power
supply
module
PE
5A
Nonfuse
breaker
a
To other electric parts
on the machine
b
Surge–absorbing element À
(between lines)
Surge–absorbing element Á
(between line and ground)
50
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
Notes
(1) For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line
must be as short as possible.
Wire Size:
The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the
connection of surge–absorbing element and
that (b) of surge–absorbing element must be 2
m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000
VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge–absorbing
element . Otherwise, the overvoltages would activate the element.
(3) The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a surge
voltage exceeding the capacity of the surge–absorbing elements is
applied and the surge–absorbing elements are short–circuited.
(4) Because no current flows through surge–absorbing elements and
during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be shared by
other electric devices on the machine. It can be used with the control
power supply of the servo unit power supply module or with the power
supply for the fan motor of the spindle motor.
51
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.6
CONTROL UNIT
3.6.1
The control unit has a built–in fan motor.
Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through the
fan motor which is located on the top of the control unit.
Installation of the
Control Unit
Space (A), shown in Fig. 3.6.1, must be provided to ensure unrestricted
air flow. Also, space (B) should be provided whenever possible. When
space (B) cannot be provided, ensure that nothing is placed in the
immediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.
AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW
A
A
A
50mm
Unit rear panel
50mm
B
B
Fig. 3.6.1
52
B
3. INSTALLATION
B–63003EN/04
3.6.2
The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.
Installing the
Stand–alone Type
Control Unit
Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motor
mounted on the top of the unit.
The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.2 (areas (A) and (B)) are always required to
ensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the top
of the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replaced
easily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on the
right side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testing
and other purposes. Therefore, space (area (C)) for handling the
connector is required.
Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement
A
B
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Approx. 180
A
30
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Access space
for spare
connector
C
Spare connector
50
380
50
Single–slot rack: Approx. 65
Three–slot rack: Approx. 180
80
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Sufficient space for
replacing a printed circuit
board is required.
Fig. 3.6.2
53
B
Unit: mm
3. INSTALLATION
3.7
CABLING DIAGRAM
3.8
DUSTPROOF
MEASURES FOR
CABINETS AND
PENDANT BOXES
B–63003EN/04
For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration and
component names in Section 1.1.
The cabinet and pendant box that house a display and a operator’s panel
that are to be designed and manufactured by the machine tool builder are
susceptible to dust, cutting debris, oil mist, etc. Note the following and
make sure that they are structured to prevent their entry.
1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealed
structure.
2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display and
operator’s panel are to be mounted.
3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box is
sealed firmly.
4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to the
mounting surface.
5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing, connectors
for conduits, etc.
6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any.
7) Make sure that the display and operator’s panel do not receive cutting
debris and coolant directly.
8) Oil can easily stay on the top of the cabinet and pendant box, possibly
dripping down the display and operator’s panel. Make sure that the
cabinet and pendant box is of such a structure that oil do not collect
or that oil do not drip down the display or panel.
Panel (display/
operator’s panel)
Cabinet/pendant box
Panel (rear cover)
Apply packing.
If the frame is weak, reinforce it.
Cable entrance (example)
Connector for conduit
Hardware
Cable
Packing
54
Cable
Beware of collection of oil.
Oil must not collect or drip.
Display/
operator’s
panel
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
4
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
55
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4.1
GENERAL
B–63003EN/04
This section explains the connection of power supply for i Series control
unit.
56
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
4.2
TURNING ON AND
OFF THE POWER TO
THE CONTROL UNIT
4.2.1
Supply power (24VDC) to the control uint of Series 21i/210i from an
external sources.
Install a power switch at (1) in Fig. 4.2.1 (a).
When the Series 210i control unit with PC functions is used, apply
countermeasures to guard against the possible destruction of hard disk
storage due to momentary power failure or power outage, by installing an
uninterruptible power supply, etc.
Power Supply for the
Control Unit
Main circuit
breaker
Magnetic
contractor
AC line
filter
Servo converter
Servo inverter
CNC control unit
3–phase 200 V
AC for power
line
200 V AC
Single–phase
200 V AC for
control line
24 V DC 24 V DC
input
output
External 24 V
DC power
ON/OFF circuit
I/O units, etc.
ON OFF COM
Fig. 4.2.1 (a)
ON/OFF circuit (example)
For example, “ON/OFF circuit” is as follows : (Fig.4.2.1 (b) )
Select the circuit devices, in consideration of its capacity.
+24V
+24V
ry1
RY1
DC INPUT
24 V
0V
0V
OUTPUT 24 VDC
The power rating is equal
to the total of CNC
control unit capacity +
CP1B output of the
control unit.
ry1
OFF
COM
DIODE
ON
B
CONTACT
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH
Fig. 4.2.1 (b)
57
RELAY
COIL
A CONTACT
RELAY CONTACT
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
4.2.2
Recommended connection and recommended power specifications
+24V Input Power
Specifications
(1) Recommended connection
Regulated
power
supply
AC input
CNC unit
(2) Recommended power specifications
(The power supply must conform to the applicable safety standard.)
Output voltage:
+24 V (10% (21.6 V to 26.4 V)
(including ripple voltage and noise. See the figure
below.)
Output current:
The continuous load current must be larger than the
current consumption of the CNC.
(At the maximum temperature inside the power
magnetics cabinet in which the power supply is
located)
Instantaneous input interruption retention time: 10 mS (for –100%)
20 mS (for –50%)
Instantaneous
interruption
(–100%)
AC input voltage
Instantaneous
interruption
(–50%)
10mS
20mS
26.4V
Output voltage
Abrupt
load
change
21.6V
Output current
0A
Fig. Example of ripple voltage and noise due to switching power supply
Noise
Ripple
voltage
Noise
Fig 4.2.2 Timing chart
58
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
S Circuit configurations
The following circuit configurations are not recommended.
Circuit examples that cannot retain the output voltage at an
instantaneous interruption (the voltage reduces to 21.6 V or below)
Example 1
AC input
Rectifier
circuit
CNC unit
Rectifier
circuit
CNC unit
Example 2
AC input
Circuit examples that exceed the output voltage specifications (21.6
V to 26.4 V) due to an abrupt load change
Example 1
Regulated
power
supply
AC input
CNC unit
Device with
remarkable
load fluctuations
Example 2
Regulated
power
supply
AC input
CNC unit
Device with
large rush
current
59
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4.2.3
Power–on Sequence
B–63003EN/04
Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
sequence:
1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC), power to the
separate detector (scale)
2 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, separate
detector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCD unit (24
VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)
“Turning on the power to all the units at the same time” means completing
the power–on operations in 1 and 2 above within 500 ms of performing
power–on in 3.
When a separate detector (scale) is used, the output signal of the separate
detector must become stable within 500 ms of the separate detector
interface unit being turned on.
In some cases, the detector must be turned on prior to the separate detector
interface unit according to the specifications of the detector.
The power–on sequence for a stand–alone type LCD unit supporting the
display link and an intelligent terminal is undefined.
60
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
4.2.4
Power–off Sequence
Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
sequence:
1 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)
2 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link,
separate detector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCD
unit (24 VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200
VAC), and power to any separate detector (scale)
3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
“Turning off the power to all units at the same time” means completing
the power–off operations in 2 and 3 above within 500 ms before the
power–off operation described in 1 above. If the power to the units
indicated in 2 or 3 is turned off other than within 500 ms of the power in
1 being turned off, alarm information is left in the NC.
The power–off sequence for a stand–alone type LCD unit supporting the
display link and an intelligent terminal is undefined.
CAUTION
When the i Series CNC with PC functions or an intelligent
terminal is used, the OS must be shut down before the
power to the control unit is turned off. Be careful not to turn
off the power while the hard disk is being accessed or before
the OS has terminated; otherwise, the hardware contents
may be destroyed.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarily
disconnected, motor control is disabled. Problems that may be generated
from the motor control disabled state should be handled from the
machine, as necessary.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brake
should be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motor
when the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. The
clamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis control
is disabled by power–off or momentary power disconnection, the brake
usually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clamping
operates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether the
distance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem.
61
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4.3
CABLE FOR POWER
SUPPLY TO
CONTROL UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Supply power to the control unit from external resouce.
The brackets in the figures are the stand–alone type connector name.
Series 21i/210i control unit
External power
CP1A (CP1)
1
2
3
+24V
0V
24VDC stabilized
power
24VDC "10%
Cable
CP1A (CP1)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
+24V (1)
0V (2)
External power
Select a source that
meets the external
power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B–0124–K830 (5m)
(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
The 24 V DC input to CP1A (CP1) can be output from CP1B (CP2) for
use in branching. The connection of CP1B (CP2) is as shown below. In
this case, the external 24 V DC power supply should have a rating which
is equal to the sum of the current consumed by the control unit and the
current used via CP1B (CP2).
Series 21i/210i control unit
External device
CP1B (CP2)
1
+24V
2
0V
3
Cable
CP1B (CP2)
AMP JAPAN
2–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
+24V (1)
0V (2)
62
External device
Select a connector that
matches the pin layout of
the external device.
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
4.4
In a system using the i Series CNC, batteries are used as follows:
BATTERIES
Use
Component connected to
battery
Memory backup in the CNC
CNC
BIOS data backup in the intelligent terminal
Intelligent terminal
Preservation of the current position indicated Separate detector interface
by the separate absolute pulse coder
unit
Preservation of the current position indicated Servo amplifier
by the absolute pulse coder built into the motor
Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local
ordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by using
tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short–circuiting.
4.4.1
Battery for Memory
Backup (3VDC)
Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks, however,
this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
D Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
D Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
63
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Replacing the lithium
battery
B–63003EN/04
(1) Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering drawing number:
A02B–0200–K102).
(2) Turn the i Series on for about 30 seconds.
(3) Turn the i Series off.
(4) (LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)
Remove the old battery from the top of the CNC control unit.
First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
The battery case of a control unit without option slots is located at the
top right end of the unit. That of a control unit with 2 slots is located
in the central area of the top of the unit (between fans).
(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)
Remove the old battery from the front panel of the CNC control unit.
First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
(5) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
NOTE
Steps (3) to (5) should be completed within the period
indicated below. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the period shown, as this will
result in the contents of memory being lost.
Series 16i/18i/21i/20i: Within 30 minutes
Series 160i/180i/210i stand–alone type: Within 30 minutes
Series 160i/180i/210i with PC functions LCD–mounted
type: Within 5 minutes
Battery
case
Connector
Lithium battery
A02B–0236–K102
(LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)
64
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Claw holding the battery
Battery connector
Lithium battery
(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)
WARNING
Incorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Do
not use a battery other than that specified (specification:
A02B–0200–K102).
65
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Replacing the alkaline
dry cells (size D)
B–63003EN/04
(1) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
(2) Turn the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i on.
(3) Remove the battery case cover.
(4) Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(5) Replace the battery case cover.
NOTE
When replacing the dry cells while the power is off, use the
same procedure as that for lithium battery replacement
procedure, described above.
Dry cell × 2
Cover
Connection terminal
on the rear
Mounting hole × 4
Battery case
66
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Use of alkaline dry cells
(size D)
Connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided as
standard, can be replaced with external batteries in the battery case
(A02B–0236–C281) according to the battery replacement procedures
described above.
NOTE
1 Install the battery case (A02B–0236–C281) in a location where the batteries can be replaced
even when the control unit power is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the control unit by means of a simple lock system.
To prevent the connector from being disconnected due to the weight of the cable or tension
within the cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the connector.
67
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4.4.2
Battery in the
Intelligent Terminal
(3 VDC)
Replacing the battery
B–63003EN/04
A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the intelligent terminal.
This battery is factory–set in the intelligent terminal. This battery has
sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year.
When the battery voltage becomes low, the LCD screen blinks. (The LCD
screen also blinks if a fan alarm is issued.) If the screen blinks, replace
the battery as soon as possible (within one week). FANUC recommends
that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery
alarm is issued.
(1) To guard against the possible loss or destruction of BIOS parameters,
write down the BIOS parameter values.
(2) Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B–0200–K102).
(3) After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off the
power to intelligent terminal type 2. Remove the intelligent terminal
from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of
the intelligent terminal.
(4) Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the battery
from the battery holder.
(5) Run the cable for the new lithium battery as shown in the figure.
(6) Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder.
(7) Install intelligent terminal type 2 again.
(8) Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS parameters are maintained
(BIOS setup is not activated forcibly).
Between removing an old battery and inserting new battery, no more than
five minutes must be allowed to elapse.
68
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Lithium battery
Front
Rear view
Side view
BAT1
Lithium battery connection
4.4.3
Battery for Separate
Absolute Pulse Coders
(6VDC)
One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulse
coders for a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 3n6 to 3n8 (n:
axis number) are displayed on the LCD display. When APC alarm 3n7
is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery
should be replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on the
number of pulse coders used.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, the current positions for
the pulse coders can no longer be maintained. Turning on the power to
the control unit in this state causes APC alarm 3n0 (reference position
return request alarm) to occur. Return the tool to the reference position
after replacing the battery.
Therefore, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once a year
regardless of whether APC alarms are generated.
See Section 7.1.3 for details of connecting the battery to separate absolute
pulse coders.
69
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Replacing batteries
B–63003EN/04
Obtain four commercially available alkaline batteries (size D).
(1) Turn on the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
(2) Loosen the screws of the battery case, and remove the cover.
(3) Replace the dry batteries in the case.
Note the polarity of the batteries as shown in the figure below (orient
two batteries one way and the other two in the opposite direction).
Â
Â
 ÂÂ
Â
Screws
Â
Â
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
Â
ÇÇ
Â
Cover
(4) After installing the new batteries, replace the cover.
(5) Turn off the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
WARNING
If the batteries are installed incorrectly, an explosion may
occur. Never use batteries other than the specified type
(Size D alkaline batteries).
CAUTION
Replace batteries while the power to the i Series CNC is on.
Note that, if batteries are replaced while no power is
supplied to the CNC, the recorded absolute position is lost.
4.4.4
Battery for Absolute
Pulse Coder Built into
the Motor (6 VDC)
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed
in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, refer
to the following manuals:
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR α Series Maintenance Manual
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR β Series Maintenance Manual
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR β Series (I/O Link Option) Maintenance
Manual
70
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
71
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.1
CONNECTION OF
MDI UNIT
(LCD–MOUNTED
TYPE)
5.1.1
General
“MDI unit” is the generic name used to refer to a manual data input device.
It has a keyboard and is used to input CNC data such as programs and
parameters into the CNC.
A standard MDI unit is available for each of the i Series models with
personal computer function according to the specifications.
See Section 8.4 for details of connecting the FA full keyboard. Note that
this keyboard can be connected only to the Series 160i/180i/210i.
72
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.1.2
Connection to the MDI
Unit (LCD–mounted
Type)
MDI
CA55
Flat cable for soft key
(Supplied with the control
unit. Length approx. 50 cm.)
CK2
CK1
MDI cable
MDI unit
73
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.1.3
Connection with the
Standard MDI Unit
CNC
MDI unit
CA55
JAE
CK1
LY20–20P–DTI–P
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
*KEY02
1 *KEY00
2 *KEY02
11 *KEY01
*KEY00
2 *KEY01
*KEY03
3 *KEY04
13 *KEY05
3 *KEY04
*KEY06
4 *KEY06
14 *KEY07
4 *KEY05
*KEY07
5 *COM00
*COM02
6 *COM01
*COM03
7 *COM04
*COM06
8 *COM06 18 *COM07
8 *COM05
9 *COM08
*COM07
*COM10
10 *COM10
10 *COM09
*COM11
P
1
A
B
Japan Aviation Electronics
LY10–DC20 (Housing)
LY10–C2–3 (Contact)
A02B–0236–K303
5 *COM00 15 *COM01
6 *COM02 16 *COM03
7 *COM04 17 *COM05
9 *COM08 19 *COM09
Soft key cable
*KEY03
*KEY04
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM00
*COM02
*COM01
*COM03
*COM04
*COM06
*COM05
*COM07
*COM08
*COM10
*COM09
*COM11
20 *COM11
CK2
CA55
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY01
12 *KEY03
CK1
A1
1
*KEY00
2 *KEY02
11 *KEY01
12
*KEY03
3
*KEY04
4
*KEY06
13
*KEY05
14
*KEY07
5
*COM00
6
*COM02
15
*COM01
16
*COM03
7
*COM04
8
*COM06
17
*COM05
18
*COM07
9
*COM08
10
*COM10
19
*COM09
20
*COM11
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
Recommended cable specification:
A02B–0236–K812 (25 cm)
A02B–0236–K813 (45 cm)
Recommended wire specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
NOTE
For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is employed.
Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors. Moreover, clamp the cable
so that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However, shielding and clamping are
not required for a cable of up to 50 cm.
74
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.1.4
Key Layout of
Separate–type MDI
Compact keys for lathe
series (T series)
English display
Symbol display
75
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Compact keys for
machine center series
(M series)
English display
Symbol display
76
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Standard keys for lathe
series (T series)
English display
Symbol display
77
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Compact keys for
machining center series
(M series)
English display
Symbol display
78
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.1.5
61–Key MDI Unit
5.1.6
Connecting to the MDI
Unit for the FS20i
Except for the FS20i, the 61–key MDI unit can be used, in addition to the
conventional MDI units (small MDI unit and standard MDI unit). On this
61–key MDI unit, the alphabetic keys are each assigned to a single letter,
and are arranged in alphabetical order.
(1) Connection
The 61–key MDI unit can be connected in the same way as the small
and standard MDI units. See Subsection 5.1.3.
The 61–key MDI unit cannot, however, be detached. The CNC control
unit automatically determines whether a 61–key MDI unit or a
conventional MDI unit is attached when the control unit is turned on.
If a 61–key MDI unit is connected after the control unit is turned on,
therefore, the keys cannot be recognized correctly.
(2) Software series supporting the 61–key MDI unit
For each model, the following series and edition or later support the
61–key MDI unit:
FS16i/160i/160is–MA B0F2–05 (installation: basic)
FS16i/160i/160is–TA B1F2–05 (installation: basic)
FS18i/180i/180is–MA BDF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS18i/180i/180is–TA BEF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS21i/210i/210is–MA DDF2–05 (installation: basic)
FS21i/210i/210is–TA DEF2–05 (installation: basic)
The FS160i/180i/210i require PC software of the following editions
or later:
Drivers and Libraries Disk A02B–0207–K730 Edition 01.7
Drivers Disk
A02B–0207–K792 Edition 01.1
(3) Outline drawing
An outline drawing is given in Appendix A.
(4) Connector panel
The 61–key MDI unit for the 12.1” LCD unit of the FS160i/180i/210i
has a connector panel on the side and at the bottom of the MDI. This
connector panel is provided with an open/close cover. Opening the
cover reveals an opening measuring 27 mm 156 mm. Usually, the
opening is blocked with a blank panel (metal plate). Instead of this
blank panel, a connector–attached metal plate manufactured by the
machine tool builder can be mounted. For mounting dimensions, see
the outline drawing given in Appendix A.
This item describes the MDI interface when the machine tool
manufacturer makes his own MDI keyboard and connects it to the FS20i
controller.
CAUTION
1 To use the guidance program function, a standard MDI unit
is necessary.
For this reason, the machine tool builder cannot make his
own MDI keyboard.
2 This interface cannot be used on models other than the
FS20i.
79
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
CNC
MDI unit
CA55
CK1
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
P
A
B
1 *KEY00 *KEY02
2 *KEY01 *KEY03
3 *KEY04 *KEY06
4 *KEY05 *KEY07
5 *COM00 *COM02
6 *COM01 *COM03
7 *COM04 *COM06
8 *COM05 *COM07
9 *COM08 *COM10
1 *KEY00
2 *KEY02
3 *KEY04
4 *KEY06
5 *COM00
6 *COM02
7 *COM04
8 *COM06
9 *COM08
10 *COM10
10 *COM09 *COM11
Japan Aviatronics Industries
LY10–DC20 (housing)
LY10–C2–3 (contact)
A02B–0236–K303
11 *KEY01
12 *KEY03
13 *KEY05
14 *KEY07
15 *COM01
16 *COM03
17 *COM05
18 *COM07
19 *COM09
20 *COM11
Soft key cable
CK2
(within 50 cm)
CA55
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY04
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM00
*COM02
*COM01
*COM03
*COM04
*COM06
*COM05
*COM07
*COM08
*COM10
*COM09
*COM11
CK1
1
2
11
12
3
4
13
14
5
6
15
16
7
8
17
18
9
10
19
20
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY04
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM00
*COM02
*COM01
*COM03
*COM04
*COM06
*COM05
*COM07
*COM08
*COM10
*COM09
*COM11
CK2
(NFP–10A–0124)
01 *KEY01
02 *COM06
03 *KEY02
04
05 *KEY03
06
07 *KEY04
08 *KEY07
09 *KEY05
10 *KEY06
Connector specifications of
MDI PCB
(NFP–10A–0124 made by
Yamaichi Electric)
Shield
Ground
Recommended cable specifications:
Recommended wire material specifications:
A02B–0236–K812(25cm)
A02B–0236–K813(45cm)
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGX10 pair)
NOTE
As the fitting on the CA55 side connector of the MDI cable
is a simple lock type, prevent a force of 1 kg or more from
being applied to the connector section. Also clamp it down
to prevent a large force from being applied by vibration.
Note, however, that shielding or clamping are not necessary
if the cable length is within 50 cm.
80
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Minimum required key
switches
Keyboard map (layout of
absolutely necessary
key switches)
The following key switches are needed for the Series 20 when making an
MDI. Note, however, that programs cannot be made by using NC
statements or edited by these switches alone.
(1) Number keys
“0” to “9”
(2) Decimal point
“.”
(3) Sign
“–”
(4) Cancel key
“CAN”
(5) Input key
“INPUT”
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
*COM00
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
*COM01
CAN
.
–
9
8
End input
Restart
input
*COM02
*COM06
INPUT
SK1
SK2
SK3
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
CAUTION
1 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area
are interface
signals for the soft keys.
Connect these to the MDI interface together with the
keyboard’s internal wiring.
2 When only the above keys are provided, programs cannot
be made by using NC statements or edited by these
switches alone.
3 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro
program) is not changed by the machine tool builder and is
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold are necessary.
4 Only keys with a label can be used.
81
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Keyboard map
(when creating or editing
programs using NC
statements)
D Layout of Series 20i–TA
key switches
#7
#6
*COM00
7
*COM01
CAN
*COM02
A
6
#5
SP
#4
5
]
#3
4
[
EOB E.No.
²CURSOR CURSOR³
SHIFT
CUSTOM
GRAPHIC
*COM03
RESET
*COM06
SK1
SK2
SK3
#1
#0
=
2
#
1
,
0
*
.
/
–
+
9
D
8
B
HELP
INPUT
MESSAGE
SYSTEM
OFFSET
SETTING
PROGRAM
POSITION
PAGEâ
PAGEã
CUROSR°
CURSOR±
SK5
SK6
SK7
*COM04
*COM05
#2
3
SK4
*COM07
F
L
Z
Y
X
C
*COM08
T
J
S
K
M
I
DELETE INSERT
G
R
ALTER
N
Q
O
P
W
V
U
H
CAUTION
1 The characters in the hatched area
are enabled when
the SHIFT key is pressed. For details on the keytop of the
keyboard, refer to the example layout for the FS20i–TA key
switches on the following page.
2 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area
are soft keys.
Connect the soft key interface signals to the MDI interface
together with the signals to be used on the MDI keyboard.
3 Place only the required keys from the above keyboard map.
4 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro
program) is not changed by the machine tool builder and is
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold also have the
following meanings.
INSERT:End input by machining guidance function.
ALTER: Resume input by machining guidance function.
5 Only keys with a label can be used.
82
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D Layout example of
20i–TA key switches
OP NQ GR 7
XC Z
MI S
Y
K
U H WV
F
T
L
J
EOB
E
4
A
²
1
–
[
.
+
8
5
2
0
°
B
]
±
#
*
9
6
3
@
D
³
SP
=
/
POS
PROG
OFFSET
SETTING
SHIFT
CAN
INPUT
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
CUSTOM
GRAPH
ALTER
INSERT
DELETE
°
PAGE
°
²
PAGE
±
³
±
83
HELP
RESET
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Keyboard map
(when creating or editing
programs using NC
statements)
D Layout of Series 20i–FA
key switches
#7
#6
*COM00
7
*COM01
CAN
*COM02
A
6
#5
SP
#4
5
]
#3
4
[
EOB E.No.
²CURSOR CURSOR³
SHIFT
CUSTOM
GRAPHIC
*COM03
RESET
*COM06
SK1
SK2
SK3
#1
#0
=
2
#
1
,
0
*
.
/
–
+
9
D
8
B
HELP
INPUT
MESSAGE
SYSTEM
OFFSET
SETTING
PROGRAM
POSITION
PAGEâ
PAGEã
CUROSR°
CURSOR±
SK5
SK6
SK7
*COM04
*COM05
#2
3
SK4
*COM07
F
L
Z
Y
X
C
*COM08
T
J
S
K
M
I
DELETE INSERT
G
R
ALTER
N
Q
O
P
W
V
U
H
*COM09
*COM10
*COM11
*COM12
CAUTION
1 The characters in the hatched area
are enabled when
the SHIFT key is pressed. For details on the keytop of the
keyboard, refer to the example layout for the FS20i–TA key
switches on the following page.
2 Keys (soft keys) in the hatched area
are soft keys.
Connect the soft key interface signals to the MDI interface
together with the signals to be used on the MDI keyboard.
3 Place only the required keys from the above keyboard map.
4 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro
program) is not changed by the machine tool builder and is
used as it is, the keys enclosed in bold also have the
following meanings.
INSERT:End input by machining guidance function.
ALTER: Resume input by machining guidance function.
5 Only keys with a label can be used.
84
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D Layout example of
20i–FA key switches
OP NQ GR 7
A
8
°
B
X U Y V Z W 4 ²[ 5
]
MI S
±
#
F
J
TK 1
.
3
@
³
SP
=
HD
POS
PROG
OFFSET
SETTING
SHIFT
CAN
INPUT
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
CUSTOM
GRAPH
ALTER
INSERT
DELETE
°
PAGE
E
+
°
²
PAGE
±
*
/
HELP
³
±
85
0
6
C
L
EOB
–
2
9
RESET
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Electric specification of
key switch
Maximum current
10VDC/5mA or more
Collision resistance 500 W or less (Condition of DC5V, 1mA)
Chattering
10msec or less
Example of MDI circuit
MDI interface
*COM00
Detail of contact point
*COM01
Contact
point
*COM02
*COM03
Soft key @ interface
*COM04
*COM05
SK7
SK6 SK5 SK4 SK3
SK2 SK1
*COM06
*COM07
*COM08
*COM09
*COM10
*COM11
*KEY07
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY04
*KEY03
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY00
CAUTION
1 The contact points of the keyboard marked with ‘ ’ are necessary.
2 When the FANUC machining guidance function (macro program) is not changed by the
machine tool builder and is used as it is, the contact points marked with ‘ ’ are necessary.
86
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.2
CONNECTION WITH
THE DISPLAY/MDI
UNITS (FOR THE
STAND–ALONE TYPE
i SERIES CNC)
5.2.1
With the stand–alone type i Series CNC, the following display/MDI units
can be connected:
Overview
Connection with a 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCD unit
LCD Unit
MDI Unit
Control
unit
24VDC
Connection with a 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link
VIDEO
LCD Unit
MDI Unit
Soft key cable
Control
unit
24VDC
24VDC
When an LCD/MDI integration unit is used, the connections within the dotted box (
are completed inside the unit.
)
Connection with a detachable 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link
Branch
connector
Control
unit
24VDC
87
Detachable LCD/
MDI unit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Connection with an intelligent terminal
Intelligent
terminal
Control
unit
FA full
keyboard
MDI Unit
24VDC
Either an FA full keyboard or MDI unit can be connected.
5.2.2
Connection with the
10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
LCD Unit
Control unit
Optical fiber cable
COP20A
COP20B
External power
supply
24 VDC ±10%
CP1A
CP1B
CA55
MDI Unit
CK1
88
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D Connection between the
CNC control unit and
LCD unit
An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the CNC
control unit and 10.4″ unit or 9.5″ LCD unit. For details of the optical
fiber cable, see Appendix D.
D Connection of a power
supply to the LCD unit
Feed power to the LCD unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
LCD unit
External power supply
CP1A
1
+24V
2
0V
3
24 VDC regulated
power supply
24 VDC ±10%
Cable
CP1A
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
+24V (1)
0V (2)
External power supply
Select a cable that
matches the pins of the
external power supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)
(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
For distribution, 24 VDC applied to CP1A can be output on CP1B. CP1B
is connected as shown below. In this case, the sum of the current drawn
by the LCD unit and that drawn through CP1B needs to be supplied to
CP1A from the external 24 VDC power supply.
LCD unit
External device
CP1B
1
+24V
2
0V
3
Cable
CP1B
AMP Japan
2–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
+24V (1)
0V (2)
89
External power supply
Select a cable that
matches the pins of the
external power supply.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
D Connection between the
LCD unit and MDI unit
B–63003EN/04
For the connection between the connector (CA55) of the LCD unit and
that (CK1) of the MDI unit, see Section 5.1.3. With the LCD–mounted
type i Series CNC, the connector (CA55) is located on the CNC control
unit at the back of the LCD. With the stand–alone type i Series CNC, the
connector (CA55) is located on the back of the LCD unit. With the
stand–alone type i Series CNC, a soft key cable connection is made inside
the unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make a soft key cable
connection.
90
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.2.3
Connection with the
7.2″ LCD Unit Via the
Display Link
Control unit
MDI unit
JD45
JD13
External power
supply
24 VDC ±10%
CPD1
CPD2
JA1
CK2
Flat cable for the soft keys.
Included in the LCD unit.
Cable length: About 50 cm
LCD unit
LCD video cable
JA1
Power cable
CP5
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the wiring of the flat cable for the soft keys,
LCD video cable, and power cable enclosed in the dotted box is made in the
unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make any connections.
91
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
D Connection between the
CNC control unit and MDI
unit
B–63003EN/04
MDI unit
i Series CNC
JD45
JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT)
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
RXD
11 0V
1
TXD
11 0V
2
*RXD
12 0V
2
*TXD
12 0V
3
TXD
13 RXTM1
3
RXD
13
4
*TXD
14 RXTM2
4
*RXD
14
5
15 TXTM1
5
15
6
16 TXTM2
6
16
7
17
7
17
8
18
8
18
9
19
9
19
10
20
10
20
Cable connections
JD41
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
RXTM1
RXTM2
TXTM1
TXTM2
0V
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
JD13
TXD
*TXD
RXD
13
*RXD
14
15
16
11
11
12
12
0V
0V
0V
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
Recommended connector:
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing: PCR–V20LA
Recommended cable:
A02B–0259–K811 (5 m)
A02B–0259–K812 (10 m)
NOTE
1 Connect JD45 (13) with JD45 (14), and connect JD45 (15)
with JD45 (16).
2 Never make connections with those pins to which no signals
are assigned.
3 Never make connections with pins 13 through 16 of JD13.
92
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D Connection of a power
supply to the MDI unit
Feed power to the MDI unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
MDI unit
CPD1
(AMP)
1
+24V
2
0V
External power supply
3
+24 VDC power supply
(regulated power supply)
+24 VDC ±10%
FG
AMP Japan
1–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
FANUC purchase specification: A02B–0120–K324
Cable connections
CPD1
+24V
0V
1
+24VDC ±10%
2
0V
Recommended wire: 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) or more
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)
(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
Power is fed from an external 24 VDC power supply to the LCD unit
through the MDI unit.
D Connection of a power
supply to the LCD unit
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the connection of a power supply to
the LCD unit is completed inside the unit, so that the machine tool builder
need not make any connections.
MDI Unit
LCD Unit
AMP Japan
2–178288–3
(housing)
1–175218–5
(contact)
CPD2
(AMP)
1
+24V
2
0V
3
CP5
(AMP)
1
+24V
2
0V
3
FG
AMP Japan
1–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Cable connections
CPD2
+24V
0V
1
1
2
2
Recommended cable: A02B–0166–K880 (55 cm)
93
CP5
+24V
0V
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
D LCD video connection
B–63003EN/04
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the video connection to the LCD unit
is made inside the unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make any
connections.
MDI Unit
LCD Unit
JA1
JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
VDR
11
2
0V
12 VSYNC
1
VDR
11
2
0V
12 VSYNC
3
VDG
4
0V
13
3
VDG
13
14 0V
4
0V
5
14 0V
VDB
15
5
VDB
6
15
0V
16 0V
6
0V
16 0V
17
7
17
18 HSYNC
8
18 HSYNC
9
19 (+24V)
9
19
10 (+24V)
20
10
20
7
8
(
(DTC)
Video cable
): Signal not used
Video cable connection
Cable connector on the
JA1 side
VDR
· Connector
0V
FI40B–20S
(Soldering type,
VDG
15–pin)
0V
· Case
FI–20–CV5
VDB
These are
0V
manufactured by
Hirose Electric. HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
Cable connector on JA1 side
· Connector
FI40B–20S
(Soldering type, 15–pin)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
· Case
VDR FI–20–CV5
These are
0V
manufacVDG tured by
Hirose
0V
Electric.
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0371: Coaxial cable (5–conductor, common shield)
Recommended cable:
A02B–0166–K870 (55 cm)
94
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.2.4
Example where one FS18i and two Power Mate i’s are connected
Connecting to the 7.2″
LCD Unit by the
Display Link
(Multiple Connection)
LCD/MDI UNIT
A02B–0166–C261#xx
J45
JD13
24V
JN1
J47
FS18i–TA
24V
JD45
JD41
JD41B
#1
#0
J45
#0
#2
JD41A
Machine control
panel selector
switch
Power
Mate i
24V
JD45
JD41
JD41B
J45
#1
JD41A
Power
Mate i
24V
#2
JD45
JD41
CRT link adapter
A02B–0259–C301
JD41B
J45
JD41A
CRT link terminator unit
A02B–0259–D001
1) When two Power Mates are connected to the FS18C, the CRT/MDI
selector and CRT/MDI control for the Power Mate that were needed
are no longer necessary.
2) The CRT link adapter and CRT link terminator unit are necessary.
Also, specify an LCD/MDI unit that supports the CRT link. A separate
type MDI also is available.
3) In this connection, graphic display is not possible, and the memory
card interface on the side is not available.
95
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
CRT link adapter
Power Mate, i series CNC
JD41 [JD45]
JD41
(PCR–EV20MDT)
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
RXD
11 0V
1
RXD
11 0V
2
*RXD
12 0V
2
*RXD
12 0V
3
TXD
13 (RXTM1)
3
TXD
13 (RXTM1)
4
*TXD
14 (RXTM2)
4
*TXD
14 (RXTM2)
5
(RXALM)
15 (TXTM1)
5
(RXALM)
15 (TXTM1)
6
(*RXALM)
16 (TXTM2)
6
(*RXALM)
16 (TXTM2)
7
(TXALM)
17
(COMMA)
7
(TXALM)
17
(COMMA)
8
(*TXALM)
18
(*COMMA)
8
(*TXALM)
18
(*COMMA)
9
(ATCH1)
19
9
(ATCH1)
19
20 (ATCH2)
10
10
J45
20 (ATCH2)
Cable wiring (J45)
JD41
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
11
11
12
12
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
0V
JD41B
0V
Shield
Recommended wire material specifications:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
Recommended connector:
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA
NOTE
Connector names in brackets [ ] are for when an i series
CNC is used.
NOTE
1 Place the CRT link adapter right next to (within 500 mm) the
Power Mate to keep the cable between the Power Mate and
the CRT link adapter as short as possible.
2 The cable between the CRT/MDI unit (JD13) and the CRT
link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.
3 The cable between the CRT link adapter (JD41A) and the
CRT link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.
4 Signals in parentheses () are used on a separate interface.
Take care not to connect to these signals.
96
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Unit selection with
interface
Separate type MDI unit
CRT/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1
*SEL0
11 *SEL4
2
0V
12 0V
3
*SEL1
13 *SEL5
4
0V
14 0V
5
*SEL2
15 *SEL6
6
0V
16 0V
7
*SEL3
17 *SEL7
8
0V
18 0V
9
19
10
20
Machine control panel
J47
Unit No. selector switch
Cable wiring (J47)
Unit No. selector switch
JN1
*SEL0
*SEL1
*SEL2
*SEL3
*SEL4
*SEL5
*SEL6
*SEL7
0V
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
Common
1
3
5
7
11
13
15
17
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
When the total length of the CRT link cable is between 50 to 100 m,
connect *SEL5 to 0V. The overall line length is the total length of the CRT
interface cables in use. When the total length exceeds 50 mm, the cables
cannot be used in a detachable configuration.
97
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Relationship between selector switch
Unit No.
*SEL7
*SEL4
*SEL3
*SEL2
*SEL1
*SEL0
#0
f
#1
f
#2
f
#3
#4
f
#5
f
#6
f
f
#7
#8
f
#9
f
#10
f
#11
f
#12
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
#13
f
f
#14
f
f
#15
Common
screens
f
f
f
–
–
–
f
f
f
–
Recommended wire material specifications:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
Recommended connector:
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing
PCR–V20LA
Max. line length 10m
98
: Switch open
f : Switch closed
–
–
: Either OK
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.2.5
Connection of the
Detachable 7.2″
LCD/MDI Unit Via the
Display Link
The detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit is a 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit housed in a
portable dustproof case. The unit can be connected/disconnected while
the power is turned on.
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Cabinet
Control unit
Connection
panel
Connector
panel
External
power supply
24 VDC
(1) The detachable LCD/MDI unit is not provided with a cable.
(2) The machine tool builder is required to prepare a connector panel,
external power supply, and connection panel.
(3) The machine tool builder is required to prepare all interconnection
cables.
1) Interconnection diagram
Cabinet
Connector
panel
Detachable
LCD/MDI
unit
J132
24 VDC
power
supply
Connection
panel
Control
unit
J127
J128
J143
JD45
CA50
DC24V±10%
1.0A
99
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
(a) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J143) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and control unit must not exceed 50 m.
(b) The cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as the 24 VDC power
line for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. On the 24 VDC line, a
voltage drop which corresponds to the resistances of the 24 V and
0 V lines of these cables occurs. Considering this voltage drop,
determine the cable length so that 24 VDC ±10% is provided at the
CA50 connector of the unit.
(c) While the power is turned on, only the connector (shaded in the
figure above) of the connection panel can be attached or detached.
The other connectors (such as CA50 and JD41) must not be
attached and detached while the power is turned on.
Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01)
Connector panel
RXD
RXD
JD45 (01)
*RXD
*RXD
JD45 (02)
CA50 (03)
TXD
TXD
JD45 (03)
CA50 (04)
*TXD
*TXD
JD45 (04)
CA50 (15)
ATCH1
CA50 (16)
ATCH2
CA50 (02)
+24V
Connection panel
CA50 (09, 10)
+24V
CA50 (19, 20)
0V
CA50 (05)
FG
(Cabinet)
(*1)
0V
Control
unit
JD45 (11, 12)
to DI
(*2)
+24 V external power
supply
0V DC24V
Shield
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit are not
used.
2 To allow the detachable LCD/MDI unit to be connected or
disconnected while the power to the i Series CNC is on,
ensure that the 0 V line of the i Series CNC is first connected
to the 0 V line of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
100
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
2) Details of the cable J127
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
CA50
Connection panel
04
03
02
*TXD TXD *RXD
10
09
08
07
01
06
+24V +24V
16
15
J127
RXD
14
13
12
20
19
18
17
0V
0V
05
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
FG
(1) Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
11
(2) Crimp type
· Housing
HR22–12TPD–20SC
· Contact
HR22–SC–122
· Automatic crimping
tool
HR22–TA2428HC
ATCH2 ATCH1
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
RXD
Connection panel
CA50
01
RXD
02
*RXD
*RXD
#24AWG pair
03
TXD
TXD
04
*TXD
+24V
+24V
(*1) ATCH1
(*1) ATCH2
0V
0V
FG
*TXD
09
+24V
10
+24V
15
#24AWG
16
19
0V
20
0V
05
Drain wire
FG
Shield
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(#24AWG pair × 2, #24AWG × 10, drain wire, outside cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.
2 FG
Connect CA50 (05) to the FG pin of the connection panel using a drain wire.
Connect the FG pin of the connection panel to the frame ground.
For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.
3 The outside cable diameter that matches the connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. When using a cable
whose outside diameter is smaller than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter of the cable at the
connector joint area to 8.5 mm by using a material such as a shrinkable tube or tape to maintain
a dustproof seal.
101
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
3) Details of the cable J126
i Series CNC
Connector panel
JD45 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01
RXD
11
0V
02
*RXD
12
0V
03
TXD
13
RXTM1
04
*TXD
14
RXTM2
05
15
TXTM1
06
16
TXTM2
07
17
08
18
09
19
10
20
J143
Honda Tsushin Kogyo
Co., Ltd.
PCR–E20F
FANUC specification
· Soldering type
(with a case)
A02B–0120–K301
· Crimp type
(with a case)
A02B–0120–K302
Pins 09 and 20 are used to check the
connection of a handy operator’s panel.
Cable connection (J143)
Connector panel
JD41
01
RXD
i Series CNC
RXD
02
*RXD
*RXD
03
TXD
TXD
04
*TXD
*TXD
13
RXTM1
14
RXTM2
15
TXTM1
16
TXTM2
11
0V
0V
12
0V
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.
102
0V
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
4) Details of the cable J128
Connection panel
Connector panel
RXTP
RXTP
*RXTP
*RXTP
TXTP
TXTP
*TXTP
*TXTP
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
Pair
Pair
0V
FG
0V
(*2)
(*3)
Shield
Wire:
wire ³ A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.
wire ³ Twisted wire with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2 or more (FG)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.
2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG of the connection panel to the frame ground.
For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.
The FG is used to ground the shield of the J127 cable.
3 FG on the connector panel
Connect the shield of the J128 cable on the connector panel to the frame ground.
For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.
103
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5) Details of the J132 cable
Connector panel
External power supply
DC24V
J132
Cable connection (J132)
Connector panel
External power supply
DC24V
+24V
0V
0V
104
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.2.6
Connection with an
Intelligent Terminal
This section describes the connection of an MDI unit with an intelligent
terminal. For other intelligent terminal connections, see Chapter 9.
Connection with an intelligent terminal
Control
unit
Intelligent
terminal
FA full
keyboard
24VDC
A flat cable about 50 cm
long for the soft keys is
included with the intelligent
terminal. This cable need
not be connected when an
intelligent terminal with a
touch panel is used.
MDI unit
CK2
JD45
CK1
This section describes the inside of the dotted box.
Either an FA full keyboard or MDI unit is connected.
105
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D Connection with an MDI
unit
MDI unit
CNC control unit
JD45
:KEY00
:KEY02
:KEY04
:KEY06
:COM00
:COM02
:COM04
:COM06
:COM08
:COM10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
:KEY01
:KEY03
:KEY05
:KEY07
:COM01
:COM03
:COM05
:COM07
:COM09
:COM11
u u
CK1
01 :KEY00
02 :KEY02
03 :KEY04
04 :KEY06
05 :COM00
06 :COM02
07 :COM04
08 :COM06
09 :COM08
10 :COM10
t t
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
:KEY01
:KEY03
:KEY05
:KEY07
:COM01
:COM03
:COM05
:COM07
:COM09
:COM11
Cable
JD45
Honda PCR connector
CK1
Honda PCR connector
(01) :KEY00
(02) :KEY02
(03) :KEY04
(04) :KEY06
(05) :COM00
(06) :COM02
(07) :COM04
(08) :COM06
(09) :COM08
(10) :COM10
(11) :KEY01
(12) :KEY03
(13) :KEY05
(14) :KEY07
(15) :COM01
(16) :COM03
(17) :COM05
(18) :COM07
(19) :COM09
(20) :COM11
:KEY00 (01)
:KEY02 (02)
:KEY04 (03)
:KEY06 (04)
:COM00 (05)
:COM02 (06)
:COM04 (07)
:COM06 (08)
:COM08 (09)
:COM10 (10)
:KEY01 (11)
:KEY03 (12)
:KEY05 (13)
:KEY07 (14)
:COM01 (15)
:COM03 (16)
:COM05 (17)
:COM07 (18)
:COM09 (19)
:COM11 (20)
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0120–K810 (5 m)
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
Recommended cable connector (JD45, CK1):
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
106
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.3
CONNECTION WITH
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
5.3.1
Overview
An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNC
programs and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to output
information from the CNC to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with the i Series CNC include Handy
File. The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to
RS–232–C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has an
RS–232–C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of the i Series CNC. For the
serial ports on the remote buffer, see Chapter 12. For the serial ports on
the personal computer and intelligent terminal, see Chapters 8 and 9.
(For 16i/18i/21i of LCD–mounted type)
Port name
Interface location
First channel (JD36A)
Main control unit
Second channel (JD36B)
Main control unit
Third channel (JD28A)
On the remote buffer option
printed circuit board
(*1)
(For 160i/180i/210i with PC functions)
Port name
Interface location
First channel on the CNC side Main control unit
(JD36A)
Second channel on the CNC side Main control unit
(JD36B)
Third channel on the CNC side On the remote buffer option
(JD28A)
printed circuit board
First channel on the PC side Main control unit
(JD33)
(*2)
On the PC interface connector Second channel on the PC side
unit
(JD36F)
(For 16i/18i/21i of stand–alone type)
Port name
Interface location
First channel (JD5A)
Main control unit
Second channel (JD5B)
Main control unit
Third channel (JD28A)
On the remote buffer option
printed circuit board
Serial port dedicated to a touch On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCD (*3)
panel
unit for a CNC with a touch panel
107
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
(For 160i/180i/210i with an intelligent terminal)
Port name
Interface location
First channel on the CNC side Main control unit
(JD36A)
Second channel on the CNC side Main control unit
(JD36B)
Third channel on the CNC side On the remote buffer option
(JD28A)
printed circuit board
First channel on the intelligent On the intelligent terminal
terminal side (JD33)
(*2)
Second channel on the intelligent On the intelligent terminal
terminal side (JD34)
On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ Serial port dedicated to a touch (*3)
LCD unit for a CNC with a touch panel
panel
NOTE
1 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch
panel communication on the CNC side, so that this port
cannot be used as a general–purpose port.
2 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch
panel communication on the PC side, so that this port
cannot be used as a general–purpose port.
3 This serial port is dedicated to touch panel communication.
Even if no touch panel is attached, this port cannot be used
as a general–purpose port.
108
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.3.2
Connecting I/O Devices
R232–1
JD36A
R232–2
JD36B
Punch panel
Handy File
(LCD–mounted type)
NOTE
This interface is based on the RS–232–C interface of the CNC. Therefore, for a Series 210i CNC
control unit with PC functions, the parameters and programs should be input and output using
the RS–232–C interface of the personal computer (JD33). However, the interface shown above
can be used when using any of the following functions which are processed directly by the CNC.
Cases in which this RS–232–C interface is used when a Series 210i with PC functions is used
Ladder uploading or downloading via RS–232–C using FAPT–LADDER or FAPT–LADDER II
Ladder monitoring from an external PC using FAPT–LADDER II
DNC operation via RS–232–C, external I/O device control
Input/output of parameters and programs by using the CNC screen display function
109
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.3.3
RS–232–C Serial Port
CNC
JD36A, JD36B
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
(JD5A, JD5B
PCR–V20MD)
11 SD
1 RD
12 0V
2 0V
13 ER
3 DR
14 0V
4 0V
15 RS
5 CS
16 0V
6 0V
17
7 CD
8 0V
18 (+5V)
19 +24V
9
20 (+5V)
10 +24V
i
i
h
RELAY CONNECTOR
(DBM–25S)
1 FG
14
2 SD
15
3 RD
16
4 RS
17
5 CS
18
6 DR
19
7 SG
20 ER
8 CD
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25 +24V
13
NOTE
1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS–232–C equipment.
2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.
3 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel
connection. Never use these pins for making any other
connection.
4 The upper connector specification of JD36A/36B is used
with the LCD–mounted type i series CNC.
The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used
with the stand–alone type i series CNC.
110
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
CABLE CONNECTION
RD
0V
DR
0V
CS
0V
CD
0V
+24V
SD
0V
ER
0V
RS
0V
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3 RD
6 DR
5 CS
8 CD
2 SD
20 ER
4 RS
7 SG
25 +24V
1
FG
SHIELD
GND
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORS (JD36A, JD36B)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)
For JD36A and JD36B
<Narrow width type>
A02B–0236–C191 (1 m)
A02B–0236–C192 (2 m)
A02B–0236–C193 (5 m)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)
For JD5A and JD5B
<Narrow width type>
A02B–0120–C191 (1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (5 m)
NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.
2 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for
connectors JD5A and JD5B of the stand–alone type i Series
CNC.
111
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.3.4
RS–232–C Interface
Specification
RS–232–C Interface
signals
Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.
CNC
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send)
When CS is not used
short CS and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
ER (Ready)
When DR is not
used short DR
and ER.
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Check data)
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
Fig. 5.3.4 (a) RS–232–C interface
112
Always short
ER and CD.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Signal description of
RS–232–C interface
Signal RS–232C
name
circuit
number
SD
103
RD
104
I/O
Description
Output Sending
data
Input
Start bit
Receiving ON
Stop bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
(When ISO code “0” is sent)
data
RS
105
Input
Sending
request
This signal is set to on when NC starts
sending data and is turned off when
transmission ends.
CS
106
Input
Sending When both this signal and the DR
permitted signal are set, the NC can send data. If
external device processing is delayed
by a punching operation, etc., NC data
sending can be stopped by turning off
this signal after sending two
characters, including the data being
sent currently. If this signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal
circuit to the RS signal circuit.
DR
107
Input
Data set
ready
ER
108.2
CD
109
SG
102
Signal
grounding
FG
101
Frame
grounding
When external device is ready to
operate, this signal is set. This signal
should usually be connected to the
signal indicating external device power
supply being on. (ER signal of external
device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal
is set. If the signals turned off during
data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the
DR signal will not be used, make sure
to strap this signal circuit to the ER
signal circuit.
Output NC ready This signal is set when the NC is ready
to
to operate. External device should
operation regard the SD signal as being
significant when the ER signal is set.
Input
Signal
quality
signal
Since this signal is not used in
connections with external device, the
signal circuit must be strapped, inside
the connecting cable, to the ER signal
circuit.
NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower
+3V or higher
Function
OFF
ON
Signal Condition
Marking
Spacing
113
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Transmission Method of
RS–232–C interface
Start–stop
Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.
i Series CNC use the start–stop method. With this method, start and stop
signals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start–stop
b1
Start
bit
Codes
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
Data bit
(8 bit including one parity bit)
Stop bits
(2 bits)
Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii)ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input is
necessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the following
control codes, sent from NC.
Control code
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
DC1
Tape reader start
f
f
DC2
Tape punch designation
f
f
f
DC3
Tape reader stop
f
f
f
DC4
Tape punch release
f
f
f
1
f
f
f
NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.
(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals
(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using the
NC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including
a currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input to
NC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii)If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts
sending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the
external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4 (a).
114
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Table 5.3.4 (a)
ISO code
Character
8
7
6
5
EIA code
4
3
2
f
f
F
1
f
f
f
F
2
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
5
f
f
F
f
6
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
0
3
4
f
1
Character
8
7
f
f
F
f
f
f
6
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
9
f
a
f
b
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
E
f
f
F
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
G
f
F
f
f
H
f
f
F
f
I
f
f
f
F
J
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
M
f
f
F
f
N
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
K
L
O
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
F
R
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
U
f
f
F
f
V
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
T
f
W
f
f
f
X
f
f
f
f
F
Y
f
f
f
F
Z
f
f
f
F
f
f
F
DEL
f
f
f
NUL
f
F
f
F
LF or NL
f
F
f
f
F
CR
f
SP
f
f
F
%
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
+
f
f
F
–
f
f
F
:
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
.
f
$
f
’
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
,
f
f
f
F
;
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
f
>
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
”
Address A
f
f
F
f
c
f
f
F
f
d
f
f
e
f
f
f
f
g
F
f
f
F
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
i
f
f
j
f
k
f
l
f
m
f
n
Address D
Address I
f
F
f
Address J
f
F
f
F
f
Address H
o
f
F
f
f
p
f
f
F
f
f
q
f
f
r
f
f
v
f
F
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
w
f
F
f
f
x
f
f
F
f
f
y
f
f
z
f
f
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
Address N
f
Not used at significant data zone in ISO
code.
Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
Address P
Address Q
F
f
f
Tab
f
f
f
F
f
F
f
Address R
Address S
f
Address T
Address U
f
Address V
Address W
f
Address X
Address Y
f
f
f
f
f
Address Z
:
Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
:
f
:
No holes. Not used at significant data
zone is EIA code.
Back space
f
:
Tabulator
F
BS
Address L
f
f
f
f
Address K
f
Address M
F
Del
Address G
f
f
u
Address F
f
F
F
f
End of block
F
f
ER
f
( 2–4–7 )
f
f
+
f
f
–
f
f
/
f
Address E
f
f
f
t
?
F
f
f
Address C
f
f
s
Address B
f
f
F
F
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
f
:
Carriage return
:
Space
f
Absolute rewind stop
Control out (start of comment)
Control in (end of comment)
F
:
Plus sign
F
–
Minus sign
Assumed as program number in ISO code.
.
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
F
f
&
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
115
f
f
F
f
Optional block skip
f
f
F
f
f
F
h
,
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
=
@
Numeral 9
f
Numeral 8
f
f
?
Numeral 7
f
( 2–4–5 )
:
<
Numeral 6
f
F
CR or EOB
f
Numeral 5
f
f
SP
f
f
f
f
f
&
f
Numeral 3
F
Blank
F
#
f
f
f
/
f
f
f
(
)
f
F
HT
BS
f
f
f
S
f
f
Q
P
f
Numeral 2
f
f
8
B
D
7
Numeral 1
Numeral 4
F
f
F
f
f
8
f
F
5
f
A
Numeral 0
F
3
Meaning
1
f
2
f
f
f
2
F
4
f
3
F
f
C
4
1
7
9
5
f
0
f
6
f
Decimal point
:
Sharp
:
Dollar symbol
:
Ampersand
:
Apostrophe
:
Asterisk
:
Comma
:
Semicolon
:
Left angle bracket
:
Equal mark
:
Right angle bracket
:
Question mark
:
Commerical at mark
:
Quotation mark
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4
(a).
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)
EIA code (.......................)
Condition1
CR
o
....................
Condition1 Condition2 Condition3
ISO code (.......................)
LF
:
....................
Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC
tape.
(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)
The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per
second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system
parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
(Example)
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits
(totalling 11 bits
per character):
Transmission characters/second=
110
=10 characters/second
11
(Max.)
(iv) Cable length
The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with the
device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.
When cable A (A66L–0001–0041) is used, cable length is as follows
by the specification of NC.
for RS–232C
100m or less ... 4800 bauds or less
50m or less
... 9600 bauds or less
116
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Time chart when the NC
receives data
(Read into memory)
(1) NC outputs DC1.
(2) The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4) The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it
sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code
(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The external device stops sending data.
10ms or longer
10ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC1
CD3
DC1
SD(Output)
DC3
ER code
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer
117
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Time chart when the NC
send data (Punch out)
B–63003EN/04
(1) NC output DC2.
(2) NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently
transmitting character when CS signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig.
5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending
data again. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (c))
(4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after
the external device completes data processing.
(5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer
10ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2
DC4
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
Within 2 characters
1ms or longer
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
10ms or longer
10ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2
DC4
SD(Output)
DC3
DC1
RD(Input)
Within 10 characters
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
118
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Connection between
RS–232–C interface and
external device
CNC
119
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
External device
side
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
D The cable for connecting the PG–Mate to the NC should be connected
as shown in the below diagram.
CNC
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
External device
side
Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :
Serial
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR
Cable : twist 10 pairs
120
0.18mm2, with shield
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.3.5
FANUC Handy File
Connection
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM–25P
(Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
CNC
Cover: DB–C2–J9
(Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
JD36A, JD36B
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RD
0V
DR
0V
CS
0V
CD
0V
+24V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SD
0V
ER
0V
RS
0V
Relaying
cable
FANUC
Handy File
FG
Accessory for
HANDY FILE
+24V
Relaying connector
Connector: DBM–25S
(Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418–J9
(Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER
+24
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set suitable parameters on reader/puncher interface for FANUC Handy File. The baud rate is
4800 baud in standard.
5 Connect the FANUC Handy File to either JD36 or JD36B. Do not use both pins; the power
capacity may exceed that of +24V and blow the fuse.
6 Make no connections to pins 18 (+5V) and 20 (+5V). JD5A and JD5B have no +5V pins.
7 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for the LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The
lower connector name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand–alone type i Series CNC.
121
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.4
CONNECTING THE
HIGH–SPEED SKIP
(HDI)
5.4.1
General
High–speed skip (HDI)
JA40
This figure shows an
example of connecting a
LCD–mounted type i
Series CNC.
Switch
122
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.4.2
Connection to the
High–speed Skip (HDI)
CNC
JA40
(PCR–EV20MDT)
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
1
2
HDI0
11
0V
12
3
4
5
13
14
(ES)
6
15
16
(SVC) 17
(ENB1) 18
(ENB2) 19
20
10
7
8
9
Signals inside ( ) are used with the analog spindle.
NOTE
1 The upper connector specification of JA40 is for the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification, enclosed in parentheses, is for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC.
2 With 16i/18i/160i/180i, eight DIs (HDI0 to HDI7) can be
used in total. With 21i/210i, only one DI (HDI0) can be used.
3 All DI cannot be used on the 20i.
123
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
Cable connections
JA40
HDI0
0V
HDI1
0V
HDI2
0V
HDI3
0V
HDI4
0V
HDI5
0V
HDI6
0V
HDI7
0V
1
2
11
12
3
4
13
14
6
5 or 10
15
16
17
18
19
20
7
8
9
10
Shield
Ground plate
The 0V signal of pin 5 functions as a common signal when analog output is used.
So, as the 0V signal paired with HDI4 when analog output is used together with a
high–speed DI, use the 0V signal of pin 10.
Recommended cable connector:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE
The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC.
124
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63003EN/04
5.4.3
Input Signal Rules for
the High–speed Skip
(HDI)
Circuit configuration
CNC
liL/liH FILTER
DRIVER
RECEIVER
VH/VL
SHIELD
Absolute maximum rating
Input voltage range Vin: –3.6 to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Unit
Symbol
Specification
Unit
High level input voltage
VH
3.6 to 11.6
V
Low level input voltage
VL
0 to 1.0
V
High level input current
liH
2 max
mA
Vin=5 V
11 max
mA
Vin = 10 V
–8.0 max
mA
Vin = 0 V
20 min
ms
Low level input current
Input signal pulse duration
liL
Remark
NOTE
The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow
into the receiver. The minus (–) sign of IiH/IiL represents the
direction of flow out of the receiver.
125
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
6
B–63003EN/04
SPINDLE CONNECTION
126
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
The figure below shows the spindle–related connections. Note that the
number of connectable spindles depends on the model, the number of paths,
and the configuration. So, see the tables that follow the figure below.
First serial spindle
JA7B
JA41
SPM
TB2
JA7A
Second serial spindle
JA7B
SPM
TB2
JA7A
Third serial spindle
JA7B
CNC
main board
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
SPM
JA7A
TB2
Fourth serial spindle
JA7B
Position
coder
SPM
JA7A
TB2
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
JA40
Inverter
Spindle
motor
First serial spindle
JA7B
JA41
SPM
JA7A
TB2
Second serial spindle
JA7B
TB2
Third serial spindle
JA7B
Position
coder
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
SPM
TB2
JA7A
Fourth serial spindle
JA7B
Spindle
motor
SPM
JA7A
CNC
sub–CPU
board
Position
coder
SPM
JA7A
TB2
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
Spindle
motor
Position
coder
JA40
Inverter
127
Spindle
motor
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
For one–path control with Series 16i
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
f
f
f
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i
(Path 1)
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
f
f
f
Analog output
on sub–CPU
board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
(Path 2)
First serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
f
f
f
f
f
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 16i
(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 2
f Path 2
128
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
For three–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i
(The interface on the main board is used by path 1.)
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
(The interface on the sub–CPU board is shared by path 2 and path 3.)
First serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Third serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 3
f Path 3
f Path 3
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 3
Analog output
on sub–CPU
board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f Path 3
For one–path control with Series 18i
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
f
f
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 18i
(Path 1)
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
f
129
f
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
(Path 2)
First serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serial
spindle on
sub–CPU board
Analog output
on sub–CPU
board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
f
f
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 18i
(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 1
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 2
f Path 1
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
For Series 21i
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
f
f
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
Analog output
on main board
Position coder
(for analog
spindle)
f
f
For Series 20i
First serial
spindle on main
board
Second serial
spindle on main
board
Third serial
spindle on main
board
Fourth serial
spindle on main
board
f
f
130
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
When the spindle function is used on the sub–CPU board,
the option for analog output or serial output is always
required on the main board.
NOTE
For connection between a spindle amplifier and spindle
motor and connection between a spindle amplifier and
position coder, refer to the relevant manual for the SPINDLE
MOTOR α Series.
131
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
6.1
SERIAL SPINDLE
6.1.1
Connection of One to
Two Serial Spindles
Spindle amplifier module
CNC
JA41 (main board,
sub–CPU board)
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
(+5V)
[
]
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
[
]
0V
[
]
(+5V)
[
]
(+5V)
JA7B
(PCR–E20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(+5V) 19
20
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
NOTE
1 When an optical I/O link cable is used for connection
between the NC and a spindle amplifier, the +5V signals
indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the
optical I/O link adapter. Do not connect these signals when
an optical cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ])
are used when a position coder is used with an analog
spindle or when three or four serial spindles are used.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
3 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from the
spindle amplifier module.
132
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Cable connection
Connector JA41
SOUT
Connector JA7B
1
3
2 *SIN
*SOUT 4
CNC
SIN
SIN 1
3 SOUT
*SIN 2
12,14,16
Ground plate
4 *SOUT
12,14,16
Spindle
amplifier
module
Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 In any of the following cases, make a connection via an
optical fiber cable by using an optical I/O link adapter:
D When the cable is 20 m or longer
D When the power magnetics cabinet containing a spindle
amplifier cannot be connected with the operator’s panel
cabinet containing a CNC control unit via a ground wire
with a cross–sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more
D When the cable is subject to significant noise. For
example, when there is a strong electromagnetic noise
source such as a welding machine near the cable, or
when the cable runs in parallel with a power line or power
magnetics cable that can generate noise.
2 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA7B.
133
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
45
40
Connector for connection with a
spindle amplifier
JA7A–2 (second channel)
Connector for connection with a
spindle amplifier
JA7A–1 (first channel)
Connector for connection with the CNC
JA48
4–M3
18
7
Connecting One to
Four Serial Spindles
With the Series 16i and 18i, three or four serial spindles can be connected
using the serial spindle connector panel described below.
Serial spindle connector panel specification: A13B–0180–B001
Outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel
The outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel are the same
as those for the optical I/O link adapter (A13B–0154–B001).
66
6.1.2
B–63003EN/04
Conditions for installing the serial spindle connector panel
D The serial spindle connector panel does not have an enclosed structure.
So, install the serial spindle connector panel in an enclosed cabinet as
used for the CNC.
D Ground the case by using the case mounting screws of the serial
spindle connector panel.
D The serial spindle connector panel is light, so that it need not be
secured with screws. However, ensure that the serial spindle
connector panel does not contact other electrical circuits and thus
cause a short circuit. When securing the serial spindle connector panel
to the cabinet, for example, attach an L–shaped metal fitting as shown
below with a case mounting screw (M3) of the serial spindle connector
panel.
L–shaped metal fitting
134
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Connection diagram
(Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)
Serial spindle
connector panel
SPM
CNC
SPM
JA7B
JA7A–1
JA7B
JA7A
JA7A
JA48
JA41
JA7B
JA7A–2
JA7B
JA7A
JA7A
SPM
Interconnection cable 1
SPM
Interconnection cable 2
Interconnection cable 2
(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)
Serial spindle
connector panel
CNC
JD1
JA7A–1
COP1
Optical link
adapter
JA48
JA41
JD1
JA7A–2
COP1
Optical
cable
Interconnection cable 3
Interconnection cable 4
SPM
JD1
COP1
JA7B
JD1
COP1
JA7B
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
Optical link
adapter
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
Interconnection cable 4
135
JA7A
SPM
Interconnection cable 2
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
(Cable connections when only electrical cables are used)
Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 1)
CNC
(motherboard, sub–CPU board)
Serial spindle connector panel
JA41
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
JA48
(PCR–E20MDT)
1 SINA
2 *SINA
3 SOUTA
4 *SOUTA
5 [PCA]
6 [*PCA]
7 [PCB]
8 [*PCB]
9 (+5V)
10 *SOUTB
1 SINA
2 vSINA
3 SOUTA
4 vSOUTA
5
6
7
8
9 (+5V)
10 *SINB
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
SINB
0V
*SINB
(+5V)
SOUTB
(+5V)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
SOUTB
0V
*SOUTB
(+5V)
SINB
(+5V)
NOTE
1 When an optical cable is used for the connection between
the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in
parentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O link
adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical
cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when
a position coder is used. These signals must not be used
together with the second channel of the serial spindle
interface.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as
branches from the spindle amplifier module.
136
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Cable connection
JA41
JA48
SINA
*SINA
SOUTA
*SOUTA
SINB
*SINB
SOUTB
*SOUTB
0V
0V
0V
1
2
3
4
15
17
19
10
12
14
16
3
4
1
2
15
17
19
10
12
14
16
SOUTA
*SOUTA
SINA
*SINA
SOUTB
*SOUTB
SINB
*SINB
0V
0V
0V
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K845
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the ground
plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial spindle
connector panel, however, no connection to the ground
plate is necessary.
2 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA48.
137
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and a spindle
amplifier
(Interconnection cable 2)
α spindle amplifier module
Serial spindle connector panel
JA7A–1, 2
(PCR–E20MD)
1 SIN 11
2 :SIN 12
3 SOUT 13
4 :SOUT 14
15
5
16
6
17
7
18
8
9 (+5V) 19
20
10
JA7B
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11
2 :SIN 12
3 SOUT 13
4 :SOUT 14
15
5
16
6
17
7
18
8
9 (+5V) 19
20
10
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
NOTE
When an optical cable is used for the connection between
the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in
parentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O link
adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical
cable is not used.
Cable connection
JA4A–1, 2
JA7B
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
0V
0V
0V
1
2
3
4
12
14
16
3
4
1
2
12
14
16
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
0V
0V
0V
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended wire specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the
ground plate. When the serial spindle connector panel is
installed close to the spindle amplifier module, a connection
to the ground plate is unnecessary.
138
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
(Cable connections when optical cables are used)
Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 3)
CNC (motherboard,
sub–CPU board)
Serial spindle connector panel
JA41
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
JA48
(PCR–E20MDT)
1 SINA 11
2 :SINA 12
3 SOUTA 13
4 :SOUTA 14
5 [PCA] 15
6 [:PCA] 16
7 [PCB] 17
8 [:PCB] 18
19
9 +5V
10 :SOUTB 20
1 SINA
2 :SINA
3 SOUTA
4 :SOUTA
5
6
7
8
9 +5V
10 *SINB
0V
0V
SINB
0V
:SINB
+5V
SOUTB
+5V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
SOUTB
0V
*SOUTB
+5V
SINB
+5V
NOTE
1 The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when a position
coder is used. These signals must not be used together with
the second serial spindle interface.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as
branches from the spindle amplifier module.
139
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
Cable connection
JA41
JA48
SINA
*SINA
SOUTA
*SOUTA
SINB
*SINB
SOUTB
*SOUTB
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
1
2
3
4
15
17
19
10
9
18
20
12
14
16
3
4
1
2
15
17
19
10
9
18
20
12
14
16
Shield
SOUTA
*SOUTA
SINA
*SINA
SOUTB
*SOUTB
SINB
*SINB
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K847
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the
ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial
spindle connector panel, however, a connection to the
ground plate is unnecessary.
2 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC and JA48.
140
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
(Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and an
optical I/O link adapter)
(Interconnection cable 4)
Serial spindle connector panel
Optical I/O link adapter
JD1
(PCR–E20LMDT)
JA7A–1, 2
(PCR–E20MD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SIN 11
:SIN 12 0V
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14 0V
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
+5V
19
20 +5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SIN 11
:SIN 12 0V
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14 0V
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
+5V 19
20 +5V
Cable connection
JA7A–1, 2
JD1
1
2
3
4
9
18
20
11
12
0V
13
14
0V
15
16
0V
4
3
2
1
9
18
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
+5V
+5V
+5V
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
141
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
6.2
ANALOG SPINDLE
INTERFACE
CNC
JA40(Main board)
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HDI0
(0V)
ES
SVC
ENB1
ENB2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Signal Name
Spindle command voltage
and common line
ENB1, ENB2
Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
CABLE CONNECTION
SVC
ES
ENB1
ENB2
ANALOG SPINDLE
SERVO UNIT OR
INVERTER
7
5
8
9
Description
SVC, ES
DA2
E
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTOR
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE
1 Signals ENB1 and 2 turn on when the spindle command
voltage is effective. These signals are used when the
FANUC Analog Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 The analog output ratings are as follows:
Output voltage: "10 V
Output current: 2 mA (maximum)
Output impedance: 100 ohms
3 The parenthesized signals are used for the high–speed skip
function (HDI).
4 The upper connector specification of JA40 is used with the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
5 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC.
142
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
B–63003EN/04
6.3
POSITION CODER
INTERFACE
CNC
Signal Name
JA41(Main board)
(PCR–E20MD)
1 (SIN)
2 (:SIN)
3 (SOUT)
4 (:SOUT)
5 PA
6 :PA
7 PB
8 :PB
9 +5V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Description
:SC
Position coder phase C signals
PA, :PA
Position coder phase A signals
0V
PB, :PB
Position coder phase A signals
0V
SC
0V
:SC
+5V
SOUT, :SOUT Serial spindle signals (Note)
SIN, :SIN
+5V
POSITION CODER
CNC
PA
:PA
PB
:PB
SC
:SC
+5V
0V
5
6
7
8
A
N
C
R
B
P
H
K
15
17
9,18,20
12,14,16
(PA)
(:PA)
(PB)
(:PB)
(:PZ)
(:PZ)
SHIELD
GROUNDING
PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTOR
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG
6 + #24AWG 3),
MAX. LENGTH 20 m
NOTE
1 Signals SIN, :SIN, SOUT and :SOUT are for a serial
spindle. These signals are not used for an analog spindle.
2 As the connector on the cable side, the solder–type 15–pin
connector (FI40B–2015S, or conventional FI40–2015S)
manufactured by Hirose Electric cannot be used.
3 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alone
type i Series CNC.
4 The
recommended
cable
connector
FI30–20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the
stand–alone type i Series CNC.
143
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7
B–63003EN/04
SERVO INTERFACE
144
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1
CONNECTION TO
THE SERVO
AMPLIFIERS
Control unit
This figure is an example of connecting
to an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted
type panel.
Connection of FSSB
145
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.1
General
B–63003EN/04
This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the Series
21i/210i control unit. For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier
α Series Descriptions (B–65162E), refer to the relevant manual.
7.1.2
Interface to the Servo
Amplifiers
Control unit
Servo amplifier modules
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
Optical fiber cable
16i/160i : Maximum 8 axes
18i/180i : Maximum 6 axes
21i/210i : Maximum 4 axes
20i: Maximum 4 axes
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
Cable Length Restriction
Within 100 m between units
Total length within 500 m
COP10A
The connection between the CNC control unit and the servo amplifiers
should use only one optical fiber cable, regardless of the number of
controlled axes. See APPENDIX D for details on the optical fiber cable.
In the control unit, the COP10A connector is placed on the servo card
installed on the main board. When a sub–CPU card is used, COP10A is
placed on the servo card installed on the sub–CPU board as well.
146
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.3
Separate Detector
Interface
Servo amplifier module
Separate detector interface unit
CP11A
Control unit or
the previous–stage servo
amplifier module
Linear scale
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to
an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
147
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
CNC
Servo card
Â
Â
COP10A
Servo amplifier module
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V
Flat cable
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
COP10B
JF101
COP10A
JF102
CP11A
JF103
JF104
CNF1
JA4A
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
|
|
|
COP10B
COP10A
Up to 8 axes with 16i/160i
Up to 6 axes with 18i/180i
Up to 4 axes with 21i/210i
Up to 4 axes with 20i
Linear scale axis 1
Linear scale axis 2
Linear scale axis 3
Linear scale axis 4
Battery for absolute
separate detector
Separate detector interface unit 2
CNF2
JF105
JF106
JF107
JF108
Linear scale axis 5
Linear scale axis 6
Linear scale axis 7
Linear scale axis 8
When a separate pulse coder or linear scale is used, a separate detector
interface unit, as shown above, is required. The separate detector
interface unit should be connected to the CNC control unit through an
optical fiber cable, as one of the units on the servo interface (FSSB).
Although the above figure shows the separate detector interface
connected in the final stage of the FSSB line, it can also be connected, at
the nearest location, to the CNC control unit. Or, it can be installed
between two servo amplifier modules.
148
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.4
Separate Detector
Interface Unit
Specification
Usually, the separate detector corresponding to a servo motor for each of
the first to eighth axes is connected to each of separate detector interfaces
JF101 to JF108. If necessary, the controlled axis numbers corresponding
to JF101 to JF108 can be changed. For example, when separate detectors
are to be used only for the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth controlled axes
in the above figure, JF101 to JF104 of the basic interface unit can be
assigned to these controlled axes, thus eliminating the need to use an
expansion unit. The interface unit can feed 0.35 A (5 V) to each separate
detector.
Item
7.1.5
Connection of Power
Supply
Specification
Power supply capacity
Voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Current 0.9 A (basic unit only)
1.5 A (basic unit + expansion unit)
Ordering information
A02B–0236–C203 (basic)
A02B–0236–C204 (expansion)
Method of installation
An interface unit can be installed by using screws
or a DIN rail.
Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from an
external 24 V DC power supply.
Separate detector interface unit
CP11A
1
+24V
2
0V
3
External power supply
24 V DC regulated
power supply
24 V DC "10%
Cable
CP11A
AMP JAPAN
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
+24V (1)
0V (2)
External power
supply
Select a connector that
matches the pin layout
of the external power
supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)
(The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp
terminals.)
The 24 V DC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching.
The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A. In this case, the
power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the
separate detector interface unit and that of the units after CP11B.
149
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.6
Linear Scale Interface
Separate detector interface unit
Linear scale
JF101 to JF104
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
PCA
11
2
*PCA
12
3
PCB
13
4
*PCB
14
5
PCZ
15
6
*PCZ
16
7
(+6V)
17
8
(REQ)
18
9
+5V
19
10
20
0V
0V
0V
+6V and REQ are for separate
absolute pulse coders.
+5V
+5V
Cable wiring
PCA
*PCA
PCB
*PCB
1
PCA
2
*PCA
3
PCB
4
5
*PCB
PCZ
PCZ
*PCZ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
6
*PCZ
9
+5V
18
+5V
20
+5V
12
0V
14
0V
16
0V
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex)
FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the
linear scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
150
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.7
Stand–alone Type
Pulse Coder Interface
D For absolute detector
Separate detector interface unit
Stand–alone type detector
JF101 to JF108
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
PCA
11
2
*PCA
12
3
PCB
0V
(MS3102A–22–14P)
13
A
PCA
B
*PCA C
PCB D
0V
E
PCZ
F
*PCZ G
H
J
K
L
+5V M
0V
N
SHLD P
R
S
T
+6VA U
4
*PCB
14
5
PCZ
15
6
*PCZ
16
7
+6V
17
8
REQ
18
9
+5V
19
10
Pulse coder
20
0VA
*PCB
0V
REQ
V
+5V
+5V
MS3106B22–14S
Cable wiring
PCA
*PCA
PCB
*PCB
PCZ
*PCZ
+6V
REQ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
1
A
2
B
3
C
4
D
5
E
6
F
7
T
8
S
9
PCA
*PCA
PCB
*PCB
PCZ
*PCZ
+6VA
REQ
18
20
L
12
M
+5V
0V
14
0V
0V
16
U
N
GROUNDING PLATE
SHIELD
0VA
SHLD
(Shield)
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex)
FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear scales. The supply current per linear
scale is 0.35 A maximum.
151
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
(Parallel interface)
D For incremental detector
Separate detector interface unit
JF101 to JF108
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
PCA
11
2
*PCA
12
3
PCB
13
4
*PCB
14
5
PCZ
15
6
*PCZ
16
7
+6V
17
8
REQ
18
9
+5V
19
10
20
Stand–alone type detector
Pulse coder
(MS3102A–20–29P)
0V
A
PCA
B
PCB
C
+5V
D
*PCA
0V
E
*PCB
F
PCZ
G
*PCZ
H
SHLD
J
+5V
K
+5V
L
M
0V
N
0V
P
0V
R
S
T
0V
+5V
+5V
MS3106B20–29SW
REQ is not used.
Cable wiring
PCA
*PCA
PCB
*PCB
1
A
2
D
3
B
4
E
5
F
6
G
9
C
18
J
20
K
12
N
14
P
16
T
PCZ
*PCZ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
PCA
*PCA
PCB
*PCB
PCZ
*PCZ
+5V
+5V
+5V
H
0V
0V
0V
SHLD
(Shield)
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex)
FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear
scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
152
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
(Serial interface)
Separate detector interface unit
JF101AJF108
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
SD
11
2
:SD
12
3
13
4
14
5
REQ
15
6
:REQ
16
7
+6V
17
8
9
18
+5V
10
Pulse coder
A
SD
0V
E
J
0V
N
T
0V
B
C
F
REQ
+5V
K
+5V
0V
P
G
REQ
L
R
D
:SD
H
SHLD
M
+6VA
S
0VA
0V
+5V
MS3106B20–29SW
19
20
Separate detector
+5V
Cable connection
1
A
2
D
5
F
6
G
7
R
18
J
20
K
12
N
14
T
16
S
SD
:SD
REQ
:REQ
+6V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
SD
vSD
REQ
:REQ
+6VA
+5V
+5V
H
0V
0V
0VA
(Shield)
(Shield)
Ground plate
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0266 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear
scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A
maximum.
153
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.8
Input Signal
Requirements
B–63003EN/04
The standard of the feedback signal from the additional detector is as
shown below.
(1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree
phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase
is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the
A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency
A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td
Td
Td
Td
Tp
(3) Z phase signal input
For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1/4
frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.
Z phase signal
Tw
Twy 1/4 frequency of A phase or B phase
154
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Time requirements
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101
to JF104.
TD y 0.15 µsec
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the
potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,
when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower
than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 µs. The period and pulse
width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above
requirements.
Receiver circuit
PCA
A–phase
signal
110Ω
*PCA
560Ω
The same circuit is used
for B–phase signals
(PCB and *PCB) and
one–rotation signals
(PCZ and *PCZ).
5V
Relationship between
the direction of rotation
of the servo motor and
that of the separate
pulse coder
If the separate pulse coder rotates in the opposite direction to that of the
servo motor, reconnect the interface cable of the separate pulse coder as
described below.
(1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
(2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
155
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.9
B–63003EN/04
Separate detector interface unit
Connection of Battery
for Separate Absolute
Detector
Absolute pulse coder battery case
156
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Separate detector interface unit
Battery case
JA4A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
01
02
03 0V
04
05
06
07 +6V
08
09
10
(M3 terminal)
+
+6V
–
0V
CABLE CONNECTION
JA4A
+6V
0V
7
3
Battery case
+ +6V
– 0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:
y0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
Recommended connectors:
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex)
NOTE
The battery for the separate absolute detector is required
only when the separate absolute detector is used. When an
absolute pulse coder with built–in motor is used, it is
powered by the built–in battery of the amplifier, such that the
battery for the separate absolute detector is not required.
157
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.10
Connection Between
the Basic Unit and
Expansion Unit
B–63003EN/04
A flat cable is used to make a connection between the basic unit and
expansion unit as shown below.
A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
Units viewed from top
Basic unit
Expansion unit
Mounting
surface
CNF1
CNF2
Marking
B mark
B mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface
units.
158
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.11
Connector locations on the basic unit
Connector Locations
Connector locations on the expansion unit
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.
159
7. SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.12
Installation
B–63003EN/04
1) Notes on installation
(1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space
of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an interface unit, do
not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
(3) When using a basic unit and expansion unit, place the units as
shown below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not
block the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be
used.
Vent holes
Basic unit
Flat cable
Expansion unit
2) Installation using screws
Basic unit
Expansion unit
When using both a basic unit and expansion unit, install the units as
shown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70
to 80 mm.
160
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.13
Notes on Installing a
Separate Detector
Interface Unit
CAUTION
To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be inserted
obliquely. So, sufficient access clearances are required on
both sides of the unit. As a guideline, if the front of an
adjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly set back,
allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and the
adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudes
beyond the front of the unit, allow a clearance of about 70
mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, when
installing the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side of
the cabinet.
Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit
161
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Installing the unit on the DIN rail
Installing the unit
on the DIN rail
DIN rail
Removing
the unit from
the DIN rail
DIN rail
Installing the unit:
1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.
CAUTION
When removing the unit, be careful not to damage the lock
by applying excessive force. When installing and removing
the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit so that
stress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits)
of the unit.
162
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
7.1.14
Connecting the Servo
Check Adapter
The servo check connectors used with the i Series are not compatible with
the conventional types. So, to connect the servo check board (board unit:
A16B–1600–0320) or interface board for automatic adjustment (board
unit: A16B–2300–0170, Unit: A06B–6057–H620) with the i Series, a
new servo check adapter (board unit: A20B–1007–0240) and special
cable (A660–2042–T154) are required. (The ordering information for the
servo check adapter and cable is A02B–0236–K822.)
Examples of connection
When the servo check board is used
Connect TEST0–3 with CN2 of the servo check board via the currently
used flat cable.
TESTn
CA54
CN0
CN2
CNC
Servo check adapter
Servo check board
When the interface board for automatic adjustment is used
A) Connect TEST0–3 with CIN1/2 of the interface board for automatic
adjustment via a currently used flat cable.
TESTn
CA54
CN0
CIN1
CIN2
CNC
Servo check adapter
Interface board for
automatic adjustment
B) Connect TESTA/B with CIN3 of the interface board for automatic
adjustment via a straight cable (such as A660–2042–T007#*****).
TESTx
CA54
CN0
CIN3
CNC
Servo check adapter
Interface board for
automatic adjustment
NOTE
In any case, use the special cable (A660–2042–T154) to
connect CN0 with CA54 on the mother board of the CNC.
163
7. SERVO INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Axis signal output
Connector
Controlled axis
number(*1)
Connector
Controlled axis
number(*1)
TEST0
1/2
TESTA
1/2/3/4
TEST1
3/4
TESTB
5/6/7/8
TEST2
5/6
TEST3
7/8
(*1) The correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and servo
axis numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 1023.
Connector locations
Servo check adapter for the i Series
A20B–1007–0240
NC side
CN0
Axis 5/6
TEST2
TEST0
Axis 1/2
Axis 7/8
TEST3
TEST1
Axis 3/4
TESTB
TESTA
Axes 1 to 4
Axes 5 to 8
Pin diagram
CN0
TEST0–3
TESTA/TESTB
1
GND
11 GND
A1 +5V
B1 GND
1
GND
2
CLKX0
12 CLKX1
A2 CLKXn
B2 GND
2
CLKX0/2 12 CLKX1/3
3
GND
13 GND
A3 FSXn
B3 GND
3
GND
13 GND
4
FSX0
14 FSX1
A4 DXn
B4 GND
4
FSX0/2
14 FSX1/3
5
DX2
15 DX3
A5
B5 +5V
5
GND
15 GND
6
DX0
16 DX1
A6
B6 +15V
6
DX0/2
16 DX1/3
7
CLKX2
17 –15V
A7
B7 –15V
7
17 –15V
8
FSX2
18 +5V
A8
B8 GND
8
18 +5V
9
CLKX3
19 +15V
9
19 +15V
20 +5V
10
20 +5V
10 FSX3
164
11 GND
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8
CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
165
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
8.1
GENERAL
B–63003EN/04
The control unit of LCD–mounted type Series 160i/180i/210i models
incorporates PC functions. This chapter describes how to connect the PC
function interface.
166
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.2
CONNECTION OF
SERIAL PORT
Unit rear panel
Serial port
JD33
I/O device such as a
Handy File
167
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
The connector shown below is the RS–232–C serial port on the personal
computer side. With the Series 210i control unit with PC functions,
parameters and programs are input and output through the RS–232–C
serial port of the personal computer. When the touch panel function is
used, however, this interface is used by the touch panel, so parameters and
programs should be input and output through the 2nd channel of the serial
port on the personal computer side, which is located on the PC interface
connector unit described in Section 8.7.
CNC
Connector panel (Example)
JD33
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
RD
11
SD
2
0V
12
3
DR
4
Serial port
(D–Sub 25)
1
FG
0V
2
SD
13
ER
3
RD
0V
14
0V
4
RS
5
CS
15
RS
5
CS
6
(RESERVE)
16
(RESERVE)
6
DR
7
CD
17
(RESERVE)
7
SG
CD
8
(RESERVE)
18
(+5V)
8
9
RI
19
(+24V)
9
(+5V)
10
10
(+24V)
20
11
( ) : For use by a FANUC I/O
device.
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
RI
23
24
25
13
NOTE
1 The +24 V power of the interface shown in the above figure is exclusively for use by a FANUC
I/O device (FANUC Cassette, FANUC Handy File, etc.). Do not use it for any other purpose.
Also, do not connect more than one FANUC I/O device to a CNC control unit, as the rating of
the +24 V power supply may be exceeded if more than one I/O device is used simultaneously.
2 The +5 V power of the interface is for use by the touch panel. Do not use it for any other purpose.
3 When performing a DNC operation which is processed directly by the CNC, or remote
diagnostics of the PMC, use the RS–232–C interface on the CNC side (JD36A, JD36B).
4 Do not connect any signal to those pins which are marked (RESERVE).
168
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
(1) Cable connection (Example)
CNC (JD33)
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
0V
02
03
04
05
06
20
08
22
07
17
11
01
15
05
03
13
07
09
02, 12
SD
RD Connector panel
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
FG
Frame GND
(2) Recommended cable specification
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs
Recommended cable–side connector (JD33)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
NOTE
Note that the FANUC standard punch panel cannot be used
with this interface.
169
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.3
CONNECTION OF
FDDS (FLOPPY DISK
DRIVES) (SIGNAL &
POWER)
Unit rear panel
Signal cable
CD34
Floppy disk
drive
170
Power cable
CN2
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
CNC
3.5″ floppy disk drive A
CD34
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
J1 (PS–34PE–D4LT1–1, JAE)
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
DENSEL
:INDEX
:MT0
:DS1
:DS0
:MT1
:DIR
:STEP
:WDATA
:WE
:TRK0
:WPRT
:RDATA
HDSEL
:DSKCH
FAS–34–17 of IDC type
manufactured by Yamaichi
Denki
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
1
2
3
4
+5V
0V
0V
+5V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
DENSEL
:INDEX
:DS0
:DS1
:MT0
:DIR
:STEP
:WDATA
:WE
:TRK0
:WPRT
:RDATA
HDSEL
:DSKCH
CN2
1234
1
2
3
4
+12V
0V
0V
+5V
AMP EI Series 4–pin
Housing 171822–4
Contact 170262, 170263
1234
NOTE
1 This is an IBM PC–compatible standard interface. Particular care should be paid to the
following points, however.
(1)Only two modes (720K/1.44M bytes) can be used.
(2)“DENSEL” is fixed to the low level.
(3)Not all commercially available floppy disk drives require both +12 V and +5 V DC. When
using a floppy disk drive which requires +12 V DC, pay careful attention to its power
requirements.
2 Since many commercially available floppy disk drives perform differently with any one given
personal computer, FANUC cannot guarantee all operations. Machine tool builders are
requested to confirm the compatibility of each drive, and the operations that are supported.
Also, be careful when using commercially available floppy disk drives because none offer
dust–proof or drip–proof properties.
3 The FDD–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be designed
according to the interface of the actual drive to be used.
171
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
(1) Cable connection
CNC
CD34
CN2
+5V
0V
0V
+12V
4
3
2
1
0V
DENSEL
0V
(NC)
0V
(NC)
0V
*INDEX
0V
*MT0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS0
0V
*MT1
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WDATA
0V
*WE
0V
*TRK0
0V
*WPRT
0V
*RDATA
0V
HDSEL
0V
*DSKCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Connector B mentioned
on the previous page
(See NOTE.)
CN2
+5V
0V
0V
+12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
0V
DENSEL
0V
(NC)
0V
(NC)
0V
*INDEX
0V
*MT0
0V
(NC)
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS0
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WDATA
0V
*WE
0V
*TRK0
0V
*WPRT
0V
*RDATA
0V
HDSEL
0V
*DSKCH
J2
1
2
3
4
+5V
0V
(NC)
(NC)
3.5″ floppy disk unit
of panel mount type
J1
Connector A
mentioned on the
previous page
(See NOTE.)
J2
1
2
3
4
+5V
0V
(NC)
(NC)
This is the IBM PC standard interface. Commercially available
connecting cables feature wires for pins 10 to 16 that are twisted
between the CNC and drive A, as shown in the above figure. When
using such a cable, set the “Drive number setting pin” on drive A to
“1” (second drive). Connect the floppy disk unit (A02B–0207–C006)
provided by FANUC to connector A, shown above.
(2) Recommended cable specification
A02B–0207–K801: Signal cable and power cable (1.0 m long)
172
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.3.1
Use Environment
8.3.2
Caution
When this unit is to remain attached to the machine at all times, pay
particular attention to the points below.
(1) Dust
The sides of the unit are all perforated, with the exception of the front
door. So, place the unit in a fully sealed cabinet. Dust can enter the
floppy disk unit and cabinet through the floppy disk slot. This means
that floppy disk failures are more likely to occur in a dusty
environment.
(2) Temperature
+5°C to +45°C (operating)
The ambient temperature requirements for this unit are severer
because of the restrictions imposed by the floppy disk unit. So, pay
special attention to the method of cooling. Providing an air flow
directly from a cooling fan is not recommended because dust can build
up.
Never turn off the power while a floppy disk is inserted and particularly
while the inserted floppy disk is being accessed (while the LED is lit).
This caution should be conveyed to the end users.
173
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.4
CONNECTION TO
THE
FULL–KEYBOARD
AND MOUSE
Unit rear panel
MOUSE
JD32B
KEYBOARD
JD32A
Full keyboard
Mouse
174
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.4.1
Full Keyboard
Intelligent terminal type 2
Full keyboard (commercial type)
CD32A
(mini DIN6)
Or, FA full keyboard
NOTE
1 Commercially available full keyboards are designed for use
with a personal computer. Such commercial keyboards can
not always guarantee all required operations, therefore.
The machine tool builder should check this point carefully
beforehand.
Usually, protection against dust and moisture is not
provided by commercial full keyboards. This should also be
considered by the machine tool builder.
1) Recommended full keyboard
A86L–0001–0210 . . . . . . 101–type commercial type
. . . . . . Dedicated to development and maintenance
A86L–0001–0211 . . . . . . 101–type commercial type
. . . . . . Dedicated to development and maintenance
A02L–0236–C130#JC . . FA full keyboard (Japanese) 

A02B–0236–C130#EC . . FA full keyboard (English) 
. . . . . . LCD–mounted type full keyboard dedicated to
the i Series CNC
NOTE
2 When using an FA full keyboard that is integrated into the
system, clamp the cable at a point as close as possible to
the connector so that the weight of the cable is not directly
applied to the connector joint.
175
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.4.2
Mouse
Intelligent terminal type 2
CD32B (mini DIN6)
Or, FA full keyboard
Mouse (commercial type)
NOTE
A commercially available full keyboard is designed for use
with a personal computer. Such commercial keyboards can
not always guarantee all required operations, therefore.
The machine tool builder should check this point carefully
beforehand.
Usually, protection against dust and moisture is not
provided by commercial full keyboards. This should also be
considered by the machine tool builder.
1) Recommended mouse
A86L–0001–0212 . . . . . Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial type)
. . . . . . Dedicated to development and maintenance
176
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.5
CONNECTION OF
HDD (HARD DISK
DRIVE)
Control unit
HDD
MDI unit
Rubber vibration insulator
177
Vertical with
respect to
the ground
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
Connection
B–63003EN/04
The hard disk drive itself is installed at the rear of the FANUC MDI unit.
The machine tool builder is requested to connect the cable from the hard
disk drive to connector “CNH1” of the CNC control unit by applying the
following procedure.
Securing bracket
CNH1
1. Remove the securing bracket from connector “CNH1”. (Remove the
two screws for this.)
2. Plug the cable from the hard disk drive into connector “CNH1” of the
control unit.
3. Place the securing bracket on the connector and tighten the two screws.
NOTE
When an MDI unit with a hard disk drive is to be installed on
the machine, install the MDI unit under the main control unit
so that the rubber vibration insulators are vertical with
respect to the ground, as shown on the previous page.
178
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.6
CONNECTION OF
THE PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR PANEL
UNIT
Control unit rear panel
CNY1
CNH2
PC interface connector panel unit
HDD
MDI unit rear panel
JD9: Parallel port
JD36F: RS–232–C (2nd channel)
179
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
Connection method
B–63003EN/04
1. If the hard disk drive is connected to the control unit (CNH1),
disconnect it. (When a personal computer interface connection unit
is installed, the hard disk drive cable is not connected to the main
control unit. Instead, it is connected to the personal computer interface
connection unit.)
2. Remove the screws (× 2) from the control unit.
3. Plug the connector (CN1) of the cable from the PC interface connector
panel unit into the connector (CNY1) of the control unit.
4. Tighten the screws (× 2).
CNY1
CN1
NOTE
When a personal computer interface connection unit,
mounted together with a hard disk drive on the MDI unit, is
to be installed on the machine, install it under the control unit
so that the rubber vibration insulators of the hard disk drive
are vertical with respect to the ground, as shown on the
previous page.
180
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.6.1
Centronics Parallel
Port
CNC (PC interface connector panel unit)
Example) Printer
JD9
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
STD0
11
:STB
1
:STB
19
0V
2
STD1
12
0V
2
STD
20
0V
3
STD2
13
:AFD
3
STD1
21
0V
4
STD3
14
0V
4
STD2
22
0V
5
STD4
15
:INIT
5
STD3
23
0V
6
STD5
16
0V
7
STD5
25
0V
7
STD6
17
:SLIN
6
STD4
24
0V
8
STD7
18
:ACK
8
STD6
26
0V
9
PE
19
:ERROR
9
STD7
27
0V
SLCT
20
BUSY
10
:ACK
28
0V
11
BUSY
29
0V
12
PE
30
0V
13
SLCT
31
:INIT
14
:AFD
32
:ERROR
33
0V
10
15
1) Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P ... (0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs)
2) Recommended cable connector (JD9 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
16
0V
34
17
FG
35
18
36
:SLIN
NOTE
1 The printer–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be designed
according to the interface of the device which is connected to the PC interface connector panel
unit.
2 Since many commercially available external devices, including printers, perform differently with
any one given personal computer, FANUC cannot guarantee all operations. Machine tool
builders are requested to confirm the compatibility of each drive, and the operations that are
supported. Also, be careful when using commercially available external devices because none
offer dust–proof or drip–proof properties.
181
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.6.2
Serial Port 2
CNC (PC interface connector panel unit)
Example) Host computer
JD36F
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
(DBM–25S)
1
RD
11
SD
1
FG
2
0V
12
0V
2
SD
3
DR
13
ER
3
RD
4
0V
14
0V
4
RS
5
CS
15
RS
5
CS
6
0V
16
0V
6
DR
7
CD
17
7
SG
8
0V
18
8
CD
9
RI
19
9
(+24V)
10
(+24V)
20
10
( ):
For use by a FANUC
I/O device
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
RI
23
24
25
13
1) Recommended wire:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (0.08 mm2 × 10 pairs)
2) Recommended cable connector (JD36F side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE
1 The host computer–side interface shown above is merely an example. Each cable should be
designed according to the interface of the actual device to be connected to the PC interface
connector panel unit.
2 The +24 V power of the interface on the PC interface connector panel unit side in the above
figure is exclusively for use by a FANUC I/O device (FANUC Cassette, FANUC Handy File, etc.).
Do not use it for other purpose. Also, do not to connect more than one FANUC I/O device to
a CNC control unit, as the rating of the +24 V power supply may be exceeded if more than one
I/O device is used simultaneously.
3 Do not connect anything to those pins for which a signal name is not indicated.
182
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.7
ISA EXPANSION
UNITS
8.7.1
Installation Procedure
(1) Usable boards
Up to two ISA expansion boards, as shown below, can be used.
Rear face component height: No more than 3.81 mm
Front face component height: No more than 13.34 mm
Section held by anti–vibration bracket
94 mm to 115 mm
(A board whose
dimensions fall
outside the above
range cannot be held
by the anti–vibration
bracket.)
127mm
No more than 170 mm
Unit: mm
NOTE
FANUC does not guarantee the operation of, or provide maintenance for, commercially
available ISA expansion boards.
183
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
(2) ISA expansion board installation procedure
(See Fig. 8.7.1.)
(a) Remove the anti–vibration brackets.
(b) Insert each board into the connector. Push it fully home.
(c) Secure each board with the screw.
(d) Attach the anti–vibration bracket to each board by tightening
screws while holding the bracket against the board.
Slot A
Slot B
Screws
Anti–vibration
bracket B
Anti–vibration
bracket A
Screw
tightening
section A
Screw
tightening
section B
Fig. 8.7.1 Installing ISA expansion boards
184
8. CONNECTING THE PC INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
8.7.2
Operating Precautions
(1) Address map
D The memory space is identical to that of IBM PC–compatible
personal computers. There is no special area used by Series 210i.
D In the I/O space, addresses 280H to 28FH are used by the Series
210i, such that they are not available for the ISA expansion boards.
(These addresses can be changed, however. They can be set with
a rotary switch on the PC interface connector panel unit.)
Other areas in the I/O space are identical to an IBM PC–compatible
personal computer.
The I/O addresses of Series 210i are:
LMN0H to LMNFH.
SW3
SW2
SW1
(L)
(M)
(N)
L, M and N are set as shown below
when the unit is shipped from FANUC.
L = 0 (SW3)
M = 2 (SW2)
N = 8 (SW1)
(2) Interrupt, DMA request
D Of the IRQ signals, the following are not used by the Series 210i.
IRQ10, IRQ11
D Of the DRQ signals, the following is used by the Series 210i.
DRQ2: Floppy disk drive.
(3) Installation and environmental conditions for ISA expansion boards
See Section 3.1. If, however, the specifications of the ISA expansion
boards are inferior to those listed in Section 3.1, these conditions are
restricted by those of the ISA expansion boards.
(4) Power supply to ISA expansion boards
The table below indicates the ratings of the power supply that can be
fed to the ISA expansion boards mounted on the ISA expansion unit.
(The total values for two slots are indicated.)
Voltage
Rating
+5V"10%
3.0 A maximum
+12V"10%
0.5 A maximum
–12V"10%
0.1 A maximum
–5V"10%
0.05 A maximum
(5) Other
In addition to the cautions given above, normal operation may be
impossible under any of the following conditions.
D When pull–up or pull–down processing has been applied to the ISA
bus signals.
D When the refresh cycle of the ISA bus is in use.
In addition to the above, note that further conditions may be added
in the future.
185
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
9
B–63003EN/04
FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
186
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.1
OVERVIEW
9.2
CAUTIONS
The FANUC intelligent terminal type 2 (hereafter called intelligent
terminal type 2) is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer. Connecting
the intelligent terminal type 2 to an i Series CNC system via a high–speed
optical fiber (high–speed serial bus) provides the system with personal
computer functions.
The copyrights to Windows 95, Windows NT, and other supplied
software used in the intelligent terminal type 2 are owned by Microsoft
Corporation of the USA, Chips and Technologies of the USA,
International Business Machines Corporation of the USA, Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co. of Japan, Ltd and/or Fanuc Ltd of Japan.
The software stated above and the related manuals may not be used or
reproduced in part or whole without permission. They may not be sold
separately from the intelligent terminal type 2.
They can be used only when the purchaser agrees all the terms and
conditions stated in the license attached to the intelligent terminal type 2.
The purchaser’s applying power to the intelligent terminal type 2 is
deemed as their intention to agree to the terms and conditions in the
license.
NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation of the USA.
2 Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
of the USA.
3 Other company names and product names mentioned in
this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
187
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.3
CONNECTION
Connection with the intelligent terminal
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Control
unit
Intelligent
terminal
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
FA
typewriter–
style
keyboard
24VDC
A 50 cm (approximate
length) flat cable for soft
keys is provided with the
intelligent terminal.
If the intelligent terminal is
equipped with a touch
panel, this cable need not
be used.
MDI
Unit
ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂ
JD45
CK2
CK1
This section describes the connection of only those components enclosed in the dotted lines
above. Either an FA typewriter–style keyboard or an MDI unit can be connected.
188
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.4
GENERAL
CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
9.4.1
Intelligent Terminal
Having Neither Soft
Keys nor a Touch
Panel
189
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
Ž
Ž
Ÿ
Ÿ
CNC control unit
Power supply unit
HSSB interface board
HSSB (COP7)
Other printed–circuit
boards
MDI (JA2)
: Optical link module cable
: AMP (dynamic)
: AMP (6–pin mini DIN)
: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
(20–pin PCR)
: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
: AMP (4–pin EI series)
: Others
Power supply (+24 VDC)
Intelligent terminal type 2
FA
typewriter–
style
keyboard
ŽŽ
Ž
ŽŽ
Ž
10.4 TFT liquid crystal panel
or 10.4 FA–use liquid crystal panel
HSSB (COP7)
PCMCIA card slot
Mouse
+24V (CP5)
*1
KEYBOARD
(CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
*1
ŸŸ
Ÿ
ŸŸ
Ÿ
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD SIGNAL (CD34)
ISA expansion
board
ISA expansion
board
Mouse
I/O unit
Power
supply
I/O unit
Power
supply
RS–232C channel 2
RS232–2 (JD34)
ISA
expansion
backplane
Typewriter–style
keyboard
RS–232C channel 1
RS232–1 (JD33)
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCMCI
card
*1
*1
Printer
Power
supply
Floppy
disk drive
ISA
expansion
*1 This device can be used only for application development; it cannot be used for a production run.
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual for descriptions of
connections not explained above.
190
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.4.2
Intelligent Terminal
Having Soft Keys but
No Touch Panel
CNC control unit
ŽŽ
Power supply unit
HSSB interface board
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
HSSB (COP7)
Other printed–circuit
boards
MDI (JA2)
: Optical link module cable
: AMP (dynamic)
: AMP (6–pin mini DIN)
: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
(20–pin PCR)
: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
: AMP (4–pin EI series)
: Others
Stand–alone type MDI
(CNK1)
Power supply (+24 VDC)
(CNK2)
Intelligent terminal type 2
Soft key
ŽŽ
Ž
ŽŽ
Ž
10.4 TFT liquid crystal panel
or 10.4 FA–use liquid crystal panel
HSSB (COP7)
+24V (CP5)
*1
KEYBOARD (CD32A)
*1
MOUSE (CD32B)
ŸŸ
Ÿ
ŸŸ
Ÿ
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD SIGNAL (CD34)
PCMCIA card slot
ISA
expansion
backplane
ISA expansion
board
I/O unit
Power
supply
I/O unit
Power
supply
RS–232C channel 2
RS232–2 (JD34)
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCMCIA
card
Mouse
RS–232C channel 1
RS232–1 (JD33)
ISA expansion
board
Typewriter–style
keyboard
*1
Printer
Power
supply
Floppy
disk drive
ISA
expansion
*1 This device can be used only for application development; it cannot be used for a production run.
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual for descriptions of
connections not explained above.
191
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.4.3
Intelligent Terminal
Having a Touch Panel
but No Soft Key
CNC control unit
Ž
Ž
Ÿ
Ÿ
Power supply unit
HSSB interface board
HSSB (COP7)
Other printed–circuit
boards
MDI (JA2)
: Optical link module cable
: AMP (dynamic)
: AMP (6–pin mini DIN)
: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
(20–pin PCR)
: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (34–pin flat cable)
: AMP (4–pin EI series)
: Others
Stand–alone type MDI (*1)
(CNK1)
Power supply (+24 VDC)
Intelligent terminal type 2
FA typewriter–style
keyboard
(*1)
ŽŽ
Ž
ŽŽ
Ž
10.4 TFT liquid crystal panel
or 10.4 FA–use liquid crystal panel
HSSB (COP7)
PCMCIA card slot
Mouse
+24V (CP5)
*2
Typewriter–style
keyboard
*2
Mouse
KEYBOARD (CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
RS232–1 (JD33)
RS232–2 (JD34)
RS–232C channel 1(*3)
RS–232C channel 2
ŸŸ
Ÿ
ŸŸ
Ÿ
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD SIGNAL (CD34)
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCMCIA
card
*2
ISA
expansion
backplane
ISA expansion
board
ISA expansion
board
*2
I/O unit
Power
supply
Printer
Power
supply
Floppy
disk drive
ISA
expansion
*1 Either a stand–alone type MDI or FA typewriter–style keyboard can be used.
*2 This device can be used only for application development; it cannot be used for a production run.
*3 RS–232C channel 1 is used for the touch panel. It cannot be used for any other device.
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual for descriptions of
connections not explained above.
192
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.5
SPECIFICATIONS
9.5.1
Installation
Environmental
Conditions
When using intelligent terminal type 2, observe the following conditions
relating to the cabinet in which the terminal is installed.
Ambient temperature
Operating: 5°C to 45°C (*1)
Storage: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature drift
20°C/hour (maximum)
Ambient relative
humidity
Regular: 10% to 75% (without condensation)
Short term (within one month): 10% to 90% (without
condensation)
Vibration
Operating: 0.5 G or less(*2)
Storage: 1.0 G or less
Atmosphere
Enclosure in a completely sealed cabinet
Altitude
Operating: –60 to 1000 m
Storage: –60 to 1200 m
*1 Operating ambient temperature:
A temperature sensor in the intelligent terminal type 2 is used to check
whether the temperature range described above is satisfied. (The
detected state can be confirmed from the LEDs on the high–speed
serial bus interface board of the CNC.)
1) If the specified temperature range is not satisfied when the power
is switched on, the system hangs without displaying anything on
the screen. This error status can be confirmed using the LEDs
mentioned above. When the temperature falls within the specified
range the system, including the terminal, starts automatically.
2) If the temperature moves outside the specified range after the
system starts, an error is detected when an attempt is made to access
the hard disk.
*2 Vibration:
The intelligent terminal type 2 and its built–in hard disk may be
subject to vibration. After the terminal is mounted on the machine,
carefully check for vibration. If an ISA expansion board is used, the
vibration tolerance may be lower than that listed above, depending on
the specification of the card.
CAUTION
Even when the environmental conditions listed above are
satisfied, an operator error or an accident may destroy data
on the hard disk. This is quite likely if the power is switched
off while the hard disk is being accessed. Do NOT switch
off the power while the hard disk is being accessed. Be sure
inform end users of this caution. Always create and keep
a backup copy of the data on the hard disk to prepare for the
worst case.
Also note that options for development and maintenance use may not
satisfy the above requirements.
193
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
9.5.2
Power Supply
Specification
B–63003EN/04
(1) Input power
(a) Specification
To use the intelligent terminal type 2, prepare a power supply that
satisfies the requirements listed below:
+24 VDC ±10%
Input power supply voltage
Input power supply current
3.5 A (maximum)
NOTE
Use of the FANUC I/O unit also requires +1 A.
(b) Timing
The intelligent terminal type 2 should be switched on and off
within ±100 ms of the CNC power supply being switched on and
off.
(2) Supply power
The intelligent terminal type 2 can supply power, as listed below, to
peripheral equipment. Check the amount of current drawn by each
unit you want to use.
Supply voltage
Peripheral unit
Current (maximum)
+12V
ISA,
FDD (CN2)
400mA
+5V
FDD (CN2), keyboard
(CD32, JD33), mouse (JD33)
1000mA
ISA
3500mA
–12V
ISA
180mA
–5V
ISA
74mA
(3) Heat dissipation
37 W (during normal operation)
NOTE
The amount of heat generated by the intelligent terminal
type 2 increases if a peripheral unit or ISA expansion board
is connected.
9.5.3
Shutdown
Before switching off the intelligent terminal type 2, terminate all
applications and the OS according to the normal shutdown procedure. If
the terminal is switched off while an application or the OS is still running,
the terminal may fail to operate normally next time it is switched on. In
the worst case, the initialization command for the hard disk drive may
become inoperable.
194
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.6
The space shown below must be available around the intelligent terminal
type 2 after it is installed.
INSTALLATION
SPACE
A: Space for cables. Provide an appropriate area at A so that the cables
to be used can be installed. If an ISA expansion board is used,
determine dimension X so that the cable to be used with the ISA
expansion board can be installed.
B: This space is required for battery replacement in the intelligent
terminal mounted on the panel. Battery replacement requires that the
operator work at the rear of the terminal.
C: This space is required for ventilation.
D If you want to perform fuse replacement in intelligent terminal type 2
while the terminal is mounted on the panel, there must be sufficient
space available for maintenance work at the rear of the terminal.
80
50
C
B
Front
C
B
ISA expansion
board location
100
Rear
Fuse
Battery
A
A
X
110
290
(Unit: mm)
195
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT AND
CONNECTION
9.7.1
Connector Layout
Diagram
Rear view
CN2
CD32B
CP5
JD33
JD9
CD32A
JD34
PCMCIA card slot
(LCD side)
CD34
COP7
Marking
Function
CP5
CD34
CD32A
CD32B
JD9
JD34
JD33
CN2
COP7
Main power supply input
Floppy disk drive signal
Typewriter–style keyboard
Mouse
Parallel port
Serial port 2
Serial port 1
Floppy disk drive power supply output
High–speed serial bus (HSSB)
PCMCIA card
³
³
³
³
³
³
³
³
³
³
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
9.7.6
9.7.7
9.7.8
9.7.3
9.7.9
9.7.11
Soft key
(connected to stand–alone
type MDI)
³9.7.10
NOTE
1 No ISA expansion unit is used in the above example.
2 The soft key is provided only on the intelligent terminal type
2 with soft keys.
196
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.2
Main Power Supply
Input
Intelligent terminal type 2
CP5
1
+24V
2
0V
+24 VDC input
3
AMP
2–178288–3 (CASE)
1–175218–5 (CONTACT)
(1) Cable connection
+24V
0V
1
+24V
2
0V
(2) Recommended cable conductor
Use a cable whose conductor is not smaller than 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
NOTE
This power supply cable should be routed away from the
signal lines of the intelligent terminal.
197
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.3
Floppy Disk Drive
(Signal and Power
Supply)
Intelligent terminal type 2
Panel–mount type 3.5″ floppy
disk drive
CD34
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
CN2
1234
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
1
2
3
4
DENSEL
:INDEX
:MT0
:DS1
:DS0
:MT1
:DIR
:STEP
:WDATA
:WE
:TRK0
:WPRT
:RDATA
HDSEL
:DSKCH
+12V
0V
0V
+5V
B
A
IDC type FAS–34–17
produced by Yamaichi
Denki
AMP EI series 4–pin connector
Housing: 171822–4
Contact: 170262 and 170263
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
J2
1
2
3
4
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
0V
(NC)
(NC)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
DENSEL
:INDEX
:DS0
:DS1
:MT0
:DIR
:STEP
:WDATA
:WE
:TRK0
:WPRT
:RDATA
HDSEL
:DSKCH
4321
NOTE
1 This is a standard interface for the IBM PC compatible. Note the following:
D Only two floppy disk density modes (720 Kbytes and 1.44 Mbytes) are supported.
D The DENSEL signal level is fixed to low.
D Not all commercial floppy disk drives require both +12 V and +5 V power supplies. If your
floppy disk drive requires +12 VDC, pay careful attention to its power requirements.
2 Commercial floppy disk drives are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers to
some degree. It is not guaranteed that the intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every
commercial floppy disk drive. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of
the floppy disk drives they select. Keep in mind that commercial floppy disk drives are neither
dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
3 The interface on the drive side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the drive with which it is used.
198
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
(1) Cable connection
CNC
CD34
CN2
+5V
0V
0V
+12V
4
3
2
1
0V
DENSEL
0V
(NC)
0V
(NC)
0V
*INDEX
0V
*MT0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS0
0V
*MT1
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WDATA
0V
*WE
0V
*TRK0
0V
*WPRT
0V
*RDATA
0V
HDSEL
0V
*DSKCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Pin assignment for connector B
on the previous page (see Note)
CN2
+5V
0V
0V
+12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
0V
DENSEL
0V
(NC)
0V
(NC)
0V
*INDEX
0V
*MT0
0V
(NC)
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS0
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WDATA
0V
*WE
0V
*TRK0
0V
*WPRT
0V
*RDATA
0V
HDSEL
0V
*DSKCH
J2
1
2
3
4
+5V
0V
(NC)
(NC)
Panel–mount type
3.5″ floppy disk unit
J1
Pin assignment for
connector A on the
previous page (see
Note)
J2
1
2
3
4
+5V
0V
(NC)
(NC)
This is the standard interface for the IBM PC compatible.
Commercially available cables are cross–connected between pins 10
and 16 (between the CNC and drive A) as shown above. In this case,
“drive No. setting pin” on drive A should be set to 1 (second drive).
The floppy disk unit (A02B–0207–C006) offered by FANUC should
be attached to connector A, described above.
(2) Specification of the recommended cable
A02B–0207–K801: Signal cable and power supply cable (1.0 m long)
199
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.3.1
When using this unit on the machine, observe the following cautions:
Operating environment
(1) Dust
Because the intelligent terminal type 2 is not covered with panels,
except for the front door section, it must be enclosed in a sealed
cabinet. While the door is open, dust can enter the floppy disk unit and
cabinet via the disk insertion slot. If the terminal is installed in a dusty
environment, more floppy disk failures than normal may occur.
(2) Temperature
+5°C to +45°C (operating)
The operating temperature range for this unit is stricter than ordinary
units because of the restrictions imposed by the floppy disk. So, pay
special attention to the way it is cooled.
Avoid blowing air directly from a cooling fan, as dust in the air may
stick to the components of the unit.
9.7.3.2
Do NOT switch on the power to intelligent terminal type 2 while a floppy
disk is inserted, and especially when the floppy disk is being accessed
(LED is on). Machine tool builders are requested to provide this
information to their end users.
Handling precautions
200
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.4
High–speed Serial Bus
(HSSB)
Intelligent terminal type 2
HSSB interface board (CNC side)
Optical fiber
COP7
COP7
1) Recommended cables (optical fiber cables)
Only the following optical fiber cables can be used.
A66L–6001–0026#L1R003: Cable length = 1 m
A66L–6001–0026#L3R003: Cable length = 3 m
A66L–6001–0026#L5R003: Cable length = 5 m
A66L–6001–0026#L7R003: Cable length = 7 m
A66L–6001–0026#L10R03: Cable length = 10 m
A66L–6001–0026#L15R03: Cable length = 15 m
A66L–6001–0026#L20R03: Cable length = 20 m
A66L–6001–0026#L30R03: Cable length = 30 m
A66L–6001–0026#L50R03: Cable length = 50 m
A66L–6001–0026#L100R3: Cable length = 100 m
NOTE
1 The high–speed serial bus cannot use an optical fiber cable
designed for the FANUC I/O link, FSSB extension line, or
serial spindle.
2 Machine tool builders cannot cut or extend optical fiber
cables. Select an appropriate type from the above list.
201
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.5
Typewriter–style
Keyboard
Intelligent terminal type 2
Typewriter–style keyboard
(commercial model)
CD32A
(mini DIN6)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–
style keyboard
1) Recommended full keyboard
A86L–0001–0210 . . . . . . 101–key keyboard (commercial model)
. . . . . . for development and maintenance use only
A86L–0001–0211 . . . . . . 106–key keyboard (commercial model)
. . . . . . for development and maintenance use only
A02B–0234–C120#JC . . FA typewriter–style keyboard 
(Japanese–language version) 

A02B–0234–C120#EC . . FA typewriter–style keyboard 
(English–language version) 
. . . . . . Typewriter–style keyboard
designed to be incorporated
into the intelligent terminal
NOTE
1 Commercial typewriter–style keyboards are prone to
compatibility problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that the intelligent terminal type
2 can operate with every commercial typewriter–style
keyboard. Machine tool builders are requested to check the
operability of the typewriter–style keyboards they select.
Keep in mind that general commercial typewriter–style
keyboards are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into the
system, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possible
so that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to the
connector.
202
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.6
Mouse
Intelligent terminal type 2
Mouse (commercial model)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–
style keyboard
Mouse (commercial model)
1) Recommended mouse
A86L–0001–0212 . . . . . Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial model)
. . . . . . for development and maintenance use only
NOTE
1 Commercial mice are prone to compatibility problems with
personal computers to some degree. It is not guaranteed
that the intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every
commercial mouse. Machine tool builders are requested to
check the operability of the mice they select. Keep in mind
that general commercial mice are neither dust–proof nor
moisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into the
system, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possible
so that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to the
connector.
203
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.7
Centronics Parallel
Port
Intelligent terminal type 2
Example) Printer
JD9
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
STD0
11
:STB
1
:STB
19
0V
2
STD1
12
0V
2
STD
20
0V
3
STD2
13
:AFD
3
STD1
21
0V
4
STD3
14
0V
4
STD2
22
0V
5
STD4
15
:INIT
5
STD3
23
0V
6
STD5
16
0V
7
STD5
25
0V
7
STD6
17
:SLIN
6
STD4
24
0V
8
STD7
18
:ACK
8
STD6
26
0V
9
PE
19
:ERROR
9
STD7
27
0V
SLCT
20
BUSY
10
:ACK
28
0V
11
BUSY
29
0V
12
PE
30
0V
13
SLCT
31
:INIT
14
:AFD
32
:ERROR
33
0V
10
15
1) Recommended cable conductor
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD9 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
16
0V
34
17
FG
35
18
36
:SLIN
NOTE
1 The interface on the printer side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the printer with which it is used.
2 Commercial printers are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every commercial
printer. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the printers they select.
Keep in mind that general commercial printers are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
204
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.8
Serial Port 2
Intelligent terminal type 2
Example) Host computer
JD34F
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
(DBM–25S)
1
RD
11
SD
1
FG
2
0V
12
0V
2
SD
3
DR
13
ER
3
RD
4
0V
14
0V
4
RS
5
CS
15
RS
5
CS
6
0V
16
0V
6
DR
7
CD
17
7
SG
8
0V
18
8
CD
9
RI
19
(+24V)
20
10
( ):
9
(+24V)
10
11
Used for a FANUC
I/O unit
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
RI
23
24
25
13
1) Recommended cable conductor
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD36 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE
1 The interface on the host computer side shown above is
only an example. Design an interface cable according to the
specification of the host computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface of the personal computer
interface connection unit side, shown above, can be used
only with FANUC I/O units (such as the FANUC cassette and
FANUC Handy File). Do not use these lines for any other
purpose. Also, do not connect more than one of these units
to one CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24 V power supply
capacity may be exceeded.
3 Do not connect anything to pins that are not labeled.
205
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
9.7.9
B–63003EN/04
For an intelligent terminal having a touch panel, the touch panel controller
uses serial port 1. So this connector cannot be used for any other purpose.
The touch panel controller is connected, using a dedicated connector
rather than JD33.
Serial Port 1
Intelligent terminal type 2
Example) Host computer
JD33
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
(DBM–25S)
1
RD
11
SD
1
FG
2
0V
12
0V
2
SD
3
DR
13
ER
3
RD
4
0V
14
0V
4
RS
5
CS
15
RS
5
CS
6
0V
16
0V
6
DR
7
CD
17
7
SG
8
0V
18
8
CD
9
RI
19
10
(+24V)
20
( ):
Used for a FANUC
I/O unit
9
(+24V)
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
RI
23
24
25
13
1) Recommended cable conductor
A66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD36 side)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE
1 he interface on the host computer side shown above is only
an example. Design an interface cable according to the
specification of the host computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface on the personal computer
interface connection unit side shown above can be used
only for FANUC I/O units (such as the FANUC cassette and
FANUC Handy File). Do not use these lines for any other
purpose. Also, do not connect more than one of these units
to one CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24 V power supply
capacity may be exceeded.
3 Do not connect anything to those pins that are not labeled.
206
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.7.10
Soft Keys
Intelligent terminal type 2
Stand–alone type MDI unit
CNK2
50cm
(1) Cable length: 50 cm
207
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
9.8
ISA EXPANSION
BOARD
9.8.1
Installation Method
(1) Usable boards
Up to two ISA expansion boards (shown below) can be used in
intelligent terminal type 2.
Components installed on the rear surface of
the board may not be taller than 3.81 mm.
Components installed on the front surface of the board
may not be taller than 13.34 mm.
Portions held with damping metal fixtures
5
Between 79 mm and
113 mm (inclusive)
(If the board size does
not fall within the range
stated above, it can not
be held with damping
metal fixtures.
5
20
20
170 mm or less
Unit : mm
NOTE
FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
commercial ISA expansion board and is not responsible for
its maintenance.
(2) ISA expansion board installation procedure
(See the following diagram.)
a) Remove the damping metal fixtures.
b) Fully insert the board into the connector.
c) Fasten the board with the provided screws.
d) Screw down the damping metal fixtures while holding them
against the board.
If more than one ISA expansion board is installed, the board
installed in slot A must be shorter than that installed in slot B;
otherwise, it will be impossible to hold both with damping metal
fixtures.
208
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
Slot B
Damping metal fixture A
Screw
Slot A
Damping metal
fixture B
Screw–down portion B
Screw–down portion A
ISA expansion board installation
9.8.2
Handling Precautions
(1) Address map
D Intelligent terminal type 2 uses the same memory space
configuration as the IBM PC and compatibles. It cannot use
E0000H to EFFFFH, however.
D The ISA expansion board cannot use the I/O space between 0280H
and 028FH, because the intelligent terminal type 2 uses this I/O
space. However, these addresses can be changed using the rotary
switch on the main printed–circuit board.
The I/O addresses for the intelligent terminal
type 2 are LMN0H to LMNFH. They are
factory–set as follows:
L = 0 (SW3)
M = 2 (SW2)
N = 8 (SW1)
Rear view
209
9. FANUC INTELLIGENT TERMINAL TYPE 2
B–63003EN/04
The other areas for intelligent terminal type 2 are the same as for the
IBM PC and compatibles.
D COM1, COM2, and parallel ports are specified at setup.
(2) Interrupt and DMA requests
D The IRQ signals not used by the intelligent terminal type 2 are as
follows: IRQ10 and IRQ11
D The DRQ signal used by the intelligent terminal type 2 is as
follows: DRQ2 (floppy disk drive)
(3) Allowable power supply current
For the allowable power supply current for the ISA expansion board,
see Section 9.5.2, “Power supply specification.”
(4) Cabling
For cabling, see Section 9.6, “Installation Space.”
(5) Environmental conditions for ISA expansion board installation
For the environmental conditions that must be satisfied when
installing an ISA expansion board, see the respective ISA expansion
board specifications. If your ISA expansion board does not satisfy the
conditions stated in Section 9.5.1, “Installation environmental
conditions,” the environmental conditions for your intelligent
terminal type 2 will default to those for your ISA expansion board.
(6) Miscellaneous
In addition to the handling precautions stated above, the ISA
expansion board may not operate normally if:
D Its ISA signal is pulled up or down.
D It uses the ISA bus refresh cycle.
D It functions as the bus master to perform 8–bit write access to the
host.
Note that the AHA–154 SCSI interface board manufactured by
Adaptec cannot be used in intelligent terminal type 2.
It is likely that conditions will be added in the future.
FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any ISA
expansion board. In addition, FANUC is not able to provide
troubleshooting or maintenance related to ISA expansion
boards.
210
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
211
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.1
GENERAL
B–63003EN/04
The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, cell
controller, I/O Unit–A, or Power Mate and transfers I/O signals (bit data)
at high speeds between each device. The FANUC I/O Link regards one
device as the master and other devices as slaves when more than one
device is connected. Input signals from the slaves are sent to the master
at specified intervals. Output signals from the master are also sent to the
slaves at specified intervals.
212
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.2
CONNECTION
On i Series, the interface connector JD1A for I/O Link is provided on the
main board.
In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The master
is the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the I/O unit–A. The slaves
are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O
Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be connected as a group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O Link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1A
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 10.2.1. Use the
figures when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
Main
board
JD1A
I/O256/256 or less per group
FANUC I/O Link
I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link
Series 21
control unit
FANUC I/O Unit– MODEL A 2max
Base unit 1
Base unit 2
JD1B
JD1A
Max.
16 group
JD1B
JD1A
Group
#0 Magnetic
circuit
Group
#1
…
…
JD1B
JD1A
Fig. 10.2 I/O Link connection diagram
213
Group
#2
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Control unit
I/O Link
JD1A
I/O UNIT–A
JD1B
I/O UNIT–A
DC24V
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to an i Series
CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
214
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.2.1
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable
Control unit or preceding slave unit
I/O unit MODEL A
JD1A
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SIN
:SIN 12
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14
15
16
17
18
19
(+5V)
20
0V
0V
0V
0V
JD1B
(PCR–E20LMD)
JD1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(+5V)
(+5V)
11
SIN
:SIN 12
SOUT 13
:SOUT 14
15
16
17
18
19
(+5V)
20
JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
0V
0V
0V
0V
Next slave
unit
(+5V)
(+5V)
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Cable wirinr
SIN
:SIN
SOUT
:SOUT
0V
0V
0V
0V
3
4
1
2
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
SOUT
:SOUT
SIN
:SIN
0V
0V
0V
0V
Shield
Ground Plate
Recommended wire material
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10pair)
Recommended cable connectors
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
The recommended cable–end connector F130–20S (Hirose Electric Co.,
Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A for the i Series CNC with a
LCD–mounted type panel.
215
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link Optical Fiber
Cable
B–63003EN/04
The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O Link adapter. The length of
the electrical cable connected to the optical conversion adapter must not
exceed 2 m.
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable is more than 15 meters long.
D When the cable is run between different cabinets, and the cabinets
cannot be connected with each other via a ground wire of 5.5 mm2 or
more.
If the power magnetics cabinet includes an I/O Link slave unit, and
cables are connected through a duct to the operator’s panel (as shown
below), the control section I/O Link slave unit can be assumed to be
incorporated in the same cabinet.
CNC
control
section
Operator’s
panel I/O
Distribution I/O,
etc.
Operator’s panel
Other units
Power magnetics cabinet
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for
example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable
such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.
External dimension of
optical link adapter
66.0
4–M3
connector
for unit
connecting
JD1
Optical connector
COP1
FANUC
18.0
7.0
45.0
40.0
Unit : mm
216
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Weight of optical link
adapter
Main body: Approx. 100 g.
Connection
D Connection diagram
Unit
JD1
Unit
JD1
JD1A
JD1B
Connecting
COP1
cable between
Optical I/O
unit
link adapter
Optical
cable
COP1
Optical I/O
link adapter
Connecting
cable between
unit
D Interunit connecting cables
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
SIN
:SIN
SOUT
:SOUT
+5V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
Unit side
JD1A,JD1B
Adapter side
JD1
SIN(01)
:SIN(02)
SOUT(03)
:SOUT(04)
+5V(09)
+5V(18)
+5V(20)
0V(11)
0V(12)
0V(13)
0V(14)
0V(15)
0V(16)
(03)SOUT
(04):SOUT
(01)SIN
(02):SIN
(09)+5V
(18)+5V
(20)+5V
(11)0V
(12)0V
(13)0V
(14)0V
(15)0V
(16)0V
1 Recommended cable connectors
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
NOTE
The recommended cable–end connector FI30–20S (Hirose
Electric Co., Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A for
the i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
2 Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
3 Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
217
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
D Optical cable
B–63003EN/04
1 Specification:
A66L–6001–0009# L5R003 5 m long
A66L–6001–0009# L10R03 10 m long
A66L–6001–0009# L15R03 15 m long
2 Cable length
Maximum length: 200 m (standard type)
Maximum length: 100 m (high–speed type)
NOTE
Be careful not bend optical cables to a radius of 25 mm or
less. Be extremely careful not to twist them.
D Maximum number of connectable stages
Up to 16 high–speed type I/O link adapter stages can be connected in
one I/O link, while only up to five conventional I/O link adapters
(standard type) can be connected.
1) Standard type (A13B–0154–B001) ... up to 5 adapter stages can be
connected in series
2) Standard type (A13B–0154–B002) ... up to 16 adapter stages can
be connected in series
NC or
I/O Unit
Optical I/O
link adapter
Optical I/O
link adapter
NC or
I/O Unit
Optical I/O
link adapter
Optical I/O
link adapter
NC or
I/O Unit
One stage
NOTE
It is impossible to use both high–speed and standard type
adapters on the same line.
D Power supply
The same power supply type can be used for both the standard type
(A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type (A13B–0154–B002).
(a) Power supply voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 V (at receiving end)
(b) Required current: 200 mA
218
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Installation conditions
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mount
it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with other
circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting the optical
link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fitting using the case
fixing screws (M3) of the optical link adapter.
L fitting
Required parts
For making up an I/O Link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
1
2
3
D
Optical I/O Link adapter
2
Interunit connecting cable 2
Optical cable
1
Relay with an optical fiber connection adapter
For the outline drawing of the optical fiber connection adapter, see
Appendix D.
NOTE
Optical fiber cables can be relayed only at are location.
When a high–speed optical link adapter is used, no optical
fiber connection adapter can be used.
D Maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s)
The table below shows the maximum transmission distance with an
optical fiber cable(s), which varies depending on whether a connection
adapter is used for a relay.
Standard type
High–speed type
219
Relay
Maximum transmission distance
No
200m
Yes
100m (total)
No
100m
Yes
N/A
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.2.3
Connection when Two
Channels of FANUC I/O
Links are Used
B–63003EN/04
Except for the FS20i, two channels of FANUC I/O Link interfaces are
provided. Since this feature is additional, however, some previous
control units may not be capable of using two channels. Use of two
channels allows the number of usable I/Os to be increased to 2048 for both
inputs and outputs (previously, only 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs were
usable).
Technical report called FANUC PMC Ladder Language Programming
Supplement (document number: B–61863/12–5) is available separately
to let you know how to use this feature, the overall version of the
corresponding PC board, PMCs that can take advantage of this feature,
and the series and version of their management software as well as the
series and version of the CNC management software.
NOTE
When this feature is to be used by the i Series CNCs
described above, PMC–SB6 needs to be specified.
The PMC on the loader control board cannot use this
feature.
Signals for two channels are assigned to the FANUC I/O Link connector
on the CNC. When using two channels, use the I/O Link branching
adapter to branch off the FANUC I/O Link.
Connection
CNC
JD1A
I/O Link branching
adapter
JD44B
JD1A–1
FANUC I/O Link channel 1
JD1A–2
FANUC I/O Link channel 2
Connection after the I/O Link branching adapter is the
same as that for the FANUC I/O Link.
Part number of the I/O Link branching adapter: A20B–1007–0680 (60 g)
Restrictions
When two channels are used, a total of up to eight FANUC B I/O unit
groups can be connected to them.
220
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Connection between the
CNC and I/O Link
branching adapter
CNC
JD1A
(such as PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
1 SIN1
11 0V
2 *SIN1
12 0V
3 SOUT1
13 0V
4 *SOUT1 14 0V
5 SIN2
15 0V
6 *SIN2
16 0V
7 SOUT2
17
8 *SOUT2 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V)
19 (+24V)
10 (+24V)
20 (+5V)
I/O Link branching adapter
JD44B
(PCR–E20MDT)
1 SIN1
11 0V
2 *SIN1
12 0V
3 SOUT1
13 0V
4 *SOUT1 14 0V
5 SIN2
15 0V
6 *SIN2
16 0V
7 SOUT2
17
8 *SOUT2 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V)
19
10
20 (+5V)
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical
fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the
+5V pin unconnected.
Do not connect anything to the +24V pin.
Cabling
CNC
I/O Link branching adapter
JD44B
JD1A
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
9
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
9
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT2
*SOUT2
SIN2
*SIN2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
Shield
h
When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave
the +5V pin unconnected.
Recommended cable connectors: PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo
Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
221
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
The FI30–20S connector (from Hirose Electric) cannot be used as
connector JD1A on the main CPU board in the separate–type i Series.
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P
Connection between the
I/O Link branching
adapter and FANUC I/O
Link I/O units
The I/O Link branching adapter can be connected to I/O units in the same
way as for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. See 10.2.1.
Cable length
CNC
I/O Link branching
adapter
JD1A
lA
I/O unit
JD44B
JD1A–1
lB
JD1B
JD1A–2
The total of lA and lB must not exceed 10 m; where lA is the length of
the cable between connector JD1A on the CNC and connector JD44B on
the I/O Link branching adapter, and lB is the length of the cable between
connector JD1A–1 or JD1A–2 on the I/O Link branching adapter and
connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are accommodated in
the same cabinet, however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
Installation of the I/O
Link branching adapter
Install the I/O Link branching adapter in a hermetically sealed cabinet like
the CNC.
222
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
External dimensions of
the I/O Link branching
adapter
60
JD44B
JD1A–1
JD1A–2
45
85
Unit: mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and
routing of cables.
Installation of the I/O
Link branching adapter
1) Installation on the DIN rail
35
25
Unit: mm
Recommended DIN rail
2) Screwing
11.6
2–M4
70
Unit: mm
Drilling on the plate
223
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.3
UNITS THAT CAN BE
CONNECTED USING
FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Basically, the i Series can be connected to any unit that has a FANUC I/O
Link slave interface. The following table lists general units that can be
connected to the i Series. Detailed descriptions of each unit are given later
in this section. For details of other units, refer to the documentation
provided with the unit.
General units that can be connected to the i Series
Unit
Description
Reference
FANUC I/O
Unit–MODEL A
Modular I/O unit that supports a Connection and
combination of the input/output signals maintenance
required by a power magnetics circuit. manual
B–61813E
FANUC I/O
Unit–MODEL B
Distribution type I/O unit that supports a Connection and
combination of input/output signals maintenance
required by a power magnetics circuit. manual
B–62163E
Connector
I/O module
panel Distribution type I/O unit that handles Sec. 10.4
the input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; it has an
interface with a manual pulse
generator.
Operator’s panel Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.5
I/O module
operator’s panel; it has an interface with
(for matrix input)
a manual pulse generator.
Operator’s
I/O module
panel Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.6
operator’s panel that handles the
input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; it has an
interface with a manual pulse
generator.
Power magnetics Unit having an interface with a power Sec. 10.6
panel I/O module
magnetics panel that handles the
input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit.
Machine operator’s Unit having an interface with a matrix of Sec. 10.7
panel interface unit key switches and LEDs on the machine
operator’s panel as well as an interface
with a manual pulse generator.
Operator’s panel Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.8
connection unit
operator’s panel
Source type output Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 10.9
operator’s
panel operator’s panel; a source type output
connection unit
circuit is used in the DO signal output
driver.
FANUC I/O Link Unit connecting FANUC I/O Link Sec. 10.10
connection unit
masters to enable the transfer of DI/DO
signals
FANUC servo unit β Unit connected with the CNC via the Sec. 10.11
series
FANUC I/O Link to control a servo motor
(with I/O Link)
224
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4
CONNECTION OF
CONNECTOR PANEL
I/O MODULE
10.4.1
Configuration
Flat cable for module connection
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
Extension module 1
(with manual pulse generator)
Basic module
I/O Link cable
Manual pulse generator cable
NOTE
For direction connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are
installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN
rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
225
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.2
Connection Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O Link
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
CA52
CB150
Basic module
MPG
+24 V power supply
MPG
JA3
DI/DO
module
CA53
CB150
CA52
Extension module
(with MPG (Note))
CA53
2A output
module
CB154
CA52
Extension module 2
CA53
Analog
input
module
CB157
CA52
Extension module 3
226
Connector panel
MPG
Machine side
DI/DO
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 Ensure that the extension module with the MPG interface is located nearest to the basic
module, as shown in the figure. The MPG can be connected to the connector panel I/O module
only when the i series CNC is used. When the connector panel I/O module is used together
with a unit (such as an operator’s panel I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting
another MPG interface, only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC
connected to the I/O Link is effective.
2 The connection diagram above shows an example of using a DI/DO module, 2A output module,
and analog input module as expansion modules. These expansion modules can be used in
any combination.
10.4.3
Module Specifications
Types of modules
Name
Drawing No.
I/O
module
connection
(basic module)
Specifications
Reference
item
for A03B–0818–C001 DI/DO : 24/16
I/O
module
for A03B–0818–C002 DI/DO : 24/16
connection
With MPG interface
(expansion module A)
I/O
module
for A03B–0818–C003 DI/DO : 24/16
connection
Without
MPG
(expansion module B)
interface
I/O
module
for A03B–0818–C004 DO : 16
connection
2A output module
(expansion module C)
I/O
module
for A03B–0818–C005 Analog input module
connection
(expansion module D)
Fuse (accessory)
Inter–module
cable
A03B–0815–K002
flat A03B–0815–K100
1A
(For basic module)
20 mm long
Suitable for a module
interval of 32 mm
Module specifications (common items)
Item
Specifications
Interface with CNC
FANUC I/O
connection
Remarks
Link Expandable up to 16 units or
1024/1024 points as CNC slaves
Interface between Bus
connection Up to three expansion modules
basic module and using a flat cable
connectable per basic module
expansion modules
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each
module, see the relevant pages of each item.
227
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Installation conditions
Ambient temperature Operation:
0°C to 55°C
for the unit
Storage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity
Normal condition:
75% (relative humidity)
Short term (within one month): 95% (relative humidity)
Vibration
Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere
Normal machining factory environment (For use in an
environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,
organic solutions, and so forth, additional measures are
required.)
Other conditions
(1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module
must be installed in the orientation shown below.
Moreover, for ventilation and wiring, allow a
clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each
module. Never place a device that generates a large
amount of heat below an I/O module.
(3) While referring to Section 9.4.18, ensure that the vent
hole of the basic module is not obstructed by the flat
cable.
I/O Link connection
MPG connection
Expansion
module 3
Expansion
module 2
Expansion
module 1
Basic module
Upper side
Lower side
Power supply rating
Module
Power supply
voltage
Power supply
rating
Remarks
Basic module 24 VDC "10% is fed 0.2A+7.3mA DI Number of DI
through
the
I/O
points with DI=ON
connector (CB150) of
Expansion
the
basic
module; 0.1A+7.3mA DI Number of DI
modules
A "10%
points with DI=ON
includes
and B
momentary variations
and ripples.
Expansion
0.1A
module C
(2A module)
Expansion
module D
(analog input
module)
0.1A
As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply capacity
24 (W)].
228
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.4
DI/DO Connector Pin
Assignment
This section describes the DI/DO connector pin allocation of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.
CB150 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
33 DOCOM
01 DOCOM
34 Yn+0.0
02 Yn+1.0
35 Yn+0.1
36 Yn+0.2
37 Yn+0.3
38 Yn+0.4
39 Yn+0.5
40 Yn+0.6
19
0V
20
0V
21
0V
22
0V
23
0V
24 DICOM0
25
41 Yn+0.7
26
42 Xm+0.0
27
43 Xm+0.1
28
44 Xm+0.2
29
45 Xm+0.3
30
46 Xm+0.4
31
47 Xm+0.5
32
48 Xm+0.6
49 Xm+0.7
50
+24V
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
50 male pins with fittings for
fixing the connector covers
03 Yn+1.1
04 Yn+1.2
05 Yn+1.3
06 Yn+1.4
07 Yn+1.5
08 Yn+1.6
09 Yn+1.7
10 Xm+2.0
11 Xm+2.1
12 Xm+2.2
13 Xm+2.3
14 Xm+2.4
15 Xm+2.5
16 Xm+2.6
17 Xm+2.7
18 +24V
NOTE
1 The DI and DO addresses for the basic and extension
modules run contiguously. These basic and extension
module DI and DO addresses are allocated to the I/O Link
as a group. For example, when the DI and DO top
addresses are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4 and n = 0),
respectively, then the addresses are allocated as shown in
the following table.
2 Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used to
apply 24 V externally to a module. Be sure to connect these
pins because the +24 V applied to the module is used
internally.
DI
DO
Basic module
X4–X6
Y0–Y1
Extension module 1
X7–X9
Y2–Y3
Extension module 2
X10–X12
Y4–Y5
Extension module 3
X13–X15
Y6–Y7
229
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.5
B–63003EN/04
This section describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.
DI (Input Signal)
Connection
d A maximum of 96 points are provided
(24 points per module; 1 basic module + 3 extension modules).
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+0.0
RV
+24V
CB150(18)
CB150(50)
CB150(42)
+24V
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
DICOM0
CB150(43)
CB150(44)
CB150(45)
CB150(46)
CB150(47)
CB150(48)
CB150(49)
CB150(24)
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
CB150(25)
CB150(26)
CB150(27)
CB150(28)
CB150(29)
CB150(30)
CB150(31)
CB150(32)
230
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Xm+2.7
+24V
CB150(18)
CB150(50)
CB150(10)
+24V
CB150(11)
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CB150(12)
CB150(13)
CB150(14)
CB150(15)
CB150(16)
CB150(17)
RV
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by
connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with
its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect
as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the DICOM0
CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of
the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 or from
Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7. See 9.4.20 for information about how to allocate the emergency stop
signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (from
Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the logic is fixed to “0”. For unused pins
allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed
to “0” when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. The
logic of the unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 is variable when the contact of the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is open.
231
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.6
DO (Output Signal)
Connection
B–63003EN/04
This section describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.
d A maximum of 64 points are provided (16 points per module; 1 basic
module + 3 extension modules).
Pin number
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CB150(34)
Yn+0.0
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
Yn+1.0
CB150(35)
CB150(36)
CB150(37)
CB150(38)
CB150(39)
CB150(40)
CB150(41)
CB150(02)
DV
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
Yn+1.7
CB150(03)
CB150(04)
CB150(05)
CB150(06)
CB150(07)
CB150(08)
CB150(09)
DV
CB150 (19),(20),(21)
(22),(23)
232
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.7
DI/DO Signal
Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used with
the basic module and expansion modules A and B.
DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points
Contact rating
24 points (per module)
30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between 1 mA or less (26.4 V)
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between 2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
contacts when closed
Delay time
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In
addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] must be considered.
DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points
16 points (per module)
Maximum load current 200 mA or less including momentary variations
when ON
Saturation voltage when 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
ON
Withstand voltage
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current when 20 µA or less
OFF
The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). In
addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
Delay time
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output
signals)
By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO
signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned
off at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOM
DO state when
DO is on in the
sequence
DO state when
DO is off in the
sequence
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
233
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of
DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated
above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied
to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.
Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure
that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the
CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when
or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection
A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting DO
points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time in the
sequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200 mA.
By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO points
at the same time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, the
leakage current is doubled up to 40 µA when the DO points are turned off.
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
+24V
0V
+24 V regulated power supply
Relay
DV
DV
234
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.8
2A Output Connector
Pin Allocation
This section describes the 2A output connector pin allocation of
expansion module C.
CB154 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
33 DOCOMA
01 DOCOMA
34 Yn+0.0
02 Yn+1.0
19
GNDA
20
21
GNDA
GNDA
22
GNDA
23
39 Yn+0.5
24
40 Yn+0.6
25
41 Yn+0.7
26
42
27
43
28
44
29
45
30
46
31
47
32
48
DOCOMA
49
GNDA
35 Yn+0.1
36 Yn+0.2
37 Yn+0.3
38 Yn+0.4
50 DOCOMA
03 Yn+1.1
50 pins, male,
with a metal fitting for securing
the connector cover
04 Yn+1.2
05 Yn+1.3
06 Yn+1.4
07 Yn+1.5
08 Yn+1.6
09 Yn+1.7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 DOCOMA
18 DOCOMA
NOTE
1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.
Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group
covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when
the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,
n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 When the 2A output module is used, the DI addresses of the
module cannot be used. (When the 2A output module is
used as expansion module 3, X13 through X15 cannot be
used.)
DI
DO
Basic module
X4 to X6
Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1
X7 to X9
Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2
X10 to X12
Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3
X13 to X15
Y6 to Y7
235
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.9
2A DO (Output Signal)
Connection
B–63003EN/04
This section describes the 2A output connector connections of expansion
module C.
Address number
Bit number
24VDC
Solenoid,
etc.
236
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.10
2A Output DO Signal
Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the 2A output DO signals used
with expansion module C.
DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points
Maximum
when ON
load
32 points (per module)
current 2 A or less per point.
12 A maximum for the entire module
(DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).
Withstand voltage
24 V +20% or less (including momentary
variations)
Leakage current when OFF 100 µA or less
Delay time
[I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder
scan period (depending on CNC)] must be
considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output
signals)
By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO
signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned
off at one time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOM
DO state when
DO is on in the
sequence
DO state when
DO is off in the
sequence
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of
DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated
above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied
to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.
Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure
that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the
CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when
or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection
The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections including
parallel connections with the DO signals of other modules.
237
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.11
Analog Input
Connector Pin
Allocation
B–63003EN/04
This section describes the analog input connector pin allocation of
expansion module D.
CB157 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
33 INM3
34 COM3
35 FGND3
36 INP3
21 FGND
37 JMP3
38 INM4
39 COM4
40 FGND4
41 INP4
42 JMP4
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
19 FGND
20 FGND
22 FGND
23 FGND
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
01 INM1
02 COM1
03 FDND1
50 pins, male,
with a metal fitting for securing
the connector cover
04 INP1
05 JMP1
06 INM2
07 COM2
08 FGND2
09 INP2
10 JMP2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
50
NOTE
1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.
Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group
covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when
the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,
n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 With the analog input module, the DO space is also used as
an input channel selection area.
DI
DO
Basic module
X4 to X6
Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1
X7 to X9
Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2
X10 to X12
Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3
X13 to X15
Y6 to Y7
238
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.12
Analog Input Signal
Connections
This section provides a diagram of the analog input connector
connections of expansion module D.
Analog input module
Pin number
Not connected
For voltage input
Voltage
source
(Common to all channels)
Analog input module
Pin number
For current input
Current
source
(Common to all channels)
239
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2,
3, 4).
2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a
channel–by–channel basis. For current input, connect
JMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.
4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is
connected to FGNDn, and FGND is used for shield
processing of all channels. However, the shield of a channel
may be directly connected to frame ground with a cable
clamp, instead of using FGNDn.
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown in
the figure above, connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise,
connect INMn and COMn together in the analog input
module.
240
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.13
Analog Input Signal
Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the analog input signals used
with expansion module D.
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Number of input Four channels
channels (Note)
Analog input
DC –10 to +10 V
(Input resistance: 4.7 ohms)
DC –20 to +20 mA
(Input resistance: 250 ohms)
Voltage input or current
input can be selected on
channel–by–channel
basis.
Digital output (Note)
12 bits (binary)
Represented as two’s
complement
Input/output
correspondence
Analog input
Digital output
+10V
+2000
+5V or +20mA
+1000
0V or 0mA
0
–5V or –20mA
–1000
–10V
–2000
Resolution
5 mV or 20 µA
Overall precision
Voltage input: "0.5%
Current input: "1%
With respect to full scale
Maximum
input "15V/"30mA
voltage/current
Minimum conversion Ladder scan period of CNC
time (Note)
connected
Number of occupied DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
input/output points
(Note)
NOTE
This analog input module has four input channels. The
digital output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the
three–byte occupied input points. This means that the
channel to be used can be dynamically selected by the
ladder. The channel switching DO point for channel
selection is included in the two–byte occupied output points.
241
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.14
(Digital output)
Analog Input
Specifications
This digital input module has four input channels. The digital output
section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three–byte occupied input
points. The output format is indicated below.
Address in the module
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Xm (even–numbered address)
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
Xm+1 (odd–numbered address)
0
0
CHB
CHA
D11
D10
D09
D08
D00 to D11 represent 12–bit digital output data. D00 and D11 correspond
to weightings of 20 and 211, respectively.
D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two’s complement. CHA and CHB
represent analog input channels.
This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program,
the A–D converted data of the CHA and CHB input channels can be read
from D11 to D00. For CHA and CHB, see the description of channel
selection, below.
Section 6.3 provides notes on reading data with a PMC program.
(Channel selection)
With this analog input module, which of the four channels is to be output
to the digital output section must be determined with a PMC program.
The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB (two–byte
occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
Address in the module
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Yn
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Yn+1
X
X
X
X
X
X
CHB
CHA
By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the
corresponding channel is selected, and the A–D converted data of the
channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. The
character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or
0 may be written in place of X.
CHB
CHA
Channel selected
0
0
Channel 1
0
1
Channel 2
1
0
Channel 3
1
1
Channel 4
(Address)
The start address of X (DI) of the basic modules including the analog input
module must always be allocated at an even–numbered address. With this
allocation, the digital output addresses of the analog input module are as
described below, depending on where the analog input module is
allocated
D When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion
module 1 (m represents the allocation start address.)
242
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Address in the module
7
6
5
4
Xm+4 (even–numbered address)
D07
D06
D05
D04
Xm+5 (odd–numbered address)
0
0
CHB
CHA
Xm+3 (odd–numbered address)
3
2
1
0
D03
D02
D01
D00
D11
D10
D09
D08
Undefined
D When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion
module 2 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Xm+6 (even–numbered address)
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
Xm+7 (odd–numbered address)
0
0
CHB
CHA
D11
D10
D09
D08
Xm+8 (even–numbered address)
Undefined
D When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion
module 3 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module
7
6
5
Xm+9 (odd–numbered address)
4
3
2
1
0
Undefined
Xm+10 (even–numbered address)
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
Xm+11 (odd–numbered address)
0
0
CHB
CHA
D11
D10
D09
D08
NOTE
When two–byte digital output addresses are to be
referenced with a PMC program, a read must always be
performed word–by–word (16 bits).
243
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.15
Manual Pulse
Generator Connection
B–63003EN/04
An example in which three manual pulse generators are connected to
extension module A is shown below. The manual pulse generator can be
connected only for the i series CNC.
Extension module
JA3 (PCR–E20LMDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HA1
HB1
HA2
HB2
HA3
HB3
+5V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Manual pulse generators
Manual pulse generator #1
(M3 screw terminal)
3
+5V
0V
4
0V
0V
+5V
Manual pulse generator #3
(M3 screw terminal)
+5V
3
+5V
4
0V
Terminal block
HA2
HB2
+5V
0V
HA3
HB3
+5V
0V
6
HB1
Manual pulse generator #2
(M3 screw terminal)
3
4
5
6
+5V
0V
HA2
HB2
0V
Cable connection
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
5
HA1
1
2
9
12
7Red
3
4
18
14
8Red
5
6
20
16
9Black
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
7White
5Red
2Black
HA2
HB2
+5V
0V
8Black
4Red
3Black
HA3
HB3
+5V
0V
9White
6Red
1Black
5
HA3
6
HB3
Manual pulse
generators
#1
5
HA1
6
HB1
3
+5V
4
0V
#2
5
HA2
6
HB2
3
+5V
4
0V
#3
5
HA3
6
HB3
3
+5V
4
0V
Shield
Ground plate
Cable
Wire
Recommended wire material:
A66L–0001–0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector:
A02B–0120–K303 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
(Case: FI40–20–CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
Recommended cables:
A02B–0120–K841 (7 m)
(for connecting three manual pulse generators)
A02B–0120–K848 (7 m)
(for connecting two manual pulse generators)
A02B–0120–K847 (7 m)
(for connecting one manual pulse generator)
244
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)
NOTE
The number of connectable manual pulse generators
depends on the type and option configuration.
10.4.16
Cable Length for
Manual Pulse
Generator
Like a pulse coder, the manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The
supply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V
(when those of the 0–volt and 5–volt wires are combined), as expressed
in the following expression:
0.1
0.2 u
+
R
m
2L
Where
0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)
R = resistance per unit cable length (W/m)
m = number of 0–volt and 5–volt wires
L = cable length (m).
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following
expression.
m
Lt
+R
In the case of the A66L–0001–0286 cable, for example, when three pairs
of signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m) are
used (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0
V), the cable length is:
Lt
+
3 + 76.75[m]
0.0394
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulse
generator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length may
be extended to:
38.37 m (when two generators are used), or
25.58 m (when three generators are used).
245
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.17
Connecting to the
Manual Pulse
Generator on the FS20i
B–63003EN/04
In the case of the FS20i, four manual pulse generators are sometimes
connected. However, only up to three manual pulse generators can be
connected to the separate wiring I/O module or to the control panel I/O
module. For this reason, in the case of the FS20i, two separate wiring I/O
modules or control panel I/O modules having a manual pulse generator
interface are used. Even in a combination of two of these modules having
the same specifications, the connection is possible even in a combination
of one of each of these modules.
Connect these two modules by I/O–Link, and connect the three manual
pulse generators to the module close to the controller, and the remaining
manual pulse generator to the module next closest to the controller.
NOTE
This method of use is applied only in the case of the FS20i,
and cannot be used on other machine types.
Example)
The following describes an example of input signal assignments when
a control panel I/O module (A20B–2002–0470) and a separate wiring
module (A20B–2002–0520) are used.
D Assign 16 bytes from x0008 as the start of the input signal on
A20B–2002–0470 and 16 bytes from x0024 as the start of the input
signal on A20B–2002–0520.
246
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
X0008
General–purpose input signal on A20B–2002–0470
X0009
X0010
Reserve area on A20B–2002–0470
X0011
X0012
Matrix input signal on A20B–2002–0470
:
X0018
X0019
Reserve area on A20B–2002–0470
X0020
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0470
(used as 1st generator)
X0021
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0470
(used as 2nd generator)
X0022
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0470
(used as 3rd generator)
X0023
DO alarm detection on A20B–2002–0470
X0024
General–purpose input signal on A20B–2002–0520
Control
panel I/O
module
:
X0029
X0030
Reserve area on A20B–2002–0520
:
X0035
X0036
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0520
(used as 4th generator)
X0037
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0520
(not available)
X0038
Manual pulse generator on A20B–2002–0520
(not available)
X0039
DO alarm detection on A20B–2002–0520
247
Separate
type I/O
module
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Manual Pulse Generator
Interface
When using other manufacturers’ manual pulse generators, ensure that
the following specifications are satisfied.
Pulse width
The relationship between the HAn and HBn signals and the CNC pulses
shall be as shown in Fig. 10.4.17 (a).
Pulse cycle T1 shall be 200 msec or more. Pulse cycle T1/4–direction pulse
shall be 50 msec or more.
T1
HAn
T1
T1
4
HBn
T1
4
T1
4
+ direction pulse
– direction pulse
Forward rotation
Backward rotation
Click point
Reverse direction
Fig. 10.4.17 (a)
Receiver
The circuit that receives signals input from the manual pulse generator
shall be configured as shown in Fig. 10.4.17 (b).
Manual pulse
generator
+5V
Filter
10kW
R
Connector
–
+
C
0V
Receiver’s internal
circuit
0V
Fig. 10.4.17 (b)
Input signal level change point (threshold)
When the voltage is 3.7 V or higher, the input signal level changes from
low to high.
When the voltage is 1.5 V or lower, the input signal level changes from
high to low.
248
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.18
Connection of Basic
and Extension Modules
Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you are
connecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting two
extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34–pin flat cable
connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at one
end of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end;
e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) at
the other end.
DI/DO interface side
DI/DO interface side
DI/DO interface side
34–pin flat cable
CA52
CA53
34–pin flat cable
CA52
Ventilation
slot
CA55
CA52
34–pin flat cable
A1 pin mark
Basic module
Extension module
Extension module
DIN rail
mounting side
DIN rail
mounting side
DIN rail
mounting side
Top view
Flat cable–side connector specification:
HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector–side specification:
HIF3BA–34PA–2.54DS (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or
FAP–3403–1202–0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)
NOTE
Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mm
in length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be
20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 100 mm. To
ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top of
them. The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the above
figure). When connecting modules, install extension modules so that the flat cables do not
cover the vent, as shown in the above figure.
Therefore, for direct connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are
installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN
rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
249
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.4.19
B–63003EN/04
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly
(external module view and mounting diagram)
Module Installation
Dimensions of connector panel
printed circuit board ±0.2
Board thickness
1.6 mm
Square hole
No. 1
pin
Square
hole
I/O interface
I/O Link
interface
MPG interface
(for extension
module)
Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification:
HONDA MRH–50FD (50–pin female straight connector without fitting)
NOTE
1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH–50RMA) is used for the module–side I/O interface.
Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed circuit board.
2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on soldered side
: Prohibited area on component side
250
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly
(mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
Stopper
Connector panel
printed circuit board
Mounting the module
1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel
printed circuit board.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module’s
connector to the connector on the printed circuit board.
3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Press the stopper C upward.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.
Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
251
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)
Mount the DIN rail here.
I/O Link interface
MPG interface
(for extension
module)
Note
I/O interface
NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
252
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
DIN rail
Stopper
Slotted screwdriver
Mounting the module
1. Hook the module at the upper end of the DIN rail.
2. Push the stopper into the slit located at the lower
end of the rail until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Insert the tip of the slotted screwdriver and push
out the stopper in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
NOTE
When dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying excessive
force with the screwdriver.
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.
Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
253
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
When mounting a module using screws (external module view and
mounting diagram)
Note
Screw
holes
I/O interface
I/O Link interface
MPG interface
(for extension module)
NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
254
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.4.20
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a
system alarm
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O module,
or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and connector panel I/O
module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.
Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC or the I/O
module is turned off.
Address allocation
For the connector panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15
(DO alarm detection)
Basic
module
Extension
module 1
Extension
module 2
DO space map
Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
Basic
module
Extension
module 1
Extension
module 2
Extension
module 3
Extension
module 3
Extension
module 1
Basic
module
The basic connector panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses
(16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). Up to three hardware
extension modules can be added or removed as required. The reason for
this address allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies a DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed regardless of whether
extension module 2 or 3 is used, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be
allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, when
using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16
bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder;
the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the
section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is used, and
it must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. When using this
area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the connector panel I/O
modules freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the
addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following
in mind.
255
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)
X0004
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
–MIT2
SKIP5
+MIT2
SKIP4
–MIT1
SKIP3
+MIT1
SKIP2
ZAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
ZAE
SKIP2
YAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
*DEC4
*DEC3
*DEC2
*DEC1
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
*ESP
X0009
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in the
lower row are for the M series.
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
X0004
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016 (for 1st MPG)
X0017 (for 2nd MPG)
X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
X0019
(DO alarm detection)
SKIPn and other fixed signals
Basic module
Extension
module 1
*ESP fixed signal
*DECn fixed signal
Extension
module 2
Extension
module 3
Extension
module 1
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module and
extension module 1. Extension modules 2 and 3 may be added
as required. This allows fixed signals, such as SKIPn and
*DECn, to always be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be
allocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to
24 V. Also, with the I series CNC, the MPG interface provided
by extension module 1 can always be used.
Basic module
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0007
X0007
X0008
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016
X0017
X0018
X0019 (for 1st MPG)
X0020 (for 2nd MPG)
X0021 (for 3rd MPG)
X0022
(DO alarm detection)
Basic module
*ESP fixed signal
*DECn fixed signal
Extension
module 1
Extension
module 2
Extension
module 3
Extension
module 1
Basic module
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module only.
Extension modules 1, 2, and 3 may be added as required. In
the minimum configuration, SKIP and other fixed signals and the
MGP interface of extension module 1 cannot be used. In this
case, however, the *DECn fixed signal can always be used and
the *ESP fixed signal can be allocated to an address for which
the common voltage is fixed to 24 V in the minimum
configuration.
256
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DO (output signal) alarm
detection
The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable of
detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an
accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a
protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver (1 byte), is
activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state
until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC
and I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies
the DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows
the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO
addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the corresponding DO driver has
detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked by
using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm processing for
the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection and
recovery.
Alarm detection
address and bit
DO address
Location
Xm+15.0
Yn+0
Basic module
Xm+15.1
Yn+1
Basic module
Xm+15.2
Yn+2
Extension module 1
Xm+15.3
Yn+3
Extension module 1
Xm+15.4
Yn+4
Extension module 2
Xm+15.5
Yn+5
Extension module 2
Xm+15.6
Yn+6
Extension module 3
Xm+15.7
Yn+7
Extension module 3
NOTE
This function is not supported by the 2A output module or
analog input module.
Allocation of the 2A output module and analog input module
The 2A output module and analog input module can be allocated to any
of the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. In addition, up to three
2A output modules or analog input modules can be allocated to all the
spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. When an MPG interface is
required, the module occupies the space for expansion module 1; no 2A
output module or analog input module can be allocated in the space for
expansion module 1.
The 2A output module does not involve DI points, so that the DI area of
the space in which a 2A output module is allocated is unusable. When a
2A output module is allocated to the space for expansion module 2, for
example, the areas from Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used. (The spaces for
the other modules are not shifted. In this case, the DI space of expansion
module 3 remains at Xm+9 through Xm+11.)
257
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Expansion module 1
is omitted.
Expansion module 2
is omitted.
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Distribution I/O Setting
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules,
connections can be made by omitting some expansion modules as shown
below.
Basic module
10.4.21
B–63003EN/04
Expansion modules 1 and 2
are omitted.
Method of setting (control and method of setting the control)
As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an expansion
module. To change the setting, turn the switch with a flat–bladed
screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.
258
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
The function of the rotary switch is as follows:
Setting
position
Actual
indication
Meaning of setting
0
0
This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is
factory–set to this position. This setting is used
when no expansion module is omitted.
1
–
Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to
this position when the preceding expansion
module is omitted.
2
2
Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to
this position when the preceding two expansion
modules are omitted.
3
–
This setting is prohibited.
4 to F
4, –, 6, –,
8, –, A, –,
C, –, E, –,
259
4, 8, or C has the same effect as 0.
5, 9, or D has the same effect as 1.
6, A, or E has the same effect as 2.
7, B, or F has the same effect as 3. (This setting,
however, is prohibited.)
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
Examples of setting
(When expansion module 1 is omitted)
On expansion module 2, set the rotary
switch to setting position 1. On expansion module 3, keep the rotary switch
set to setting position 0.
(When expansion module 2 is omitted)
On expansion module 3, set the rotary
switch to setting position 1. On expansion module 1, keep the rotary switch
set to setting position 0.
(When expansion modules 1 and 2
are omitted)
On expansion module 3, set the rotary
switch to setting position 2.
NOTE
1 Expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with manual pulse
interface) (A03B–0815–C002) is fitted with an additional
rotary switch as other types of modules are modified.
However, expansion module A is always mounted at the
location of expansion module 1, so that its factory setting
need not be changed.
2 This feature was added in the middle. The expansion
modules shipped before August 1998 are not provided with
this feature.
260
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.5
CONNECTION OF
OPERATOR’S PANEL
I/O MODULE
(FOR MATRIX INPUT)
10.5.1
Overall Connection
Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O Link
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
CE53
JA3
MPG
MPG
CE54
+24 V power supply
CPD1(IN)
+24 V power supply
CPD1(OUT)
Machine operator’s panel
MPG
NOTE
The MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/O module only when the i series CNC
is used. When the operator’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panel
I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPG
interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. The
following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the i series main board, cannot be
used to connect the I/O Link or MPG.
261
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification
Connector
Connector
connector
10.5.2
Power Connection
FI–20–CV7
case
and FI30–20S–CV7
Manufacturer
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
necessary for printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.
To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly
as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use
CPD1 (OUT).
CPD1(IN)
24 V power
supply
01
+24V
02
0V
03
CPD1(OUT)
24 V power
supply
01
+24V
02
0V
03
Recommended cable–side connector:
A02B–0120–K324
(including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)
is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no
indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the
+24 V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off
the +24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.
When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O
module must be turned on before or at the same time as the
power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the
+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
262
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.5.3
DI/DO Connector Pin
Arrangement
CE53
01
CE54
A
B
0V
0V
01
A
B
0V
0V
02
N.C.
+24V
02
COM1
+24V
03
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
03
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
04
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
04
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
05
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
05
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
06
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
06
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
07
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.1
07
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.1
08
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
08
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
09
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
09
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.5
10
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
10
Yn+3.6
Yn+3.7
11
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
11
Yn+4.0
Yn+4.1
12
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
12
Yn+4.2
Yn+4.3
13
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
13
Yn+4.4
Yn+4.5
14
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
14
Yn+4.6
Yn+4.7
15
Yn+2.0
Yn+2.1
15
Yn+5.0
Yn+5.1
16
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
16
Yn+5.2
Yn+5.3
17
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
17
Yn+5.4
Yn+5.5
18
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7
18
Yn+5.6
Yn+5.7
19
KYD0
KYD1
19
Yn+6.0
Yn+6.1
20
KYD2
KYD3
20
Yn+6.2
Yn+6.3
21
KYD4
KYD5
21
Yn+6.4
Yn+6.5
22
KYD6
KYD7
22
Yn+6.6
Yn+6.7
23
KCM1
KCM2
23
KCM5
KCM6
24
KCM3
KCM4
24
KCM7
DOCOM
25
DOCOM
DOCOM
25
DOCOM
DOCOM
Flat cable–side connector specification:
A02B–0120–K342
(HIFBB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
50 contacts
Cable material specification:
A02B–0120–K886
(61–meter, 50–pin cable
(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
263
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.5.4
DI (General–purpose
Input Signal)
Connection
Pin number
Address number
+24V
Bit number
Xm+0.0
RV
Xm+0.1
RV
Xm+0.2
RV
Xm+0.3
RV
Xm+0.4
RV
Xm+0.5
RV
Xm+0.6
RV
Xm+0.7
RV
Xm+1.0
RV
Xm+1.1
RV
Xm+1.2
RV
Xm+1.3
RV
Xm+1.4
RV
Xm+1.5
RV
Xm+1.6
RV
Xm+1.7
RV
COM1
CE53(B02)
CE54(B02)
CE53(A03)
CE53(B03)
CE53(A04)
CE53(B04)
CE53(A05)
CE53(B05)
CE53(A06)
CE53(B06)
CE54(A03)
CE54(B03)
CE54(A04)
CE54(B04)
CE54(A05)
CE54(B05)
CE54(A06)
CE54(B06)
CE54(A02)
CE53(A01),(B01),
CE54(A01),(B01)
264
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common
voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the COM1
CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can
be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable
is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting
an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the
connection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power
supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be
allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which
the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+0.0 to
Xm+0.7. See “Address allocation” in Section 9.5.10 for
details of how to allocate the emergency stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the
common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7), the logic
is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 to
Xm+1.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the
logic is fixed to “0” when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply. When the COM1
CE54(A02) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the
logic is fixed to “1”. The logic of the unused pins allocated
to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 is variable when the contact of the
COM1 CE54(A02) pin is open.
265
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
d A maximum of 56 points are provided.
10.5.5
DI (Matrix Input Signal)
Connection
*KCM1
*KCM2
*KCM3
*KCM4
*KCM5
*KCM6
*KCM7
*KYD0
*KYD1
*KYD2
*KYD3
*KYD4
*KYD5
*KYD6
*KYD7
CE53(A23)
Xn+4.0
Xn+4.1
Xn+4.2
Xn+4.3
Xn+4.4
Xn+4.5
Xn+4.6
Xn+4.7
CE53(B23)
Xn+5.0
Xn+5.1
Xn+5.2
Xn+5.3
Xn+5.4
Xn+5.5
Xn+5.6
Xn+5.7
CE53(A24)
Xn+6.0
Xn+6.1
Xn+6.2
Xn+6.3
Xn+6.4
Xn+6.5
Xn+6.6
Xn+6.7
CE53(B24)
Xn+7.0
Xn+7.1
Xn+7.2
Xn+7.3
Xn+7.4
Xn+7.5
Xn+7.6
Xn+7.7
CE54(A23)
Xn+8.0
Xn+8.1
Xn+8.2
Xn+8.3
Xn+8.4
Xn+8.5
Xn+8.6
Xn+8.7
CE54(B23)
Xn+9.0
Xn+9.1
Xn+9.2
Xn+9.3
Xn+9.4
Xn+9.5
Xn+9.6
Xn+9.7
CE54(A24)
Xn+10.0
Xn+10.1
Xn+10.2
Xn+10.3
Xn+10.4
Xn+10.5
Xn+10.6
Xn+10.7
CE53(A19)
CE53(B19)
CE53(A20)
CE53(B20)
CE53(A21)
CE53(B21)
CE53(A22)
CE53(B22)
NOTE
Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrix
signal input, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise,
only two signals can be input at the same time. Inputting
three or more signals simultaneously without using detour
prevention diodes may result in data input errors.
*KCMn
*KYDn
266
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
d A maximum of 56 points are provided.
10.5.6
DO (Output Signal)
Connection
Pin number
DOCOM
CE53(A25,B25)
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CE53(A07)
Yn+0.0
DV
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
CE53(B07)
DV
CE53(A08)
DV
CE53(B08)
DV
CE53(A09)
DV
CE53(B09)
DV
CE53(A10)
DV
CE53(B10)
DV
CE53(A11)
DV
CE53(B11)
DV
CE53(A12)
DV
CE53(B12)
DV
CE53(A13)
DV
CE53(B13)
DV
CE53(A14)
DV
CE53(B14)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
267
Relay
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
DOCOM
CE53(A25,B25)
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CE53(A15)
Yn+2.0
DV
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.6
Yn+3.7
CE53(B15)
DV
CE53(A16)
DV
CE53(B16)
DV
CE53(A17)
DV
CE53(B17)
DV
CE53(A18)
DV
CE53(B18)
DV
CE54(A07)
DV
CE54(B07)
DV
CE54(A08)
DV
CE54(B08)
DV
CE54(A09)
DV
CE54(B09)
DV
CE54(A10)
DV
CE54(B10)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
268
Relay
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
DOCOM
CE53(A25,B25)
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
Yn+4.0
CE54(A11)
DV
Yn+4.1
Yn+4.2
Yn+4.3
Yn+4.4
Yn+4.5
Yn+4.6
Yn+4.7
Yn+5.0
Yn+5.1
Yn+5.2
Yn+5.3
Yn+5.4
Yn+5.5
Yn+5.6
Yn+5.7
CE54(B11)
DV
CE54(A12)
DV
CE54(B12)
DV
CE54(A13)
DV
CE54(B13)
DV
CE54(A14)
DV
CE54(B14)
DV
CE54(A15)
DV
CE54(B15)
DV
CE54(A16)
DV
CE54(B16)
DV
CE54(A17)
DV
CE54(B17)
DV
CE54(A18)
DV
CE54(B18)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
269
Relay
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
DOCOM
CE53(A25,B25)
CE54(A25,B24,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CE54(A19)
Yn+6.0
Relay
DV
Yn+6.1
Yn+6.2
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.4
Yn+6.5
Yn+6.6
Yn+6.7
CE54(B19)
DV
CE54(A20)
DV
CE54(B20)
DV
CE54(A21)
DV
CE54(B21)
DV
CE54(A22)
DV
CE54(B22)
DV
CE53(A01,B01)
CE54(A01,B01)
10.5.7
Manual Pulse
Generator Connection
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section
10.4.15.
270
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.5.8
External View
24 V power supply connection
Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Note
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that printed circuit
boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area
(Perspective drawing
viewed from the front)
271
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.5.9
Specifications
B–63003EN/04
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation
0°C to 58°C
During storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change
Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity
Normal
:
Short term (1 month or less) :
Vibration
During operation :
Environment
Ordinary machining factory environment
(Special consideration is required when installing the
module in a dusty location or where highly concentrated cutting lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements
(1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
75% or less
95% or less
0.5 G or less
Ordering specifications
Item
Specification
Remarks
Operator’s panel I/O A20B–2002–0470
module
General–purpose DI: 16 points
Matrix DI: 56 points
DO: 56 points
MPG interface is supported.
Fuse
(replacement part)
1A
A03B–0815–K001
Module specifications
Item
Specification
Remarks
General–purpose DI
16 points
24–V input
Matrix DI
56 points (8 7)
5–V input
DO points
56 points
24 V source type output
CNC interface
FANUC I/O
connection
MPG interface
Max. 3 units
Link Up to 16 modules can be
connected as CNC slaves. Or, a
maximum of 1024 points can be
supported on both the input and
output sides.
MPG interface can be used only
for the i series CNC.
Power supply rating
Module
Supply voltage
Current rating
Operator’s panel 24 VDC "10% supplied 0.35A
I/O module
from the power supply
connector CPD1. The
allowance of "10%
should
include
instantaneous voltage
and ripple voltage.
272
Remarks
The total power
consumption of
DI points is
included.
The
power
consumption of
DO points is not
included.
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DI (input signal) specifications
(General–purpose input signal)
Contact rating
30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
leakage current
Closed circuit intercontact 2 V or less
voltage drop
(including cable voltage drop)
Delay
Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms
The time required for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms +
CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into
account.
(Matrix input signal)
Contact rating
6 VDC, 2 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact 0.2 mA or less (at 26 V)
leakage current
Closed circuit intercontact 0.9 V or less (with a current of 1 mA)
voltage drop
Delay
The maximum matrix period of 16 ms, the
maximum time of I/O Link transfer between CNC
and I/O module of 2 ms, and the ladder scanning
period (by CNC) must be considered.
NOTE
When detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage drop
across closed contacts indicated above must be
maintained, including the diode voltage drop.
DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less
(including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state
Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage
24 V +20% or less
(including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state
20 mA or less
Delay
Driver delay: Max. 50 ms
The time required for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2
ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be
taken into account.
NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO
power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
273
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.5.10
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a
system alarm
If a system alarm occurs in the CNC using the operator’s panel I/O
module, or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’s
panel I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned
off. Therefore, sufficient care is necessary when setting up the machine
sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC
or the I/O module is turned off.
Address allocation
For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DO space map
DI space map
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm
detection)
General–purpose
input signal
Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
Reserved
Matrix input
signal
Output signal
Reserved
Reserved
MPG
DO alarm
detection
The operator’s panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16
bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). This address allocation is
explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14
must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.
Therefore, when using an MPG for the I series CNC, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14
for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that may occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see
the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.
Therefore, when using this area, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the operator’s panel I/O
module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the
fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the
following in mind.
274
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)
7
SKIP
X0004
SKIP
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ESKIP
–MIT2
+MIT2
–MIT1
+MIT1
ZAE
XAE
SKIP6
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
ESKIP
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
ZAE
YAE
XAE
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
*DEC3
*DEC2
*DEC1
SKIP6
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
*ESP
X0009
*DEC4
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in the
lower row are for the M series.
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0008
X0008
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016
X0017
X0018
X0019
X0020(for 1st MPG)
X0021(for 2nd MPG)
X0022(for 3rd MPG)
X0023(DO alarm
detection)
General–purpose
input signal
*ESP fixed signal
*DECn fixed signal
Reserved
Matrix input
signal
Reserved
MPG
DO alarm
detection
Turning the DO (output
signal) power on and off
(DOCOM)
Although fixed signals such as SKIP cannot be used,
allocating DI addresses starting from X0008 allows the *DECn
signal to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to
an address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V.
(Fixed signals cannot be allocated to the for the matrix input
signals.)
All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doing
so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
ON
DOCOM OFF
When DO is ON in
the sequence
When DO is OFF
in the sequence
275
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the
ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of
the signal, as indicated by the dotted lines in the above
figure. Do not turn off the +24 V supply, provided by the
CPD1 to the I/O module, during the operation. Turning off
the +24 V supply would cause a CNC communication alarm.
When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O
module must be turned on before or at the same time as the
power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the
+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
Parallel DO (output
signal) connection
The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200
mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the
same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two
DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles
while they are off (max. 40 mA).
DOCOM
CE53(A25), (B25)
CE54(B24), (A25), (B25)
+24V
0V
+24 stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
276
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DO (output signal) alarm
detection
The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent
and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as connecting the
cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the
driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO
driver (1 byte), is activated which keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1
byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even
if this occurs, the CNC and the I/O module continue operating. The DI
address (Xm+15) identifies which DO driver has detected an alarm. The
following table shows the correspondence between the DI address
(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the
corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the
Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by
performing the alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.
This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address
and bit
DO address
Xm+15.0
Yn+0
Xm+15.1
Yn+1
Xm+15.2
Yn+2
Xm+15.3
Yn+3
Xm+15.4
Yn+4
Xm+15.5
Yn+5
Xm+15.6
Yn+6
Xm+15.7
Yn+7
277
Remarks
Reserved
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.6
CONNECTION OF
OPERATOR’S PANEL
I/O MODULE AND
POWER MAGNETICS
CABINET I/O
MODULE
B–63003EN/04
The difference between the operator’s panel I/O module and the power
magnetics cabinet I/O module lies in whether an interface to a manual
pulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet does not
provide an interface to a manual pulse generator.
10.6.1
Overall Connection
Diagram
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1B
I/O LINK
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
CE56
JA3
Machine operator’s panel
MPG
MPG
MPG
CE57
+24V
Power
supply
CPD1(IN)
+24V
Power
supply
CPD1(OUT)
278
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
The MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/O module only when the i series CNC
is used. When the operator’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panel
I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPG
interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. The
following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the i series main board, cannot be
used to connect the I/O Link or MPG.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification
10.6.2
Power Connection
Manufacturer
Connector
FI–20–CV7
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector
FI30–20S–CV7
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
necessary for the printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.
To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly
as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use
CPD1 (OUT).
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V
02 0V
03
24 V power
supply
CPD1(OUT)
01
02
03
24 V power
supply
+24V
0V
Recommended cable–side connector: A02B–0120–K324
(including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
279
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)
is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no
indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24
V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the
+24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.
When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O
module must be turned on before or at the same time as the
power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the
+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
10.6.3
DI/DO Connector Pin
Arrangement
CE56
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CE57
A
0V
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.6
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.6
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.6
DICOM0
B
+24V
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.7
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.7
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.6
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.7
DOCOM
DOCOM
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
0V
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.6
Xm+4.0
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.6
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.6
B
+24V
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.7
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.7
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.7
DICOM5
Yn+2.0
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.6
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.6
DOCOM
DOCOM
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.7
DOCOM
DOCOM
Flat cable–side connector specification:
A02B–0120–K342
(HIF3BB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
50 contacts
Cable material specification:
A02B–0120–K886
(61–meter, 50–pin cable
(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
280
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.6.4
DI (General–purpose
Input Signal)
Connection
Pin number
Address number
+24V
Bit number
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
CE56(B01)
CE57(B01)
CE56(A02)
RV
CE56(B02)
RV
CE56(A03)
RV
CE56(B03)
RV
CE56(A04)
RV
CE56(B04)
RV
CE56(A05)
RV
CE56(B05)
RV
CE56(A14)
DICOM0
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
CE56(A06)
RV
CE56(B06)
RV
CE56(A07)
RV
CE56(B07)
RV
CE56(A08)
RV
CE56(B08)
RV
CE56(A09)
RV
CE56(B09)
RV
281
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
Address number
+24V
Bit number
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.7
CE56(B01)
CE57(B01)
CE56(A10)
RV
CE56(B10)
RV
CE56(A11)
RV
CE56(B11)
RV
CE56(A12)
RV
CE56(B12)
RV
CE56(A13)
RV
CE56(B13)
RV
CE57(A02)
RV
CE57(B02)
RV
CE57(A03)
RV
CE57(B03)
RV
CE57(A04)
RV
CE57(B04)
RV
CE57(A05)
RV
CE57(B05)
RV
282
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
Address number
+24V
Bit number
Xm+4.0
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
Xm+4.7
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.6
Xm+5.7
CE56(B01)
CE57(B01)
CE57(A06)
RV
CE57(B06)
RV
CE57(A07)
RV
CE57(B07)
RV
CE57(A08)
RV
CE57(B08)
RV
CE57(A09)
RV
CE57(B09)
RV
CE57(A10)
RV
CE57(B10)
RV
CE57(A11)
RV
CE57(B11)
RV
CE57(A12)
RV
CE57(B12)
RV
CE57(A13)
RV
CE57(B13)
RV
CE57(B14)
DICOM5
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
283
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are
DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That
is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5
CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can
be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable
is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting
an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the
connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5
CE57(B14) pins to the 0 V power supply is recommended
whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be
allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which
the common voltage is fixed. See “Address allocation” in
Section 9.6.9 for details of how to allocate the emergency
stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the
common voltage is fixed, the logic is fixed to “0”. For unused
pins allocated to the addresses for which the common
voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to “0” when the
DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0
CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is connected to the
+24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. The logic of the
unused pins is variable when the contacts of the DICOM0
CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins are open.
284
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.6.5
DO (Output Signal)
Connection
Pin number
DOCOM
CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
Yn+0.0
CE56(A16)
DV
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
CE56(B16)
DV
CE56(A17)
DV
CE56(B17)
DV
CE56(A18)
DV
CE56(B18)
DV
CE56(A19)
DV
CE56(B19)
DV
CE56(A20)
DV
CE56(B20)
DV
CE56(A21)
DV
CE56(B21)
DV
CE56(A22)
DV
CE56(B22)
DV
CE56(A23)
DV
CE56(B23)
DV
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
285
Relay
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
DOCOM
CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized power supply
CE57(A16)
Yn+2.0
DV
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.6
Yn+3.7
CE57(B16)
DV
CE57(A17)
DV
CE57(B17)
DV
CE57(A18)
DV
CE57(B18)
DV
CE57(A19)
DV
CE57(B19)
DV
CE57(A20)
DV
CE57(B20)
DV
CE57(A21)
DV
CE57(B21)
DV
CE57(A22)
DV
CE57(B22)
DV
CE57(A23)
DV
CE57(B23)
DV
CE56(A01)
CE57(A01)
286
Relay
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.6.6
Manual Pulse
Generator Connection
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section
10.4.15.
10.6.7
External View
24 V power supply connection
Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Note
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit
boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area
(Perspective drawing
viewed from the front)
287
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.6.8
Specifications
B–63003EN/04
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature
During operation 0° to 58°C
During storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change
Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity
Normal: 75% or less
Short term (1 month or less): 95% or less
Vibration
During operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment
Ordinary machining factory environment (Special
consideration is required when installing the module in
a dusty place or where highly concentrated cutting
lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements
(1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Item
Specification
Operator’s panel
I/O module
(with MPG interface)
A20B–2002–0520
Remarks
DI: 48 points
DO: 32 points
MPG interface is supported.
Power magnetics panel A20B–2002–0521
I/O module
(without MPG interface)
DI: 48 points
DO: 32 points
MPG interface is not
supported.
Fuse (replacement part)
1A
A03B–0815–K001
Module specifications
Item
Specification
Remarks
DI points
48 points
24 V input
DO points
32 points
24 V source type output
CNC interface
FANUC I/O
connection
MPG interface
Max. 3 units
288
Link Up to 16 modules can be
connected as CNC slaves.
Or, a maximum of 1024 points
can be supported on both the
input and output sides.
MPG interface can be used
only for the i series CNC.
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Power supply rating
Module
Supply voltage
Power supply
rating
Operator’s
24 VDC ±10% is 0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI
panel
I/O supplied
from
module
power
supply
connector CPD1.
The tolerance of
±10%
includes
momentary
and
ripple currents.
Remarks
DI = number of DI
points in the ON
state
DI (input signal) specifications
(general–purpose input signal)
Contact rating
30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact leakage 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
current
Closed circuit intercontact voltage 2 V or less
drop
(including cable voltage drop)
Delay
Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms
The time required for I/O Link
transmission between the CNC and I/O
module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan
cycle) must also be taken into account.
DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state
200 mA or less
(including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state
Max. 1 V
(when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage
24 V +20% or less
(including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state
20 mA or less
Delay
Driver delay: Max. 50 ms
The time for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and I/O module (max.
2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must
also be taken into account.
NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO
power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
289
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.6.9
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a
system alarm
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this 48/32–point I/O module, or
if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’s panel I/O
module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.
Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the CNC or the I/O
module is turned off.
Address allocation
For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map
DO space map
Yn
Xm
Yn+1
Xm+1
Yn+2
Xm+2
Xm+3
Input signal
Output signal
Yn+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Not used
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
MPG
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm
detection)
DO alarm
detection
Basically, this 48/32–point I/O module is allocated a group of DI
addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (4 bytes). This address
allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14
must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.
Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14
for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the
section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This
address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.
When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the 48/32–point I/O module
freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the fixed
addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following
in mind.
290
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i)
7
SKIP
X0004
SKIP
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ESKIP
–MIT2
+MIT2
–MIT1
+MIT1
ZAE
XAE
SKIP6
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
ESKIP
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
ZAE
YAE
XAE
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
*DEC3
*DEC2
*DEC1
SKIP6
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
*ESP
X0009
*DEC4
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in the
lower row are for the M series.
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
X0004
X0005
X0006
X0007
Input signal
X0008
*ESP fixed signal
X0009
X0010
*DECn fixed signal
X0011
X0012
X0013
Not used
X0014
X0015
X0016 (for 1st MPG)
X0017 (for 2nd MPG)
MPG
X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
X0019 (DO alarm
detection)
DO alarm
detection
Turning the DO (output
signal) power on and off
(DOCOM)
Allocating DI addresses from X0004 allows the fixed signals,
such as SKIP and *DECn, to be used and the *ESP fixed
signal to be allocated to an address for which the common
voltage in fixed to 24 V.
All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doing
so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
ON
DOCOM OFF
When DO is ON in
the sequence
When DO is OFF
in the sequence
291
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the
ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of
the signal, as shown within dotted lines in the above figure.
Do not turn off the +24 V supply provided by the CPD1 to the
I/O module during the operation. Turning off the +24 V
supply causes a CNC communication alarm. When turning
on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be
turned on before or at the same time as the power supply
to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply
to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time
as the power supply to the CNC.
Parallel DO (output
signal) connection
The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200
mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the
same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two
DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles
when they are off (max. 40 mA).
DOCOM
CE56(A24, B24, A25, B25)
CE57(A24, B24, A25, B25)
+24V
0V
+24 stabilized
power supply
Relay
DV
DV
292
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DO (output signal) alarm
detection
The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent
and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as the connecting
of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or
in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each
DO driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant
1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even
if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DI
address (Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm.
The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address
(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the
corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the
Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by
performing alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.
This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address
and bit
DO address
Xm+15.0
Yn+0
Xm+15.1
Yn+1
Xm+15.2
Yn+2
Xm+15.3
Yn+3
Xm+15.4
Yn+4
Reserved
Xm+15.5
Yn+5
Reserved
Xm+15.6
Yn+6
Reserved
Xm+15.7
Yn+7
Reserved
293
Remarks
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.7
CONNECTION OF
MACHINE
OPERATOR’S PANEL
INTERFACE UNIT
B–63003EN/04
The machine operator’s panel interface unit (A16B–2201–0110) is
connected to the control unit through the I/O Link and is used for
interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
It features interfaces with matrix key switches, LEDs and manual pulse
generators.
Machine operator’s
panel I/F unit
FANUC I/O Link
Control unit
Machine operator’s panel
(supplied by a machine tool
builder)
10.7.1
Function Overview
Number of DI/DO points
Operator’s panel control PCB
allocation to the I/O Link
DI/DO
(module name)
DI or DO
Number of matrix key switch inputs
DI/DO = 128/128
DI
DO
DI
DO
(OC02I)
(OC02O)
(OC03I)
(OC03O)
64
Number of matrix LED data outputs
Number of general–purpose switch
inputs
96
64
32
Number of general–purpose LED data
outputs
Number of total DI/DO points
DI/DO = 256/256
64
32
32
96
96
32
128
96
D Matrix key switch inputs (matrix DI)
Ninety–six DI points are provided by a matrix of twelve common
signals times eight data signals. Note that I/O Link allocation may
limit the number of usable key switch inputs.
D Matrix LED data outputs (matrix DO)
Sixty–four DO points are provided by a matrix of eight common
signals times eight data signals.
D General–purpose switch inputs (general–purpose DI)
Each general–purpose DI point has an individual interface.
D General–purpose LED data outputs (general–purpose DO)
Each general–purpose DO point has an individual interface.
294
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Analog signal inputs
D Two inputs (input voltage: 0 to +10 V)
D Input voltages are converted from analog to digital. The resulting five
bits of data are sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.
D The analog signal input function can be used regardless of whether I/O
Link allocation is 128/128 or 256/256.
Terminal for signal
forwarding
D Emergency stop and OT release signals are forwarded without change
to the power magnetics cabinet.
D Power ON/OFF control signals are forwarded without change to an
input unit.
D Analog signal inputs described in item “Analog signal inputs” can be
sent out without being changed.
First manual pulse
generator
Pulse information from the manual pulse generator is transferred via an
I/O Link.
When this unit is used together with a unit (connector panel I/O module)
connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the
MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the
I/O Link is valid.
295
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.2
System Configuration
Machine operator’s panel
interface unit
CNC
FANUC
JD1B
I/O Link
(I/O Link)
CM26
CM15
JD1A
Other machine
interface
CM16
CM17
Power supply unit
CPD1
(24V)
Note 1
CNB1
Note 2
Machine operator’s
panel
Matrix DI/DO
*ESP, OTR, and
general–purpose
DI/DO
General–purpose
DI/DO
General–purpose
DI/DO
LM/SM
Power ON/OFF
(*)
CA40
(*)
Power magnetics
cabinet
+
general–
purpose
DI/DO
CNA1
*ESP , OTR
Input unit power
ON/OFF
CRT/MDI
Spindle amp LM/
SM
*ESP :
Emergency stop signal
OTR
OT release signal
:
ON/OFF :
LM/SM:
* :
Power ON/OFF control signal
Load meter or speed meter signal
Manual pulse generator
NOTE
1 Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unit
requires “1.0 A”
2 The cable connected to CM26 must not be longer than 30
cm.
296
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.3
Signal Assignment
Connector pin signal
assignment
CM15 (General DI/DO) CM16 (General DI/DO) CM17 (General DI/DO)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
*ESP
OTR
DI00
DI04
DI03
DI05
DI12
+5E
DI11
B
DI06
DO06
DI07
DO07
DI16
DO16
DI17
DO17
ECM1
ECM2
D102
+5E
DI01
DI10
DI14
DI13
DI15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
DI20
DI24
DI23
DI25
DI27
DO00
DI05
DO01
DI15
DO02
DO03
DO05
0V
DO10
DO12
DO14
+5E
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
B
DI22
+5E
DI21
DI26
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
+5E
0V
DO04
0V
0V
DO11
DO13
DO15
+5E
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
0V
DO20
DO22
DO24
DO26
0V
DO30
DO32
DO34
DO36
0V
+5E
DI30
DI32
DI34
DI36
+5E
B
0V
DO21
DO23
DO25
DO27
0V
DO31
DO33
DO35
DO37
0V
+5E
DI31
DI33
DI35
DI37
+5E
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
CA40 (Connector on the manual pulse generator)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DI37
0V
DO37
0V
+5E
+5E
08
09
10
11
12
13
DI31
DI32
DI33
DI34
DI35
DI36
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
+5V
+5V
HA1
HB1
DI30
CNA1 (Connector on the machine side)
9
7
5
3
1
0M
DO36
SM
0M
LM
10
8
6
4
2
ECM2
ECM1
SM
0M
LM
19
17
15
13
11
OTR
*ESP
COM
EOF
EON
20
18
16
14
12
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
CNB1 (Connector on the operator’s panel side) CPD1 (Power supply)
01
02
03
04
LM
SM
0M
0M
05
06
07
08
EON
EOF
COM
0V
09
10
11
12
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
3
6
2
0V
5
0V
1
+24V
4
+24V
Pins shaded by
are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same
name are connected directly to one another.
297
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D
converter.
2 OM is connected to 0 V on the PCB.
Input/output pins shaded by
are in pairs. Only one in
each pair is usable.
3 Do not connect a cable longer than 30 cm to CM15, CM16,
or CM17.
ÇÇ
JD1A (FANUC I/O Link : NEXT SLAVE)
9
7
5
3
1
+5V
TXB
RXB
10
8
6
4
2
*TXB
*RXB
19
17
15
13
11
0V
0V
0V
20
18
16
14
12
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
JD1B (FANUC I/O Link : BEFORE SLAVE)
9
7
5
3
1
+5V
TXA
RXA
10
8
6
4
2
*TXA
*RXA
CM26 (Matrix DI/DO)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
0V
*KYD0
*KYD2
*KYD4
*KYD6
*KYC0
*KYC2
*KYC4
*KYC6
*KYC8
*KYCA
*BZMD
*LD0
*LD1
*LD2
*LD3
*LD4
*LD5
*LD6
*LD7
LC1L
LC2L
LC3L
LC4L
0V
298
B
*MND1
*KYD1
*KYD3
*KYD5
*KYD7
*KYC1
*KYC3
*KYC5
*KYC7
*KYC9
*KYCB
0V
*LD8
*LD9
*LD10
*LD11
*LD12
*LD13
*LD14
*LD15
LC1H
LC2H
LC3H
LC4H
0V
19
17
15
13
11
0V
0V
0V
20
18
16
14
12
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DInx
General–purpose DI
LM
Load meter voltage
DOnx
General–purpose DO
SM
Speed meter voltage
*ESP
Emergency stop
0M
LM/SM reference voltage (0V)
ECM1
*ESP common signal
*KYDx
Matrix DI data signal
OTR
OT release
*KYCx
Matrix DI common signal
ECM2
OTR common signal
*LDx
Matrix DO data signal
EON/OF Power ON/OFF control signal
LCnL/H
Matrix DO common signal
COM
EON/EOF common signal
*MNDI
Three DI points acceptable
HAI
Input from manual pulse generator *BZMD
HBI
Input from manual pulse generator
Buzzer off
See Subsec. 10.7.4 for details of connection and signal meanings.
10.7.4
Interface
General–purpose DI
+5E
DI00 to DI37
RV
0V
Input signal specifications
Contact rating
5VDC, 3.2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts
0.2mA or lower (5 VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts
0.75V or lower
299
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
General–purpose DO
+24V
DO00 to DO37
Photocoupler
+
FET
0V
Output signal specifications
Maximum load current
0.03A
Maximum open–circuit leakage current
0.1mA
Maximum closed–circuit voltage drop
0.1V
NOTE
When using an LED at the DO point, connect an external
resistor that meets the requirements of the LED.
300
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Matrix DI
D Key switch addresses
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYC4
*KYC5
*KYC6
*KYC7
*KYC8
*KYC9
*KYCA
*KYCB
*KYD7
*KYD6
*KYD5
*KYD4
*KYD3
*KYD2
*KYD1
*KYD0
*BZMD
*MNDI
0V
See Subsec. 10.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26–A06
KY07
KY06
KY05
KY04
KY03
KY02
KY01
KY00
BZ0
CM26–B06
KY17
KY16
KY15
KY14
KY13
KY12
KY11
KY10
BZ1
CM26–A07
KY27
KY26
KY25
KY24
KY23
KY22
KY21
KY20
BZ2
CM26–B07
KY37
KY36
KY35
KY34
KY33
KY32
KY31
KY30
BZ3
CM26–A08
KY47
KY46
KY45
KY44
KY43
KY42
KY41
KY40
BZ4
CM26–B08
KY57
KY56
KY55
KY54
KY53
KY52
KY51
KY50
BZ5
CM26–A09
KY67
KY66
KY65
KY64
KY63
KY62
KY61
KY60
BZ6
CM26–B09
KY77
KY76
KY75
KY74
KY73
KY72
KY71
KY70
BZ7
CM26–A10
KY87
KY86
KY85
KY84
KY83
KY82
KY81
KY80
BZ8
CM26–B10
KY97
KY96
KY95
KY94
KY93
KY92
KY91
KY90
BZ9
CM26–A11
KYA7
KYA6
KYA5
KYA4
KYA3
KYA2
KYA1
KYA0
BZA
CM26–B11
KYB7
KYB6
KYB5
KYB4
KYB3
KYB2
KYB1
KYB0
BZB
CM26–B05
CM26–A05
CM26–B04
CM26–A04
CM26–B03
CM26–A03
CM26–B02
CM26–A02
CM26–A12
CM26–B01
CM26–A01
When *MNDI =
0, it enables three or more simultaneous inputs.
When *MNDI =
1, it inhibits three or more simultaneous inputs.
301
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
D Mode selection
B–63003EN/04
- Preventing malfunctions that may be caused by detouring current
When there are three or more matrix DI points, detouring current can
cause a nonexistent DI input to be falsely detected as existing.
As shown below, if KY01, KY03, and KY21 are closed
simultaneously, current detours through the path indicated with
arrows, thus causing a false input of *KY23 to be detected because of
a current path formed by a combination of common signal *KYC2 and
data signal *KYD3.
*KYC0
KY03
KY01
KY23
KY21
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYD3
*KYD2
*KYD1
*KYD0
Two modes are available to prevent this malfunction. One should be
selected according to the user applications.
[Method 1]
D Ignoring all occurrences of three or more simultaneous inputs
Action : Make the *MNDI signal open (see item “D Key switch
addresses”)
NOTE
If there are two inputs and a third is added, all three are
ignored. When one of the three inputs is removed, two are
accepted.
[Method 2]
D Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three simultaneous
inputs
Action : Connect the *MNDI signal (see item “D Key switch
addresses”) to 0V.
A diode must be connected in series with a switch, as shown below.
Detour prevention diode
*KYCn
*KYDn
302
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
- This PCB can raise a confirmation sound when a key is pressed. The
condition to raise an audible alarm is set in 8–bit units, or in *KYCn
units. If *BZMD and common *KYCn are disconnected, a KYnx
input causes a sound to generate. If they are connected, a KYnx input
does not generate the sound.
To generate a confirmation sound for key input, the DO (PMC address
DO + 00.7) “MD07” must have been turned to “1” (see Subsec.
10.7.5).
1 A diode is necessary to connect *BZMD and *KYCn, as
shown below.
2 This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.
3 The sound is generated when the circuit closes between
common signal *KYCn and data signal *KYDx. It does not
sound when the circuit is disconnected. If key switches are
used, the sound is heard at the moment a key is pressed.
It does not sound when a key is released or when a key is
held pressed.
*KYCn
*BZMD
(Example)
If *BZMD is connected to *KYC0 and *KYC2, but disconnected from
*KYC1 and *KYC3, as shown below, closing a switch at key
addresses KY10 to KY17 and KY30 to KY37 causes a confirmation
sound for key input to be heard, but closing a switch at key addresses
KY00 to KY07 and KY20 to KY27 does not.
See item “D Key switch addresses”.
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*BZMD
303
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
D Signal specification
Contact rating
6VDC, 2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts
0.2mA or lower (6VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts
0.9V or lower (1 mA) Note )
NOTE
This voltage must be maintained even when detour
prevention diodes are used.
304
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Matrix DO
D LED addresses
See Subsec. 10.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
LC4L
CM26–A24
LC3L
CM26–A23
LC2L
CM26–A22
LC1L
CM26–A21
*LD0
CM26–A13
L1L0
*LD1
*LD2
CM26–A14
CM26–A15
L1L1
*LD3
CM26–A16
L1L3
*LD4
CM26–A17
L1L4
*LD5
CM26–A18
L1L5
*LD6
CM26–A19
*LD7
CM26–A20
L1L6
L1L7
L1L2
L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7
L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7
L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7
NOTE
The timing for the common signals are shown below. Their
duty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDs
being off.
LC4L (H)
LC3L (H)
LC2L (H)
LC1L (H)
8ms
305
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
LC4H
LC3H
LC2H
LC1H
*LD8
*LD9
*LD10
*LD11
*LD12
*LD13
*LD14
*LD15
B–63003EN/04
CM26–B24
CM26–B23
CM26–B22
CM26–B21
CM26–B13
L1H0
CM26–B14
CM26–B15
L1H1
CM26–B16
L1H3
CM26–B17
L1H4
CM26–B18
L1H5
CM26–B19
L1H6
L1H7
L1H2
CM26–B20
L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7
L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7
L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7
D Internal circuit
The circuit contains a 100–ohm resistor, as shown below.
Connecting an LED does not require an external resistor.
+5V
100 Ω
306
CM26
LCnL (H)
CM26
*LDx
LnL(H)x
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
D Signal specifications
The LEDs must have the following rating
Forward voltage
2.4V max (If=5mA)(Typical value)
Forward current
30mA max
Reverse voltage
3V max
Interface for manual
pulse generator
D Connection of connector
CNB1
One interface is provided on connector CNB1.
When only the
manual pulse
generator is directly
connected
HA1 9
HA1
HB1 10
HB1
+5V
+5V
11
0V 12
Manual pulse
generator
0V
CNB1
Control PCB
D Connection of connector
CA40
Pendant–type manual pulse generator with axis selection and multiplier
setting functions can be connected to connector CA40.
Pendant–type manual
pulse generator
When a
pendant–type
manual pulse
generator
with including
axis selection
and multiplier
setting
functions is
connected
HA1 3
HA1
HB1 4
HB1
+5V
+5V
1, 2
0V 17,18
0V
0V
15
0V
7 to
DI30 to DI37 14
DO37 16
DI
Control PCB
Axis
selection
Multiplier
setting
DO
CA40
NOTE
1 When DI30 to DI37 of connector CA40 are allocated as the
DIs used for the axis selection and multiplier setting, DI30
to DI37 of connector CM17 cannot be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at
the user’s discretion. When this is used, DO37 of CM17
cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
307
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Analog signal inputs
Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change to
output terminals.
D Connection diagram
(example)
Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speed
meter indications.
Spindle
amp
LM
LM
1, 2
1
0M
3
3
0M
Load
meter
0M
4
4
0M
(Operator’s
panel)
SM
5, 6
2
SM
Speed
meter
CNA1
CNB1
Machine operator’s
panel interface unit
D Sent to the CNC
D Analog signal
specifications
Analog inputs received on the Machine operator’s panel interface unit are
converted to five–bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though the
I/O Link.
See Subsec. 9.7.5 for PMC addresses.
LM conversion data : “LM03 to LM07”
SM conversion data : “SM03 to SM07”
Acceptable input voltage
0V to +15V
Voltage that can be converted to digital
0V to +10V
Note)
NOTE
Any voltage higher than +10V is converted to the same
digital value as +10V is.
D A/D conversion
specifications
Conversion error
5%
(max)
Resolution
5 bit
(min)
308
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
D Emergency stop
A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machine
operator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal
cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
Emergency stop
signal
*ESP
A09
17
B09
8
*ESP
24V
ECM1
ECM1
CM15
CNA1
Machine operator’s
panel interface unit
D OT release
*ESP
Power magnetics
cabinet
A signal generated by the OT release switch on the machine operator’s
panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.
(This signal cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
OT release switch
OTR
A10
19
B10
10
ECM2
ECM2
CM15
OTR
ECM
CNA1
Machine operator’s
panel interface unit
D Power ON/OFF control
signal
OTR
Power magnetics
cabinet
Signals generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machine
operator’s panel can be sent to an input unit. (These signals cannot be sent
to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
ON switch EON
5
11
EON
6
13
ECF
OFF switch
7
15
COM
ECF
COM
CM15
CNA1
Machine operator’s
panel interface unit
Input unit
NOTE
The LM, OM, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, and
OTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector
(CNA1).
They can be connected to the machine using only one cable.
309
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.5
PMC Addresses
Scope in which PMC
addresses can be used
BIT NUMBER
PMC
ADDRESS
DI+00
DI+01
DI+02
DI+03
DI+04
DI+05
DI+06
DI+07
DI+08
DI+09
DI+10
DI+11
DI+12
DI+13
DI+14
DI+15
DI+16
DI+17
DI+18
DI+19
DI+20
DI+21
DO+00
DO+01
DO+02
DO+03
DO+04
DO+05
DO+06
DO+07
DO+08
DO+09
DO+10
DO+11
DO+12
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KY01
KY11
KY21
KY31
KY41
KY51
KY61
KY71
DI01
DI11
DI21
DI31
KY00
KY10
KY20
KY30
KY40
KY50
KY60
KY70
DI00
DI10
DI20
DI30
MP11
MP10
KY07
KY17
KY27
KY37
KY47
KY57
KY67
KY77
DI07
DI17
DI27
DI37
LM07
SM07
MP17
KY06
KY16
KY26
KY36
KY46
KY56
KY66
KY76
DI06
DI16
DI26
DI36
LM06
SM06
MP16
FUSE
KY05
KY04
KY03
KY02
KY15
KY14
KY13
KY12
KY25
KY24
KY23
KY22
KY35
KY34
KY33
KY32
KY45
KY44
KY43
KY42
KY55
KY54
KY53
KY52
KY65
KY64
KY63
KY62
KY75
KY74
KY73
KY72
DI05
DI04
DI03
DI02
DI15
DI14
DI13
DI12
DI25
DI24
DI23
DI22
DI35
DI34
DI33
DI32
LM05
LM04
LM03
SM05
SM04
SM03
MP15
MP14
MP13
MP12
Reserved for use by FANUC
KY87
KY97
KYA7
KYB7
KY86
KY96
KYA6
KYB6
KY85
KY95
KYA5
KYB5
KY84
KY94
KYA4
KYB4
KY83
KY93
KYA3
KYB3
KY82
KY92
KYA2
KYB2
KY81
KY91
KYA1
KYB1
KY80
KY90
KYA0
KYB0
MD07
L1L7
L2L7
L3L7
L4L7
L1H7
L2H7
L3H7
L4H7
DO07
DO17
DO27
DO37
MD06
L1L6
L2L6
L3L6
L4L6
L1H6
L2H6
L3H6
L4H6
DO06
DO16
DO26
DO36
FUSE
L1L5
L2L5
L3L5
L4L5
L1H5
L2H5
L3H5
L4H5
DO05
DO15
DO25
DO35
L1L4
L2L4
L3L4
L4L4
L1H4
L2H4
L3H4
L4H4
DO04
DO14
DO24
DO34
L1L3
L2L3
L3L3
L4L3
L1H3
L2H3
L3H3
L4H3
DO03
DO13
DO23
DO33
L1L2
L2L2
L3L2
L4L2
L1H2
L2H2
L3H2
L4H2
DO02
DO12
DO22
DO32
L1L1
L2L1
L3L1
L4L1
L1H1
L2H1
L3H1
L4H1
DO01
DO11
DO21
DO31
L1L0
L2L0
L3L0
L4L0
L1H0
L2H0
L3H0
L4H0
DO00
DO10
DO20
DO30
FUSE
I/O Link allocation
128/128
256/256
: When 1, it indicates the +5E fuse has blown.
Shorting of the general–purpose DI input is considered as a possible cause. Turn off the power at
once, check the general–purpose DI input and its vicinity, replace the fuse and turn the power on.
DInx
: General–purpose DI
LM0x
: Load meter indication
SM0x
: Speed meter indication
KYnx
: Ky signal (matrix)
LnL (H) x : LED signal (matrix)
DOnx
: General–purpose DO
MD07
: Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the key entry confirmation tone at the matrix DI input by
turning this to “1”.)
MD06
: Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to “1” and stops as it is turned to “0”. This
operation is performed irrespective of MD07.)
MP1X
: First manual pulse generator
310
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.6
Major Connection
Precautions
10.7.7
State of the LEDs on
the Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
D Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26.
When splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operator’s
panel or other equipment, be careful not to break or short the
conductors.
D All signals with the same name described in Subsec. 10.7.3 are
connected to one another.
D One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.
Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with the
diagram in Subsec. 10.7.10.
L1 (green) :
Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact (+5E: 5V for
connector output).
When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.
L2 (green) :
Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys are
being scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is at
halt.
L3 (red) :
When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, it
indicates that there is no alarm condition.
311
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.8
Connector
(on the Cable Side)
Specifications
Connector
Major use
Specification
CM15,
CM16,
CM17
General–purpose
DI/DO
HIF3BA–34D–2.54R :
Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
CNA1
Relay terminal
(to the machine)
PCR–E20FS :
Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
CNB1
Relay terminal
MVSTBR2.5/12–ST–5.08 :
(to the machine
Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT
operator’s panel)
GmbH & Co.
JD1A,
JD1B
FANUC I/O Link
PCR–E20FS :
Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
CPD1
Power supply
Dynamic D3100 (three pins) :
Manufactured by AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1–178288–3 : Connector
1–175218–5 : Contact
CM26
Matrix DI/DO
CA40
Manual
generator
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R :
Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
pulse MR–20LFH (solder type) :
Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
NOTE
1 Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer to
brochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..
The connector used on the machine operator’s panel
interface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12–G–5.08.
2 Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. For
purchase from FANUC, please specify as below.
A02B–0029–K890 : Solder type
A02B–0029–K892 : Crimped type
312
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.9
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector
Locations)
22
89
20
B17
A1
JD1B
CM15
22
A1
JD1A
CM16
1 CA40
16
41
9
CNA1
B17
150
75
10
CNB1
17
60
15
B25
11
CPD1
A1
CM17
A1
CM26
B17
40
124
89
26
310
Unit : mm
Tolerance : "5 (mm)
CPD1
CND1
CNA1
CA40
JD1A
JD2B
10mm
Approx. 100mm
1.6mm
313
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.10
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Mounting Dimension
Diagram
20
Mounting hole position
18
114
CM17
150
110
CM26
Hole for connecting to a ground
4.5f
CM15
18
20
CM16
296
310
Fasten the PCB with four M4 screws.
Unit : mm
314
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Sheet fixing area
(mounting face side)
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
diagram below.
12
10
10
15
8
18
25
10
CM26
7
130
CM17
130
7
5
3
8
14
20
10
10
10
CM15
CM16
12
14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
Sheet fixing area
(Soldering face side)
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
diagram below.
14
12
7
10
8
126
CM17
124
21
14
7
13
CM26
CM15
8
12
CM16
10
13
7
17
3
13
14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
315
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.7.11
CM15
JD1B
CM16
JD1A
CM17
FU2
FU3
CM26
CPD1
FU1
Fuse Mounting
Position
FU1 : +24V fuse (general–purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2 : +5V fuse (IC power, manual pulse generator protection)
FU3 : +5E fuse (general–purpose DI protection)
NOTE
FU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.
316
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.8
CONNECTION OF
OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT
The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2200–0660, 0661) is
connected to the control unit through the FANUC I/O Link and is used for
interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
fully compatible with those for Series 15. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification
Input
Output
A16B–2200–0660
96 points
64 points
A16B–2200–0661
64 points
32 points
Operator’s panel connection unit
A16B–2200–0660,0661
Control unit
or I/O unit
JD1A
JD1B
JDIA
To next device
If there is no equipment
beyond this connection
unit, JD1A can remain
open.
24V DC power
CP61
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.
3P CONNECTOR
(Brown)
CM1
CM2
Machine
operator’s
panel
CM3
Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
1
+24V
2
GND
CM4
3
Power supply input specification
Voltage : 24 VDC "10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3
n mA
n : number of inputs that turn on simultaneously
CAUTION
For a power cable, use a cable of 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or
thicker.
317
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.8.1
Input Signal
Regulations for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
B–63003EN/04
The input signal of the operator’s panel connection unit is 0V common
non–insulation type interface as shown below.
Machine
tool
Operator’s panel connection unit
Direct
current
input
signal
+24V
Filter and level
converter circuit
Receiver
output
signal
Receiver circuit
Fig. 10.8.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Direct current
input signal
OFF (High)
ON (Low)
(Signal)
(Signal)
Logi 0
(more
than 18V)
Logi 1
(less
than 6V)
Chattering of 5ms
or less is ignored
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms
5 to 22ms
Fig. 10.8.1 (b) Width of input signals and delay time
In the above figure, it is logic 0 when the contact is open and logic 1 when
closed.
Connect the common line of the input signal of the operator’s panel
connection unit as shown below.
Machine tool
Connector
CM1
DI00 to DI57
COM1
Connector
CM2
Operator’s panel
connection unit
DI60 to DIB7
COM2
Fig. 10.8.1 (c) Connection of common lines
318
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
WARNING
All signals input to this operator’s panel connection unit are
of source type.
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals. In particular,
input signals X008.0 to X008.7 must be connected in a sink
layout, because these signals include the emergency stop
signal.
Do not use this operator’s panel connection unit for
safety–critical input signals (such as an emergency stop
signal).
319
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.8.2
Output Signal
Regulations for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
B–63003EN/04
Output signals DO00 to DO77 of the operator’s panel connection unit
drive indicators and LEDs on the machine operator’s panel and use NPN
transistor for drivers.
Prepare 24VDC for power supply of indicators and LEDs and connect 0V
to COM3 and COM4. For LEDs, however, 5VDC 300mA output from
the terminal +5N of the connector CM3 can be used. There is no +5N in
the connector CM4; use +5N in connector CM3 as shown below:
Output regulation Load voltage : 24V +20% or less
Load current : 40mA
Connector CM3
Indicator
Transistor output
R
DO00 to 57
LED
R
+5N
+5VDC
300mA
max
COM3
Connector CM4 Indicator
Transistor output
DO60 to 77
R
LED
R
+
24V
stabilized
power
–
COM4
Operator’s panel
connectIon unit
WARNING
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.
320
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.8.3
Connector Layout for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
CM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DI00
DI03
DI06
DI11
DI14
DI17
DI22
DI25
DI27
DI32
DI35
DI40
DI43
DI46
DI51
DI54
DI56
COM1
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DI01
DI04
DI07
DI12
DI15
DI20
DI23
DI30
DI33
DI36
DI41
DI44
DI47
DI52
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
9
50
DI02
DI05
DI10
DI13
DI16
DI21
DI24
DI26
DI31
DI34
DI37
DI42
DI45
DI50
DI53
DI55
DI57
Address
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
9
50
DI62
DI65
DI70
DI73
DI76
DI81
DI84
DI86
DI91
DI94
DI97
DIA2
DIA5
DIB0
DIB3
DIB5
DIB7
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Xn
DI07
DI06
DI05
DI04
DI03
DI02
DI01
DI00
Xn+1
DI17
DI16
DI15
DI14
DI13
DI12
DI11
DI10
Xn+2
DI27
DI26
DI25
DI24
DI23
DI22
DI21
DI20
Xn+3
DI37
DI36
DI35
DI34
DI33
DI32
DI31
DI30
Xn+4
DI47
DI46
DI45
DI44
DI43
DI42
DI41
DI40
Xn+5
DI57
DI56
DI55
DI54
DI53
DI52
DI51
DI50
CM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DI60
DI63
DI66
DI71
DI74
DI77
DI82
DI85
DI87
DI92
DI95
DIA0
DIA3
DIA6
DIB1
DIB4
DIB6
COM2
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DI61
DI64
DI67
DI72
DI75
DI80
DI83
DI90
DI93
DI96
DIA1
DIA4
DIA7
DIB2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Xn+6
DI67
DI66
DI65
DI64
DI63
DI62
DI61
DI60
Xn+7
DI77
DI76
DI75
DI74
DI73
DI72
DI71
DI70
Xn+8
DI87
DI86
DI85
DI84
DI83
DI82
DI81
DI80
Xn+9
DI97
DI96
DI95
DI94
DI93
DI92
DI91
DI90
Xn+10
DIA7
DIA6
DIA5
DIA4
DIA3
DIA2
DIA1
DIA0
Xn+11
DIB7
DIB6
DIB5
DIB4
DIB3
DIB2
DIB1
DIB0
NOTE
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
64 points (DI00 to DI77) can be used for the
A16B–2200–0661.
321
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
CM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DO00
DO03
DO06
DO11
DO14
DO17
DO22
DO25
DO27
DO32
DO35
DO40
DO43
DO46
DO51
DO54
DO56
COM3
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DO01
DO04
DO07
DO12
DO15
DO20
DO23
DO30
DO33
DO36
DO41
DO44
DO47
DO52
8
9
10
11
12
13
DO62
DO65
DO70
DO73
DO76
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
9
50
+5N
DO02
DO05
DO10
DO13
DO16
DO21
DO24
DO26
DO31
DO34
DO37
DO42
DO45
DO50
DO53
DO55
DO57
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DO60
DO63
DO66
DO71
DO74
DO77
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DO07
DO06
DO05
DO04
DO03
DO02
DO01
DO00
Yn+1 DO17
DO16
DO15
DO14
DO13
DO12
DO11
DO10
Yn+2 DO27
DO26
DO25
DO24
DO23
DO22
DO21
DO20
Yn+3 DO37
DO36
DO35
DO34
DO33
DO32
DO31
DO30
Yn+4 DO47
DO46
DO45
DO44
DO43
DO42
DO41
DO40
Yn+5 DO57
DO56
DO55
DO54
DO53
DO52
DO51
DO50
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Yn+6 DO67
DO66
DO65
DO64
DO63
DO62
DO61
DO60
Yn+7 DO77
DO76
DO75
DO74
DO73
DO72
DO71
DO70
Yn
CM4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DO60
DO64
DO67
DO72
DO75
COM4
Address
7
NOTE
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the
A16B–2200–0661.
322
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.8.4
External View of
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
11.8mm
Approx.
100mm
Weight : 1.2 kg
Fig. 10.8.4 External view of operator’s panel connection unit
323
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.9
CONNECTION OF
SOURCE OUTPUT
TYPE CONNECTION
UNIT
B–63003EN/04
The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730, 0731), which
connects to the control unit via the FANUC I/O Link, acts as an interface
with the machine operator’s panel.
Connectors CM51, CM52, CMB3, and CMB4, used to interface with the
operator’s panel, feature an electrical interface and pin assignment which
are fully compatible with those of the source type output operator’s panel
connection unit for the Series 15. The following two units are available
with different numbers of I/O points:
Specifications
No. of input points
No. of output points
A16B–2202–0730
96
64
A16B–2202–0731
64
32
Operator’s Panel Connection Unit
A16B–2202–0730,0731
Control unit
or
I/O unit
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
To next device
When no other device is
connected to the connection unit, leave JD1A open.
24VDC power
CM51
CM52
BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR (Brown)
Housing: SMS3PNS–5
Contact: RC16M–SCT3
CMB3
Machine
operation’s
panel
CMB4
1
+24V
2
GND
3
Power input regulations
Voltage : 24VDC"10%
Capacity : 500+7. 3 n (mA)
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned on
CAUTION
Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.
324
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.9.1
Input Signal
Specifications for
Source Output Type
Connection Unit
Most input signals for the source output type connection unit support a
sink type non–isolated interface. For some input signals, however, either
sink or source type can be selected. (European safety standards demand
the use of sink types.)
The machine’s contacts shall conform to the following specifications:
Capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or higher
Intercontact leakage current in closed circuit:
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Intercontact voltage drop in closed circuit:
2 V or less (including the voltage drop in the cables)
Circuit of sink type input receiver
Machine
Operator’s panel connection unit
Filter and level
conversion circuit
Input signal
Contact
Receiver
output
signal
R
+24V
+24V
Circuit of input receiver for which common voltage can be selected
Machine
Operator’s panel connection unit
Filter and level
conversion circuit
Input signal
Contact
R
DICMN1
or
DICMN2
+24V
Receiver
output
signal
+24V
0V
Filter and level
conversion circuit
Input signal
Contact
DICMN1
or
DICMN2
+24V
Receiver
output
signal
R
+24V
0V
Fig. 10.9.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Always connect both DICMN1 and DICMN2 to 24 V or 0 V. Do not leave
them open.
325
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
DC input signal
OFF (High)
ON (Low)
(Signal)
(Signal)
Logical 0
(18 V or
higher)
Logical 1
(6V or
lower)
Chattering of 5
ms or less is ignored.
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms
5 to 22ms
Fig. 10.9.1 (b) Signal width and delay of input signal
In the above figure, logical 0 corresponds to open contacts, while logical
1 corresponds to closed contacts.
WARNING
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals.
10.9.2
Output Signal
Specifications for
Source Output Type
Connection Unit
The output signals shall satisfy the following:
Maximum load current when driver is on:
200 mA (including momentary values)
Saturation voltage when driver is on:
1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V +20% (including momentary values)
Leakage current when driver is off:
100 mA
Prepare the following external power supply for the output signals:
Supply voltage: +24 V "10%
Supply current (per board):
At least total maximum load current
(including momentary values) + 100 mA
Power–on timing: At the same time as or before turning on
the power to the control unit
Power–off timing: At the same time as or after turning on the
power to the control unit
326
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
CAUTION
A power supply which satisfies the above specifications
shall be connected to the DOCOM and 0V power supply
terminals for the output signals. The maximum current that
can be carried by the DOCOM pin is 2.0 A. The total load
current must not exceed this value, therefore.
Output signal driver
The output signal driver used with the operator’s panel connection unit
can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
On the PCB, a red LED beside the driver element lights once the overheat
detection circuit operates.
NOTE
The overheat detection circuit also causes a system alarm
to be issued to the CNC. (When setting pins CP1 on the
PCB are closed (jumpered), this alarm is not issued to the
CNC.)
Correspondence
between red LEDs and
DO signals
Red LED name
DO signals
DAL1
Y q + 0.0 to Y q + 0.7
DAL2
Y q + 1.0 to Y q + 1.7
DAL3
Y q + 2.0 to Y q + 2.7
DAL4
Y q + 3.0 to Y q + 3.7
DAL5
Y q + 4.0 to Y q + 4.7
DAL6
Y q + 5.0 to Y q + 5.7
DAL7
Y q + 6.0 to Y q + 6.7
DAL8
Y q + 7.0 to Y q + 7.7
327
Remarks
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
The above red LED and alarm transfer to the CNC are
supported by PCBs of version 03B and later.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC
diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.
D Driver element block
diagram
DOCOM
OHD
IN#0
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
IN#1
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
IN#7
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Overheat detection circuit
OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from
DOCOM (24 VDC).
328
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Notes on output signals
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions when connecting output
signals:
Output pins shall not be connected in parallel, as shown
below.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Relay
DV
DV
0V
CAUTION
When using a dimming resistor, connect a diode to prevent
leakage.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
Dimming
resistor
Lamp
DV
329
Leakage prevention diode
0V
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.9.3
Connector Pin Layout
for Source Output Type
Connection Unit
CM51
CM52
1
DI00
2
DI03
3
DI06
4
DI11
5
DI14
6
DI17
7
DI22
8
DI25
9
DI27
10
DI32
19
DI01
20
DI04
21
DI07
22
DI12
23
DI15
24
DI20
25
DI23
26
DI30
27
DI33
28
DI36
33
DICMN1
1
DI60
34
DI02
2
DI63
35
DI05
3
DI66
36
DI10
4
DI71
37
DI13
5
DI74
38
DI16
6
DI77
39
DI21
7
DI82
40
DI24
8
DI85
41
DI26
9
DI87
42
DI31
10
DI92
43
DI34
11
DI95
44
DI37
12
DIA0
45
DI42
13
DIA3
46
DI45
14
DIA6
47
DI50
15
DIB1
19
DI61
20
DI64
21
DI67
22
DI72
23
DI75
24
DI80
25
DI83
26
DI90
27
DI93
28
DI96
33
0V
34
DI62
35
DI65
36
DI70
37
DI73
38
DI76
39
DI81
40
DI84
41
DI86
42
DI91
43
DI94
44
DI97
45
DIA2
46
DIA5
47
DIB0
11
DI35
12
DI40
13
DI43
14
DI46
15
DI51
16
DI54
48
DI53
16
DIB4
48
DIB3
17
DI56
49
DI55
17
DIB6
49
DIB5
18
+24V
50
DI57
18
+24V
50
DIB7
14
DO60
15
DO63
16
DO66
17
DO71
18
DO74
29
DI41
30
DI44
31
DI47
32
DI52
CMB3
1
29
DIA1
30
DIA4
31
DIA7
32
DIB2
CMB4
DO00
2
DO03
3
DO06
4
DO11
5
DO14
6
DO17
7
DO22
8
DO25
9
DO27
10
DO32
33
19
DO01
20
DO04
21
DO07
22
DO12
23
DO15
24
DO20
25
DO23
26
DO30
27
DO33
28
DO36
0V
DO02
2
DO64
35
DO05
3
DO67
36
DO10
4
DO72
37
DO13
5
DO75
38
DO16
6
DO56
39
DO21
7
0V
40
DO24
41
DO26
42
DO31
43
DO34
44
DO37
45
DO42
46
DO45
11
DO35
DO40
13
DO43
14
DO46
15
DO51
47
DO50
16
DO54
48
DO53
17
DOCOM
49
DO55
18
DICMN2
50
DOCOM
DO41
30
DO44
31
DO47
32
DO52
DO61
34
12
29
1
330
8
DO62
9
DO65
10
DO70
11
DO73
12
DO76
13
DO57
19
DO77
20
DOCOM
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
When the operator’s panel connection unit having 64 DIs
and 32 DOs is selected, connector CMB4 is not mounted on
the PCB.
DICMN1, DICMN2: Pins used to switch the DI common. Usually,
jumper these pins with 0V. (input)
+24V:
+24 VDC output pin. This pin shall be used only
for DI signals input to the operator’s panel
connection unit. (output)
DOCOM:
Power supply for the DO driver. All DOCOM pins
are connected in the unit. (input)
I/O addresses
The following PMC addresses are assigned to the operator’s panel
connection unit, depending on the number of I/O points (DI/DO = 96/64
or 64/32):
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DI07
DI06
DI05
DI04
DI03
DI02
DI01
DI00
DI:
X p+1
64
points X p+2
DI17
DI16
DI15
DI14
DI13
DI12
DI11
DI10
DI27
DI26
DI25
DI24
DI23
DI22
DI21
DI20
X p+3
DI37
DI36
DI35
DI34
DI33
DI32
DI331
DI30
X p+4
DI47
DI46
DI45
DI44
DI43
DI42
DI41
DI40
X p+5
DI57
DI56
DI55
DI54
DI53
DI52
DI51
DI50
X p+6
DI67
DI66
DI65
DI64
DI63
DI62
DI61
DI60
X p+7
DI77
DI76
DI75
DI74
DI73
DI72
DI71
DI70
X p+8
DI87
DI86
DI85
DI84
DI83
DI82
DI81
DI80
X p+9
DI97
DI96
DI95
DI94
DI93
DI92
DI91
DI90
X p+10
DIA7
DIA6
DIA5
DIA4
DIA3
DIA2
DIA1
DIA0
X p+11
DIB7
DIB6
DIB5
DIB4
DIB3
DIB2
DIB1
DIB0
[DI address]
Xp
DI:
96
points
D Address p is determined by the machine tool builder.
D The common voltage can be selected for the DIs assigned to the
following 20 addresses:
Address
Common signal to correspond
Xp+0.0, Xp+0.1, Xp+0.2, Xp+0.7
Xp+1.0, Xp+1.1, Xp+1.2, Xp+1.7
DICMN1
Xp+4.0 to Xp+4.7
DICMN2
Xp+11.4, Xp+11.5, Xp+11.6, Xp+11.7
DICMN1
331
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
[DO address]
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DO07
DO06
DO05
DO04
DO03
DO02
DO01
DO00
DO: Y q+1
32
points Y q+2
DO17
DO16
DO15
DO14
DO13
DO12
DO11
DO10
DO27
DO26
DO25
DO24
DO23
DO22
DO21
DO20
Y q+3
DO37
DO36
DO35
DO34
DO33
DO32
DO31
DO30
Y q+4
DO47
DO46
DO45
DO44
DO43
DO42
DO41
DO40
Y q+5
DO57
DO56
DO55
DO54
DO53
DO52
DO51
DO50
Y q+6
DO67
DO66
DO65
DO64
DO63
DO62
DO61
DO60
Y q+7
DO77
DO76
DO75
DO74
DO73
DO72
DO71
DO70
Yq
DO:
64
points
B–63003EN/04
Address q is determined by the machine tool builder.
For details of address assignment, refer to the FANUC PMC
Programming Manual (Ladder Language) (B–61863E).
332
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.9.4
Dimensions of Source
Output Type
Connection Unit
15 mm
4–f5mm
CP1
43
JD1B
JD1A
1 2 3
CP61
35
17.78 mm
155
11.72
mm
120 mm
154 mm
CP1
12 12
mm
CMB4
MR20RM
31.05mm
7mm
50mm 10
336mm
20
CMB3
MR50RM
46.99mm
50
CM52
MR50RM
88.9mm
322mm
50
CM51
MR50RM
88.9mm
50
66.16mm
Approx.
100 mm
The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB1 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB2 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : See Subsec. 10.9.2
[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2
: Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.
[Setting pin]
CP1
: Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm (see Subsec.
10.9.2).
333
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.10
FANUC I/O LINK
CONNECTION UNIT
10.10.1
This unit connects FANUC I/O Link master devices’ such as the CNC and
F–D Mate, via an I/O Link to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals.
Overview
System A
CNC or
F–D Mate
System B
+24 V power
supply
+24 V power
supply
I/O Link Slave
CNC or
F–D Mate
I/O Link Slave
FANUC I/O Link
connection unit
DI
DO
DO
DI
I/O Link Master : F–D Mate, Series 21i/210i etc.
I/O Link Slave
: I/O unit, Power Mate, Series 0–C, etc.
: FANUC I/O Link
Fig. 10.10.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units
NOTE
This system enables I/O data transfer between two independent FANUC I/O Link master
devices. When the system is adjusted and maintained, the FANUC I/O Link can be operated
with the system power for one of the FANUC I/O Link lines switched off, that is, the link operation
is stopped. In this case, DI data sent from a system at rest consists entirely of zeros. If one
of the links is stopped, either abnormally or normally, it takes up to several hundred milliseconds
for this function to take effect. During this period, that data which exists immediately before the
link stops is sent out. Take this into account when designing your system.
334
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.10.2
Specification
Item
Specification
I/O Link function
Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels,
between which DI/DO data can be transferred.
[Interface types]
One of the following combinations is selected:
Electrical – optical
Electrical – electrical
Optical
– optical
Number of DI/DO DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256
data items
(The number of data items actually used varies depending
on the amount of data assigned in the host.)
Power supply
Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with
+24 VDC.
Voltage: +24 VDC +10%, –15%
Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge)
If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supply
power to each unit (0.2 A per slot), use an external power
supply unit. The power supply must be switched on, either
simultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master.
The two systems can be switched on and off independently
of each other. Data from a system to which no power is
supplied appears as zeros when viewed from the other
system. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the power
being switched off.
External
dimensions
180 mm (wide)
150 mm (high)
about 50 mm (deep)
Fig. 10.10.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit.
Installation
The unit, which is a stand–alone type, is installed in the
power magnetics cabinet. Fig. 10.10.2 (c) shows how to
mount the unit.
Operating
environment
Temperature : 0 to 60°C
Humidity
: 5 to 75% RH (non–condensing)
Vibration
: 0.5 G or less
Ordering information
Interface type
Specification
Electrical–optical interface
A20B–2000–0410
Electrical–electrical interface
A20B–2000–0411
Optical–optical interface
A20B–2000–0412
335
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
LED indications
LED5
LED3
(GREEN) (RED)
LED4
LED2
(GREEN) (RED)
DC–DC
CONVERTER
CP2
CP1
+5V
LED1(RED)
0V
: Check pin
Fig. 10.10.2 (a) LED locations
LED status
Description
LED1
j
Normal
LED1
J
A RAM parity error occurred because of a hardware
failure.
1
2
3
LED4
J
LED2
j
CP1 is supplied with the specified voltage.
(Pilot lamp)
LED4
j
LED2
J
CP1 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than
specified or zero.
LED4
J
LED2
J
A communication error occurred in a channel of CP1.
LED5
J
LED3
j
CP2 is supplied with the specified voltage.
(Pilot lamp)
LED5
j
LED3
J
CP2 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than
specified or zero.
LED5
J
LED3
J
A communication error occurred in a channel of CP2.
J : On
336
j : Off
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Unit: mm
180
10
160
30
5
Printed–circuit board
150
90
Cable
Cable
Mounted components
50 or less
Fig. 10.10.2 (b) Outline drawing
160
4–M4 Unit: mm
90
Fig. 10.10.2 (c) Mounting location
337
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.10.3
Connection
10.10.3.1
I/O Link interface
(1) Connection diagram (example)
AC power input
I/O Link
master
AC power input
External
power
(+24 V)
External
power
(+24 V)
I/O Link
master
JD1A
JD1A
Optical I/O
Link adapter
CP(*)
CP(*)
Electrical
interface
Optical
interface
JD1B(*)
COPB(*)
JD1A(*)
COPA(*)
FANUC I/O Link connection unit
(for electrical–optical interface)
:
Signal cable (electrical)
:
Signal cable (optical)
:
Power supply cable
(*)
1 or 2 (channel No.)
Additionally, the FANUC I/O Link connection unit
frame must be grounded.
[Name of I/O Link connection unit connectors]
Electrical–optical
Electrical–electrical
Optical–optical
Connector name
I/O Link interface
Connector name
I/O Link interface
Connector name
I/O Link interface
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 2
JD1A1
COPA2
JD1A1
JD1A2
COPA1
COPA2
JD1B1
COPB2
JD1B1
JD1B2
COPB1
COPB2
CP1
CP2
CP1
CP2
CP1
CP2
338
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(2) Signal cable (electrical)
JD1A1/JD1A2
JD1B1/JD1B2
11
0V
1
RXB
11
0V
1
RXA
12
0V
2
:RXB
12
0V
2
:RXA
13
0V
3
TXB
13
0V
3
TXA
14
0V
4
:TXB
14
0V
4
:TXA
15
0V
5
15
0V
5
16
0V
6
16
0V
6
7
17
8
18
17
18
–
19
20
9
–
–
7
–
19
10
20
This unit (JD1A1/JD1A2)
8
9
–
–
10
Another device (JD1B)
or
Another device (JD1A)
RXB
:RXB
TXB
:TXB
*
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
This unit (JD1B1/JD1B2)
(03)
(04)
(01)
(02)
(09)
(18)
(20)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(01)
(02)
(03)
(04)
(09)
(18)
(20)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
TXA
:TXA
RXA
:RXA
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Indicates a twisted pair.
* An optical I/O Link adapter cannot be connected to this unit,
because the electrical interface
for this unit cannot supply +5 V.
To use an optical interface, prepare a appropriate unit.
These wires can, therefore, be
omitted.
Shielding
Frame ground (the shielding must be grounded at either end of the cable)
S
Cable–side connector specification :
PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin)
S
Cable specification
:
A66L–0001–0284#10P or equivalent
S
Cable length
:
10 m (maximum)
339
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(3) Signal cable (optical)
D Optical cable specification : A66L–6001–0009#XXXX
(where XXXX is a cable length
specification)
Cable specification examples
10 m – L10R03
100 m – L100R3
D Cable length
: 200 m (maximum)
(4) Power supply cable
CP1/CP2 connector
1
2
3
Y
+24V
0V
(Input)
X
+24V
0V
(Output)
D 24 VDC is supplied via a Y–connector. Provided the power supply
has sufficient capacity, power can be supplied to another device
with the X–side as output.
D Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
D Cable–side connector specification
Y–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKY
(AMP Japan, 2–178288–3)
X–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKX
(AMP Japan, 1–178288–3)
Contact
: A63L–0001–0456#BS (AMP Japan, 175218–5)
Ordering information : Y + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K323
X + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K324
D Cable material : Vinyl–insulated electrical wire AWG20–16
D Cable length
: Determine the length of the cable such that the
supplied voltage at the receiving end satisfies
the requirements, because the voltage may
fluctuate and drop as a result of the resistance
of the cable conductor.
(5) Frame grounding
Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section of at
least 5.5 m2 (class 3 or higher). An M4 frame ground terminal is
provided.
340
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.11
CONNECTING THE
FANUC SERVO UNIT
β SERIES WITH I/O
LINK
10.11.1
Overview
The FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link (called the β amplifier with
I/O Link) is a power motion control servo unit that can be easily connected
to a CNC control unit via the FANUC I/O Link.
The β amplifier with I/O Link can be connected to the i Series using the
FANUC I/O Link.
NOTE
Using the β amplifier requires that the power mate CNC
manager software function be installed in the i Series. This
function is included as one of the i Series option functions.
Note that this function is not supported by the i Series with
personal computer functions also requires an optional CNC
screen display function.
341
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
The β amplifier with I/O Link is connected to the i Series using the usual
FANUC I/O Link connection.
10.11.2
Connection
Control unit
FANUC SERVO UNIT β series
with I/O Link
IOLINK
JD1A
JD1A
I/O
LINK
I/O Link cable
JD1B
I/O
LINK
I/O Link
cable
JD1B
I/O
LINK
This figure is an example of connecting to
an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type
panel.
Connection to β series amplifier
342
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.11.3
Maximum Number of
Units that can be
Connected
10.11.4
Address Assignment
by Ladder
The maximum number of β amplifiers with I/O Link that can be
connected to a control unit depends on the maximum number of FANUC
I/O Link points provided by that control unit, as well as their assignments.
For the i Series, the maximum number of FANUC I/O Link DI and DO
points are 1024 and 1024, respectively. One β amplifier with I/O Link
occupies 128 DI/DO points in the FANUC I/O Link. If no units other than
the β amplifiers with I/O Link are connected to the control unit, up to eight
β amplifiers can be connected.
If the β amplifier with I/O Link is used as an I/O Link slave, I/O addresses
are assigned in the PMC in the CNC. Because data output from the slave
is made in 16–byte units, the number of input/output points must be set
to 128.
The module names are OC02I (input) and OC02O (output).
The BASE is always 0, and the SLOT is 1.
343
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12
CONNECTION OF
THE DISTRIBUTION
I/O MACHINE
OPERATOR’S PANEL
10.12.1
Differences between
the FS0 Standard
Machine Operator’s
Panel and Distribution
I/O Machine Operator
Panel
The distribution I/O machine operator’s panel is of distribution I/O type
that is connected via I/O Link to the CNC. Its panel is the same as that
of the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel. The distribution I/O
machine operator’s panel has features both common to and different from
those of the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel, as indicated below.
(Small machine operator’s panel)
Item
Panel
FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel
Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
No design modification
Override
rotary
switch
Emergency
stop button
Program
protect key
Keyboard
(key switch/LED)
Depth
Override
150% maximum,
binary code output
200% maximum,
gray code output
Key sheet
The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’s
custom key sheet, designed for the FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to be
built using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel, however, redesign is required for this
combination.
Connection with DI/DO connection
CNC
I/O Link connection
Emergency stop Already wired
Not wired. Perform wiring for
the system as described in
Section 10.12.5.
MPG interface
Up to three units can be
connected.
However, only i series CNCs
can be connected.
None
344
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)
Item
Panel
FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel
Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
No design modification
Program protect key
Override
rotary
switch
Emergency
stop button
Manual pulse generator
Keyboard (key switch/LED)
Depth
Override
150% maximum,
binary code output
200% maximum,
gray code output
Key sheet
The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’s
custom key sheet designed for the FS0 standard machine
operator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to be
built using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel, however, redesign is required for this
combination.
Connection with DI/DO connection
CNC
I/O Link connection
Emergency stop Already wired
Not wired. Perform wiring
suitable for the system as
described in Section 10.12.5.
Manual pulse One unit is available.
generator
No wiring is performed.
One unit is available.
No wiring is performed.
MPG interface
Up to three units can be
connected.
However, only i series CNCs
can be connected.
None
345
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.2
Overall Connection
Diagram
Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
Emergency stop switch
General–purpose DI
General–purpose DO
CNC
+24 V power supply
+24 V power supply
I/O unit
NOTE
CNCs of the i series only allow the distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel to be used with connected MPG units.
When other units (such as I/O modules for connection) that
have an MPG interface and which are connected via I/O
Link are used together with this machine operator’s panel,
only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the
CNC on the I/O Link connection is valid. For I/O Link
connection and manual pulse generator connection, the
screw connector indicated below, which has been newly
added to the main board of the i series, cannot be used.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification
Manufacturer
Connector case
FI–20–CV7
Hirose Electric
Connector case + connector
FI30–20S–CV7
Hirose Electric
346
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.3
Connector Mounting
Diagram
(1) Small machine operator’s panel
Specification of the printed circuit board:
A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
Printed circuit board
(2) Standard–size machine operator’s panel
Specification of the printed circuit board:
A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
Printed circuit board
NOTE
Machine operator’s panels shipped in April, 1998 and later
use the A20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board. The
A20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board features a
general–purpose DO, and has connector CE59 dedicated
to general–purpose DO.
Machine operator’s panels
shipped before April, 1998, used the printed circuit boards
listed below.
347
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.12.4
Power Supply
Connection
B–63003EN/04
Specification of
printed circuit board
Description
A20B–8001–0210
D Without general–purpose DO
D The other input/output interface specifications are
the same as those of the A20B–8001–0721
printed circuit board.
D The outer shape of the printed circuit board is
rectangular.
A20B–8001–0720
D Without general–purpose DO
D The other input/output interface specifications and
outer shape of the printed circuit board are the
same as those of the A20B–8001–0721 printed
circuit board.
To connector CPD1(IN) shown below, supply the power required for the
operator’s panel and general–purpose DI.
To facilitate power
distribution, the power applied to CPD1(IN) is directly output to
CPD1(OUT). Use CPD1(OUT) if power distribution is required.
(Connector table)
CPD1(IN)
24 V power
supply
CPD1(OUT)
24 V power
supply
Connector recommended for use on the cable side: A02B–0120–K324
(The following connector housing and case are provided:)
(Housing: 1–178288–3 (AMP Japan))
(Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan))
NOTE
1 Power connectors CPD1(IN) and CPD1(OUT) have the
same specification. On the actual printed circuit board, (IN)
and (OUT) are not distinguished from each other.
2 During operation, never turn off the +24 V power supply to
the connector. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is
issued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before
the power to the CNC is turned on, and that the +24 V supply
is removed either when or after the power to the CNC is
turned off.
348
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.5
Emergency Stop Signal
Connection
The emergency stop switch is not wired when the unit leaves the factory.
Perform wiring suitable for the system.
For an emergency stop signal, a common pin and emergency stop signal
pin are available with connectors CN1 and CM58 on the machine
operator’s panel. So, the wiring described below is recommended.
(1) When the emergency stop switch on the machine is not used, and only
the emergency stop switch on the operator’s panel is used
Connect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 2 and 3 of
CN1.
Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable side
Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
(2) When the emergency stop switch on the machine and that on the
operator’s panel are used
Connect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 1 and 3 of CN1
and to pins A9 and B16 of CM58.
Machine operator’s panel
Machine
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable side
Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side
HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
349
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(3) When an emergency stop signal is output to other I/O
Other I/O
Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Receiver
NOTE
In the examples (1) and (2) above, an emergency stop
signal is applied to the DI address (Xm+2.4) tied to the 24V
common signal. So, allocate DI addresses as described in
Section 10.12.12. For details of the wiring used to apply an
emergency stop signal to a DI address other than Xm+2.4,
see Sections 10.12.6 and 10.12.12. In the example of (3),
Xm+2.4 can be used as a general–purpose DI address.
10.12.6
General–purpose DI
Signal Connection
The machine operator’s panel has 24 general–purpose DI points. The
interface is as follows:
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side:
HIF3BA–34D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
350
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
351
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Pin number
Address number
Bit number
352
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
NOTE
1 Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 are DI points that
allows common selection. This means that by connecting
the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin
(CM58–B02) to +24 V, the DI signal whose logic is inverted
can be applied. In this case, however, if the cable is struck
by lightning, it has the effect of turning on the DI signal. For
safety reasons, therefore, the connection of the DICOM1
and DICOM3 pins to 0 V is recommended whenever
possible.
2 From the viewpoint of safety, an emergency stop signal
needs to assigned to the corresponding bit of addresses
Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tied to the common signal. Determine
the location of an emergency stop signal as described in
Section 10.12.12.
3 The unused DI points of addresses Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tied
to the common signal are used as inputs tied to 0. The
unused DI points of addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and
Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 that allow common selection are input
signals tied to 0 when the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and
DICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connected to 0 V; the unused
DI points are input signals tied to 1 when the DICOM1 pin
(CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connected
to +24 V. When the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3
pin (CM58–B02) are open, the logic of the unused DI points
at addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 is
undefined.
353
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.7
General–purpose DO
Signal Connection
Pin number
(Note)
Pin number
Bit number
+24 V power
supply
Relay
Cable recommended for use on the CE59 cable side: HIF3BA–20D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
With the small machine operator’s panel, all of the eight
general–purpose DO points indicated above can be used.
With the standard–size machine operator’s panel, only the
five general–purpose DO points enclosed in the bold
rectangle can be used.
354
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.8
See Section 10.4.15.
Manual Pulse
Generator Connection
10.12.9
Relay Terminal
Connection
A relay terminal is used to relay signals on the machine operator’s panel.
Relayed signals are not output to the CNC via I/O Link. An example of
using a relay terminal to relay a power ON/OFF control signal is provided
here.
Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board
Input unit
ON switch
OFF switch
Connector recommended for use on the CN2 cable side:
Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side:
Housing: HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
355
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.12.10
Keyboard Addresses
B–63003EN/04
(Small machine operator’s panel)
The relationship of the keyboard key switches and LED I/O addresses is
as follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTE
T series: 42 keys
M series: 46 keys
On the machine operator’s panel of the T series, the keys
enclosed in the bold rectangles are not available.
356
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)
The relationship between the keyboard key switches and LED I/O
addresses is as follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTE
53 keys for both the T series and M series
357
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.11
Other Signal
Addresses
DI address
Signal
Name
Xm+0.0
*OVA
Override signal
(Note)
Xm+0.1
*OVB
Xm+0.2
*OVC
Xm+0.3
*OVD
Xm+0.4
*OVE
Xm+0.5
KEY
Program protect signal
NOTE
Override signal (*OVA to *OVE)
Gray codes are output according to the table below.
%
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
*OVA
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
*OVB
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*OVC
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
*OVD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*OVE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
358
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.12
Allocation
The I/O address maps of the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel are
as follows:
DI space map
Xm
DO space map
Override, etc.
Xm+1
Yn
Yn+1
General–purpose
DI signals
Xm+2
Yn+2
Xm+3
Yn+3
Xm+4
Yn+4
Xm+5
Yn+5
Xm+6
Yn+6
Xm+7
Keyboard
(key switch)
Xm+8
Keyboard (LED)
General–purpose
DO signals
Yn+7
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (first MPG)
Xm+13 (second MPG)
MPG
Xm+14 (third MPG)
Xm+15
Not used
With the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel, basically allocate a
group of 16 bytes as a DI area, and allocate a group of 8 bytes as a DO area.
The reason for this is described below. The MPG interface (MPG counter)
uses Xm+12 through Xm+14 of the DI space. These addresses are fixed.
Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated before the MPG interfaces can
be used. So, when using MPG interfaces with the i series, allocate a group
of 16 bytes as a DI area. The value of an MPG counter is directly
processed by the CNC, so the ladder must not use this area.
When MPG interfaces are not used, the DI area may be allocated to other
I/O groups.
359
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Basically, arbitrary I/O addresses can be allocated on the distribution I/O
machine operator’s panel. For connection with the fixed addresses
directly monitored by the CNC, however, DI addresses must be allocated
as indicated below.
Fixed addresses directly monitored by the CNC (with FS21i/210i)
X0004
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
–MIT2
SKIP5
+MIT2
SKIP4
–MIT1
SKIP3
+MIT1
SKIP2
ZAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
ZAE
SKIP2
YAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
*ESP
X0009
*DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row is for the T series, while the lower row is for the M series.
Example)
When 16 bytes, starting from X0006, are allocated as DI addresses
X0006
Override, etc.
² Fixed signal of *DECn#2
X0007
General–purpose
² Fixed signal of *ESP
input signals
X0008
² Fixed signal of *DECn#1
X0009
X0010
X0012
X0013
Keyboard
(key switch input
signals)
X0014
X0015
X0016
X0017
X0018 (first MPG)
X0019 (second MPG)
MPG
X0020 (third MPG)
X0021
Not used
360
When addresses starting
from X0006 are allocated, the
fixed signals of *DECn#1 and
DECn#2 can be used, and
the fixed signal of *ESP can
be used after allocation at an
address tied to the 24 V common signal.
However, fixed signals such
as SKIP cannot be used. Allocate addresses according
to this example when employing the wiring shown in Section 10.12.5.
(No fixed signal can be allocated to the key switch input
section.)
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.13
Specifications
Setting environment
Ambient temperature Operation:
0°C to 58°C
Storage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity
Normal condition: 75% (relative humidity)
Short term (no more than one month): 95% (relative
humidity)
Vibration
Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere
Normal machining factory environment (For use in an
environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,
organic solutions, and so forth, special consideration is
required.)
Ordering information
Name
Ordering code
Remarks
Distribution
A02B–0236–C141#TBS
I/O machine
A02B–0236–C141#TBR
operator’s
panel
A02B–0236–C141#MBS
Small, used for T, symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C141#MBR
Small, used for M, English key sheet
Distribution
A02B–0236–C140#TBS
I/O machine
operator’s
A02B–0236–C140#TBR
panel
Fuse
(accessory)
Small, used for T, English key sheet
Small, used for M, symbol key sheet
Standard–size, used for T,
symbol key sheet
Standard–size, used for T,
English key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBS
Standard–size, used for M,
symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBR
Standard–size, used for M,
English key shee
A03B–0815–K001
1A
361
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Machine operator’s
panel specifications
B–63003EN/04
Item
Specifications
Number
general–purpose
points
Remarks
of 24 points
DI
Number
general–purpose
points
24 V input
of Small machine operator’s 24 V output
DO panel:
8 points
Standard–size
machine
operator’s panel: 5 points
Key switch
Small machine operator’s Sheet key type.
panel:
42 keys (for T)
Matrix DI.
46 keys (for M)
Standad–size
machine
operator’s panel: 53 keys
(common to T and M)
LED
Red
Attached to
switches.
Matrix DO.
Override rotary switch
5 bits
Gray code output
all
key
Emergency stop switch 1 bit
Program protect key
1 bit
MPG interface
3 units maximum
Interface with CNC
FANUC I/O Link connection Up to 16 units as CNC
slaves. Expandable up
to 1024/1024 points.
Manual
generator
Usable only with i series
CNCs
pulse 1 unit
Standard–size machine
operator’s panel only
Power supply capacity
Power supply voltage
Power supply capacity
Remarks
24 VDC "10% is fed from the power
connector CPD1; "10% includes
momentary variations and ripples.
0.4A
All DI signal
consumption
is included.
362
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
General–purpose DI
signal specifications
Contact capacity
30 VDC. 16 mA or more
Leakage current between 1 mA or less (26.4 V)
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between 2 V or less (including voltage drop in the cable)
contacts when closed
Delay
General–purpose DO
signal specifications
Maximum
when ON
The receiver delay is 2 ms (maximum). In addition,
[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and machine
operator’s panel (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan
period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.
load
current 200 mA or less including momentary variations
Saturation voltage when 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
ON
Withstand voltage
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current when OFF 20 µA or less
Delay time
The driver delay is 50 s (maximum). In addition,
[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O
module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
NOTE
The maximum current for each of the DOCOM power supply
pins for the DO signals must not exceed 0.7 A.
363
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
10.12.14
B–63003EN/04
The keyboard of the machine operator’s panel employs a matrix
configuration. If three or more keys are simultaneously entered in the
matrix DI configuration, a DI signal is erroneously entered due to an
abnormal current flow. A countermeasure for this malfunction can be
implemented using a ladder program.
Other Notes
(Protection against malfunction)
If three or more keys are entered in the matrix DI configuration, all key
inputs after the first two are invalidated. If there are no additional key
inputs after three or more invalidated key inputs, and if the total number
of inputs is two or less, all key inputs that have been performed up to that
time are valid.
364
Key switch on (“1”)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
State (f)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Key switch off (“0”)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
State (e)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
State (d)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Data line 0 (bit 0)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Data line 1 (bit 1)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Data line 2 (bit 2)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Data line 3 (bit 3)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Data line 4 (bit 4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Data line 7 (bit 7)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Data line 5 (bit 5)
State (c)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
State (b)
Data line 6 (bit 6)
State (a)
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(Ladder operation)
The following provides examples of ladder operation based on the DI
matrix of 8 (bits)
8 (common), indicated on the next page.
(1) The number of data lines where keys are entered is checked.
The OR (R1) of the data of all the addresses is found. Among the eight
bits of the R1 data, the number of bits set to 1 represents the number
of data lines where keys are entered.
1 The R1 data is compared with 00h. If a match is found, the number
of R1 data bits set to 1 is 0.
Example) State (a): R1 = (00000000) ³
The number of data lines where keys are entered is 0.
2 The R1 data is compared with the data tables below. If the R1 data
matches the data in data table 1, the number of R1 data bits set to
1 is 1. Similarly, if the R1 data matches the data in data table 2, the
number of R1 data bits set to 1 is 2.
Example) State (b) or (c): R1 = (00000100) ³
The number of data lines where keys are entered is 1.
Example) State (d) or (e): R1 = (00010100) ³
The number of lines where keys are entered is 2.
3 If the R1 data is not 00h, and does not match the data of either data
table, the number of R1 data bits set to 1 is 3 or more.
Example) State (f): R1 = (00110100) ³
The number of lines where keys are entered is 3.
Data table 1
Data table 2
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000110 00001100 00011000
00000100
00001000
00110000
01100000 11000000 10000001
00010000
00100000
00000101
00001010 00010100 00101000
01000000
10000000
01010000
10100000 01000001 10000010
00001001
00010010 00100100 01001000
10010000
00100001 01000010 10000100
(2) Decision 1
1 When there is no line where keys are entered
³ No key switch is pressed.
Example) State (a)
2 When there are two or less lines where keys are entered
³ Go to (3)
3 When there are three or more lines where keys are entered
³ Three or more keys are entered. This case is invalid.
Example) State (f)
365
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(3) When there are two or less data lines where keys are entered, whether
multiple keys are entered on a data line is checked.
The data of all addresses are subtracted from the OR (R1) to obtain
result R2. When R2 = 00h, there is no data line where multiple keys
are entered.
Example) When there is one data line where a key is entered
State (b): R2 = FCh
State (c): R2 = F8h
When there are two data lines where keys are entered
State (d): R2 = 00h
State (e): R2 = FCh
(4) Decision 2
1 When R2 = 00h
³ There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, and no
multiple keys are entered on a data line. In this case, the total
number of keys entered is 1 or 2, thus representing valid key
input.
Example) State (d)
2 When R2 0 00h
³ There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, and
multiple keys are entered on a data line. Go to (5).
(5) Decision 3
1 When there is one data line where keys are entered ³ Go to (6).
2 When there are two data lines where keys are entered
³ Three or more keys are entered, thus representing invalid key
input.
Example) State (e)
(6) The result of subtraction (R2) is added to the OR (R1). When the result
of addition is 00h, the total number of keys entered is 2.
Example) State (b): R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00h
State (c): R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh
(7) Decision 4
1 When R1 + R2 = 00h
³ There is one data line where keys are entered, and two keys are
entered on the data line. This means that the total number of
keys entered is 2, representing valid key input.
Example)
State (b)
2 R1 + R2 0 00h
³ Three or more keys are entered on a data line, thus representing
invalid key input.
Example) State (c)
(8) Only when valid key input is confirmed by decisions 1 through 4, all
DI data (Xm+4 to Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.
366
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
10.12.15
Operator’s Panel
Override rotary switch
Emergency stop switch
Key switches
(sheet keys)
The circle on each
key switch represents an LED (red).
Program protect key
Fig. 10.12.15 (a) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (T series)
367
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Fig. 10.12.15 (b) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (M series)
368
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
Program protect key
(Coordinate)
Key switches
(sheet keys)
The circle on each
key switch represents an LED (red).
Manual pulse
generator
Override rotary switch
Emergency stop button
Fig. 10.12.15 (c) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (T series)
369
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
(Coordinate)
B–63003EN/04
Fig. 10.12.15 (d) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (M series)
370
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
D Symbol indication on
machine operator’s
panel
Front view of the key
sheets
(1) M series, full keypad
(2) M series, small keypad
371
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
(3) T series, full keypad
(4) T series, small keypad
372
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
D Meanings of keys
English
indication
Symbol
indication
Meaning of key
AUTO
AUTO mode selection signal: Sets automatic
operation mode.
EDIT
EDIT mode selection signal: Sets program edit
mode.
MDI
MDI mode selection: Sets MDI mode.
JOG
JOG feed mode selection: Sets jog feed mode.
INC
JOG
Step feed mode selection: Sets step feed mode.
MPG
Manual handle feed mode selection:
manual handle feed mode.
MPG
X1
First handle selection in manual handle feed
mode: Sets manual handle feed mode, then
enables the first handle.
MPG
X2
Second handle selection in manual handle feed
mode: Sets manual handle feed mode, then
enables the second handle.
HOME
Reference position return mode selection: Sets
reference position return mode.
TEACH
Teach–in jog (teach–in handle) mode selection
signal: Sets teach–in jog (teach–in handle)
mode.
OFSET
MESUR
Offset write mode selection signal: Sets tool
offset value setting mode.
?
NC
NC alarm signal (output only): Turns on the LED
lamp on the button when an alarm is issued on
the NC.
?
MC
Machine alarm signal (output only): Turns on the
LED on the button when an alarm is issued on
the machine.
SINGL
BLOCK
Single block signal: Executes programs one by
one. This key is used to check a program.
BLOCK
DELET
Block delete (optional block skip): Skips the
execution of the blocks starting with the first
block prefixed with / and ending with the end of
block (;) when this button is pressed during
automatic operation.
373
Sets
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
English
indication
B–63003EN/04
Symbol
indication
Meaning of key
PRG
STOP
Program stop (output only): Turns on the LED on
the button when automatic operation is stopped
by M00 specified in the program.
OPT
STOP
Optional stop: Stops automatic operation after
execution of the block of a program where M01
is specified, when this button is pressed.
DRY
RUN
Dry run: Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrate
instead of a programmed feedrate when
automatic operation is performed by setting this
button to on. This function is used to check only
the movement of the tool when no workpiece is
mounted.
PRG
TEST
Machine lock: Updates only position display on
the screen without making any axis movement,
when automatic operation is performed by
setting this button to on. This function is used to
check a program.
MPG
X
Manual handle feed X–axis selection: Performs
movement along the X–axis when this button is
set to on in manual handle feed mode. (The
same operation is performed for the Y–axis,
Z–axis, C–axis, and four axes).
WORK
LIGHT
Workpiece light: Illuminates the workpiece.
MPG
INTRT
Manual handle interrupt: Adds the amount of
travel made by turning the manual handle to the
amount of travel specified in the program, when
this button is set to on in manual operation.
AXIS
INHBT
Axis movement inhibition: Inhibits movement on
a particular axis or all axes.
LOW
X1
Upper) Jog feed (step feed) override: Overrides
jog feed (or step feed).
Five–step indication
MEDL
X10
Lower) Manual handle feed magnification:
Magnification for manual handle feed.
Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.
MED
X100
etc.
+X
Manual feed axis direction selection: Performs
movement along the selected axis in the
selected direction by jog feed (or step feed) when
this button is set to on in the jog feed mode (or
step feed mode). (The same operation is
performed for –X, +Y, –Y, +Z, and so forth.)
TRVRS
Traverse: Performs jog feed at rapid traverse
rate when this button is set to on.
374
10. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63003EN/04
English
indication
Symbol
indication
Meaning of key
CYCLE
START
Cycle start: Starts automatic operation.
CYCLE
STOP
Cycle stop: Stops automatic operation.
CLNT
ON
Coolant on: Start the supply of coolant.
CLNT
OFF
Coolant off: Stops the supply of coolant.
CLNT
AUTO
Coolant automatic: Starts and stops the supply
of coolant automatically.
SPDL
100%
Spindle override 100%: Sets an override of
100% for the spindle motor speed.
SPDL
DEC
Spindle deceleration: Decelerates the spindle
motor rotation.
SPDL
INC
Spindle acceleration: Accelerates the spindle
motor rotation.
SPDL
CW
Positive spindle rotation direction: Rotates the
spindle motor in the positive direction.
SPDL
CCW
Negative spindle rotation direction: Rotates the
spindle motor in the negative direction.
SPDL
STOP
Spindle stop: Stops the spindle motor rotation.
SPDL
JOG
Manual spindle feed: Rotates the spindle motor
manually.
375
11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
11
WARNING
B–63003EN/04
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe
machine tools.
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by
closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and
spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC
controller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and
spindle motors are decelerated to a stop.
Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to be
applied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,
however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the
force of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a
brake.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving power
to the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running
under its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stop
signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindle
motor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power is
shut off.
The FANUC servo amplifier α series products are designed to satisfy the
above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to the
power supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor power
MCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to the
power supply module on and off.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software
limit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect
overtravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo
feedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit
switch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop
the machine.
Fig. 11 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signal
with this CNC controller and α series control amplifier.
376
11. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
B–63003EN/04
Emergency
stop button
Stroke end limit switch
Relay
power
+X
–X
+Y
–Y
+Z
–Z
+4
–4
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
EMG
Relay
CNC control unit
emg1
+24
*ESP
α series control amplifier
(PSM)
emg2
SVM
SPM
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External power source
L1 L2
L3
Spark killer
SK
3φ
200VAC
Coil
L1
L2
L3
Circuit breaker 1
MCC
AC reactor
Fig. 11
WARNING
To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to
the corresponding documentation as well as this manual. Design the emergency stop
sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal contact opens while the spindle motor is
rotating, the spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
377
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
12
B–63003EN/04
REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
378
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.1
GENERAL
When the remote buffer is connected to the host computer or input/output
device via serial interface, a great amount of data can be sent to CNC
consecutively at a high speed.
RS–422
interface
RS–232–C
interface
POWER
READY
FILE
PROTECT
ALARM
FILE
RESET
PROTECT
Use either the RS–232–C or RS–422 interface.
(Case of Remote Buffer)
The remote buffer enables the following operations:
D When connected to the host computer online, it performs DNC
operation with high reliability and at a high speed.
D The CNC program and parameters can be down–loaded from the host
computer.
D When connected to an input/output device, it enables DNC operation,
and various data can be down–loaded. The following input/output
devices can be connected.
- FANUC PPR
- FANUC FA Card
- FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
- FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
- FANUC Handy File
Hereafter, the device to which the remote buffer is connected is called
the host computer.
379
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
Explanations
D Interface between the
remote buffer and host
computer
- Electrical interface
The following two types of interface are prepared as standard
specifications.
D RS–232–C Interface
D RS–422 Interface
RS–233C
Interface
Serial
voltage
(start–stop)
RS–422
interface Balanced transmission serial
interface (start–stop)
Baud rate 50 to 19,200 BPS
Cable
length
50 to 86,400 BPS (*)
100m (4800BPS or less)
50m (9600BPS)
Varies according to I/O device.
Approx. 800 m (9600 BPS or
less)
50m (19,200 BPS or more)
- Software interface
The following three protocols are prepared as the communication
protocols between the remote buffer and host computer. The protocol
can be selected by a parameter according to the specifications of the
device to be connected.
Protocol
Features
Interface
Maximum
transfer rate
Protocol A Handshake method. Sending and RS–232–C 19200 BPS
receiving are repeated between two
RS–422
86400 BPS
stations.
Extended Similar to protocol A.
Enables RS–422
protocol A high–speed transfer of the NC program
to meet high–speed DNC operation.
86400 BPS
Protocol B Controls communication with control RS–232–C 19200 BPS
codes output from the remote buffer.
RS–422
86400 BPS
NOTE
(*) The average data transfer rate is lower than the maximum
transfer rate.
FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol that provides an RS–232–C
interface between the CNC and a personal computer (PC). This interface
enables the CNC and PC to exchange data with each other. The hardware
used to connect the CNC and PC is the same as that used for remote buffer
connection.
For information about the specifications and other details of FANUC
DNC2, refer to “FANUC DNC2 Description (B–61992E).”
FANUC DNC1, developed by FANUC, is a high–speed network
supporting cell–based communication.
The hardware connection and other specifications of the DNC1 function
are explained. When using DNC1, refer to the following document.
Title
FANUC DNC1 Description
380
Number
B–61782E
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.2
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS–232–C)
CNC OPTION board
Host computer (example)
JD28A [JD5L]
(PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL)
DBM–25S
1
RD
11
SD
1
FG
2
0V
12
0V
2
SD
3
DR
13
ER
3
RD
4
0V
14
0V
4
RS
5
CS
15
RS
5
CS
6
0V
16
0V
6
DR
7
CD
17
7
SG
8
0V
18
8
CD
9
19
10
(+24V) 20
The connector name
in brackets [ ] is for
when the separate
type series is used.
(+24V)
9
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
Host side
CNC side
Output
SD
SD
Input
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
0V
NOTE
1 24V power supply of the equipment made by FANUC
RS–232–C is not prepared in CNC side connector JD28A
or JD5L. Set up the power supply by the machine tool
builder if it is necessary. No.10 and No.19 (+24V) cannot be
used. Do not connect to these pins.
2 Do not connect to any pins not marked with a signal name.
381
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
Cable wiring
RD
0V
DR
0V
CS
0V
CD
0V
+24V
SD
0V
ER
0V
RS
0V
2
1
SD
2
20
3
ER
4
4
5
RS
6
8
7
CD
8
9
10
3
11
RD
12
6
13
DR
14
15
5
16
7
17
CS
SG
18
+24V
1
19
20
FG
Shield
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or
expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.
382
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.3
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS–422)
CNC OPTION–1 board
Host computer (Example)
JD6A
(PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL)
1
FG
2
21
1
RD
11
SD
3
2
*RD
12
*SD
4
3
RT
13
TT
5
4
*RT
14
*TT
6
RD
5
CS
15
RS
7
RS
6
*CS
16
*RS
8
RT
7
DM
17
TR
9
CS
8
0V
18
*TR
10
9
*DM
19
(+24V)
11
DM
10
(+24V) 20
12
TR
SD
13
TT
18
Conceptional diagram of
signal connection
24
*RD
25
*RS
26
*RT
27
*CS
28
29
*DM
30
*TR
31
34
16
19
*SD
23
33
15
17
22
32
14
(+24V) is not used.
20
SG
35
*TT
36
37
The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signal
transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those signals.
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
Host side
CNC side
Output
Input
0V
383
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
TR
TR
DM
DM
TT
TT
RT
RT
SG
SG
FG
FG
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
Actual example of
RS–422 signal wiring
B–63003EN/04
Cable wiring
RD
*RD
RT
*RT
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
0V
+24V
SD
*SD
TT
*TT
RS
*RS
TR
*TR
+24V
1
4
2
22
3
17
4
35
5
7
6
25
7
12
9
30
19
8
SD
*SD
TT
*TT
RS
*RS
TR
*TR
SG
10
11
6
12
24
13
8
14
26
15
9
16
27
17
11
18
29
19
1
20
RD
*RD
RT
*RT
CS
*CS
DM
*DM
FG
Shield
FRAME
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side
is positioned irregularly relative to the other signals. This is
to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this
connector is erroneously connected to the connector on the
other side.
384
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.4
DNC2 INTERFACE
(RS–232–C)
CNC OPTION–1 board
Host computer (Example)
JD28A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RD
0V
DR
0V
CS
0V
CD
0V
11
DBM–25S
1
SD
0V
ER
0V
RS
0V
12
13
14
15
16
2
3
4
5
6
17
7
18
8
9
19
9
10
20
10
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptional diagram
of signal connection
CNC side
SD
Output
Input
0V
Host side
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
FRAME
Connect CS to RS when CS is not used.
Connect DR to ER when DR is not used.
Always connect CD to ER.
NOTE
When an IBM PC/AT is used, the RS signal goes low in the
reception phase. In this case, connect CS on the host side
to ER on the same side.
385
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.5
DNC1 INTERFACE
12.5.1
Multipoint Connection
CNC OPTION board
JD6A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
Tap
(MR–20RMD) Male
1
TRD1(+)
11
TRD2(+)
1
TRD2(+)
2
TRD1(–)
12
TRD2(–)
2
TRD2(–)
3
13
3
4
14
4
5
15
5
6
16
6
7
17
7
8
SG
14
8
15
9
16
10
TRD1(+)
11
TRD1(–)
12
SG
17
18
19
13
20
18
9
19
10
20
Cable wiring
TDR1(+)
TDR1(–)
TDR2(+)
TDR2(–)
SG
1
10
2
11
11
1
12
2
8
7
PCR Connector
386
TRD1(+)
TRD1(–)
TRD2(+)
TRD2(–)
SG
MR Connector
(MR20 Female)
12. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63003EN/04
12.5.2
Point–to–point
Connection
CNC OPTION board
Tap
JD6A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
(MR–20RMD) Male
1
RD
11
SD
1
SD
2
:RD
12
:SD
2
:SD
3
RT
13
3
TR
4
:RT
14
TT
:TT
4
:TR
5
CS
15
RS
5
RS
6
:CS
16
:RS
6
:RS
7
DM
17
TR
7
SG
8
SG
18
:TR
9
:DM
19
10
8
TT
9
:TT
10
RD
11
:RD
12
DM
13
:DM
14
CS
15
:CS
16
17
18
RT
19
:RT
20
20
Cable wiring
SD
:SD
RD
:RD
11
1
12
2
1
10
2
13
11
14
9
3
18
4
19
15
5
16
5
6
14
6
15
7
12
9
13
17
3
18
4
8
7
8
TT
:TT
RT
:RT
RS
:RS
CS
:CS
DM
:DM
TR
:TR
SG
Shielded twisted cable
of 0.3 mm2 or more
387
SD
:SD
RD
:RD
TT
:TT
RT
:RT
RS
:RS
CS
:CS
DM
:DM
TR
:TR
SG
MR20 (female)
(Honda Tsushin)
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
13
B–63003EN/04
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
388
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63003EN/04
13.1
OVERVIEW
13.2
CAUTIONS
The high–speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high–speed transfer of
large amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC or
compatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via a
high–speed optical fiber.
On the CNC, the HSSB interface board is installed in a minislot. On the
personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed.
The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer or
FANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user is
required to procure and maintain the personal computer.
To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 95 or Windows NT must have
been installed on the personal computer.
FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.
The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals
may not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written
permission of FANUC.
NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.
2 Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of
the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective
companies.
389
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63003EN/04
13.3
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
PC/AT compatible personal computer
HSSB interface board on the CNC
High–speed
serial bus
Optical fiber cable
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to
an i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
390
Personal computer interface board
(Installed in an ISA slot)
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63003EN/04
13.4
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
SPECIFICATION
CAUTION
1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure
and maintain the personal computer.
2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the
operation of users’ personal computers, regardless of
whether the operations are normal or abnormal.
(1) The personal computer interface board complies with the ISA
standard. It can be used in the PC/AT and compatibles. (The CPU of
the personal computer must be a 486 or better.
(2) The following address space is used to control the high–speed serial
bus. This space cannot be used by other functions or extension boards.
D 16 bytes of ISA I/O space corresponding to the addresses specified
with the setting switch, as explained in Section 13.6
(3) The connections between the selected personal computer and CNC
controller should be tested before they are used for actual production.
(4) The personal computer interface boards require as below.
13.5
INSTALLATION
ENVIRONMENT
1ch
+5V, 1A
2ch
+5V, 1.5A
(1) Personal computer interface boards
The same environmental conditions as those for the installation of the
personal computer must be satisfied.
(2) CNC interface board
The same environmental conditions as those described earlier for the
installation of the CNC control unit must be satisfied.
391
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63003EN/04
13.6
PROCEDURE FOR
INSTALLING
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
INTERFACE BOARDS
WARNING
Before starting to mount or remove a personal computer
interface board, switch off the personal computer and its
peripheral devices, and disconnect their power supply
cables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electric
shock.
(1) Set the I/O addresses before installing the board. Set I/O base
addresses which do not overlap the I/O address areas exclusively used
by the personal computer and ISA expansion board. (See the figure
below.)
When using multiple personal computer interface boards, set the I/O
base addresses so that those addresses do not overlap each other.
(2) Remove the blank panel from the expansion slot of the personal
computer.
(3) Insert the interface board. Ensure that it has been completely inserted
into the ISA connector.
(4) Fix the metal brackets with screws.
CAUTION
Do NOT touch the edge terminals (the contacts that engage
with a mating connector) of the interface board.
Setting for general edition 01A
Bit
b1 b2 b3 b4
Set value
(binary)
0
Hexadecimal
value
0
1
L
(0 to Fh)
0
M
N
Example
Binary–to–hexadecimal
conversion
2
b1234
The I/O base address of the
interface board is:
1
0
LMN 0 h *
(Side view)
(Top view)
Factory–set as follows:
A15
Personal computer
interface board 2
A04
L
M
L =0
M =2
N =8
N
Setting for general edition 02A and later
* If the base address is LMN0h, the interface board can use LMN0h to LMNFh.
I/O base address setting
(for personal computer interface board type 2 (A20B–8100–0100))
392
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63003EN/04
Personal computer
interface boards
New type 2
A20B–8001–0583
(When viewed from
the top of the board)
The I/O base address of the
interface board is LMN0h(*1).
The factory settings are as follows:
A20B–8001–0583
L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)
Channel A
L
M
N
A20B–8001–0582
L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)
L, M, N = 0, 2, 9 for channel B
(COP7B)
A20B–8001–0582
Channel A
Channel B
*1 When the base address is LMN0h, LMN0h to LMNFh are used.
I/O base address setting
(for personal computer interface board of new type 2 (A20–B–8100–0582, –0583))
393
13. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
13.7
HANDLING
PRECAUTIONS
B–63003EN/04
(1) Personal computer interface board
(A) Electrostatic interference
The personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti–static
bag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it in
the anti–static bag. Before removing the interface board from the
anti–static bag, ground your body.
(B) Protection of card edge terminals
When handling the personal computer interface board, do NOT
touch its card edge terminals (the gold–plated contacts which
engage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch any
card edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethyl
alcohol–dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use any
organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(2) Optical connector and fiber cable
See Appendix D.
13.8
RECOMMENDED
CABLES
CNC interface card
Optical fiber cable
COP7
Personal computer
interface card
COP7
Compatible cables (optical fiber cables, used for interconnections)
A66L–6001–0026#L
For an explanation of the cable length and other related information, see
Appendix D.
NOTE
An optical fiber cable of up to 100 m can be used only when
the NC side interface board A02B–0236–J202 (printed
circuit board drawing number: A20B–8001–0641) is used
with
the
personal
computer
interface
board
(A20B–8001–0582 or –0583).
394
14. CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
B–63003EN/04
14
CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
The i Series CNC can be connected to the following networks. For an
explanation of how to make the connection, refer to the manuals listed
below:
Manual title
Manual code
FANUC I/O Link–II Connection Manual
B–62714EN
FANUC Data Server Operator’s Manual
B–62694EN
FANUC Ethernet Board Operator’s Manual
B–63354EN
FANUC Profibus–DP Board Operator’s Manual
B–62924EN
FANUC DeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual
B–63404EN
395
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
15
B–63003EN/04
CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
396
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
15.1
OVERALL
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
160is/180is/210is
control unit
24V–IN (CP1A)
24V–OUT (CP1B)
SPDL&POS (JA41)
I/O LINK (JD1A)
A–OUT&HDI (JA40)
Connection of the connectors on the left is common to the
Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i
R232–1 (JD36A)
R232–2 (JD36B)
SV–CHK (CA54)
MDI (CA55)
RS–232C I/O device
PC (during remote debugging)
PC side R232 (JD40)
ETHERNET (CD38)
HUB
Ethernet lead
Backup unit
BACKUP POWER–IN
(CN9)
397
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
15.2
INSTALLATION
15.2.1
Names of Control Unit
Parts and Connector
Layout
CNC control unit (rear view)
(This figure shows basic parts without option slots.)
* The depth of the unit varies according to the number of option slots.
* For details on the external dimensions of the unit, refer to Appendix
A “External Dimensions of Units, Figure U4.”
15.2.2
Installation
Environment
Conditions of Control
Unit
For details on the installation environment conditions, refer to the
environment conditions of the displayed–integrated type control unit
with PC functions.
398
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
15.3
CONNECTING TO
PERIPHERAL
DEVICES
15.3.1
Backup Unit
CNC
Backup unit
CN9
CN9
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
A
B
A
B
1
+24V
+24V
1
+24V
+24V
2
BU1
BU2
2
BU1
BU2
3
BU9
BU10
3
BU9
BU10
4
BU11
BU12
4
BU11
BU12
5
BU3
BU4
5
BU3
BU4
6
BU5
BU6
6
BU5
BU6
7
BU7
BU8
7
BU7
BU8
8
GND
VCC
8
GND
VCC
9
GND
VCC
9
GND
VCC
10
GND
VCC
10
GND
VCC
CNC
CN9
+24V
+24V
BU1
BU2
BU9
BU10
BU11
BU12
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU6
BU7
BU8
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
Japan Aviatronics Industries
LY10–DC20 (housing)
LY10–C2–3–10000(contact)
A02B–0236–K303
Backup
CN9
A1
A1
B1
B1
A2
A2
B2
B2
A3
A3
B3
B3
A4
A4
B4
B4
A5
A5
B5
B5
A6
A6
B6
B6
A7
A7
B7
B7
A8
A8
B8
B8
A9
A9
B9
B9
A10
A10
B10
B10
Shield
+24V
+24V
Recommended cable specifications:
A02B–0269–K801 (50cm)
Recommended wire material specifications:
A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWGX10 pair)
BU1
BU2
BU9
BU10
BU11
BU12
Note) Keep the cable lead to within 50 cm.
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU6
BU7
BU8
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
Ground plate
399
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
(i) Backup unit external dimensions
Connector
150
12
104
64
28
139
58
4–φ4.8
1.0
4–M4
64
Drawing of the
hole for setting
139
400
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
(ii)Installation of backup unit
Install the backup unit either on the rear side of the MDI unit or in the
pendant box housed in the CNC body.
The backup unit uses parts that have a fixed service life. So, decide on
an installation position where the backup unit can be easily replaced.
(Example of installation on rear side of MDI unit)
Clamp fixture
Clamp
CNC body
!
!
""
"
#
"
Connector
Backup unit
Clamp
NOTE
1 As the fitting on the connector of the backup unit cable is a
simple lock type, be sure to clamp near to the connector as
shown in the figure to prevent the connector from being
tugged by the cable’s weight.
2 M4 screw holes are drilled on the rear of the MDI unit for
installation.
401
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
15.3.2
Ethernet (10Base–T)
CNC
CD38
HUB
1
TX+
1
2
TX-
2
TX-
3
RX+
3
RX+
4
4
5
6
5
RX-
6
7
7
8
8
CD38
TX+
TXRX+
RX–
TX+
RX-
HUB
1
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
TX+
Control unit
TXRX+
RX–
Shield
Twisted pair
cable
Recommended connector:
CL222–1328–1328 (for STP cable)
(Hirose Electronics Co., Ltd.) or equivalent part
Recommended wire material specifications:
DTS5087 (Furukawa Electric Industries)
F–4PFWMF (Shiroboshi Electric Co., Ltd.)
Clamp fixture
NOTE
1 Shield or clamp the Ethernet cable in the same way as other
cables that are led into the CNC. For details on how to clamp
the cable, refer to the top right figure.
2 The recommended cable cannot be used on moving parts.
3 The connector pin Nos. are as follows.
402
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
1
PCB side
15.3.3
8
Cable side
This connector (JD40) is for the RS–232C serial port on the personal
computer. Use this port for remote debugging when developing
application software.
Serial Port
CNC
Relay connector (example 1)
D–SUB 25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
JD40
PCR–E20MD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RD
0V
Reserve
0V
CS
Reserve
CD
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SD
0V
Reserve
0V
RS
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Shield
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Relay connector (example 2)
D–SUB 9
1
2
3
4
5
CD
RD
SD
ER
SG
6
7
8
9
DR
RS
CS
RI
ER
RI
(i) Wiring (example 1: when converting to D–SUB 25–pin)
Relay connector
D–SUB 25 (example 1)
JD40
SD
RD
RS
CS
11
02
01
03
15
04
05
05
06
20
CD
0V
07
08
22
02,12
04,14
07
Shield
Ground plate
01
SD
RD
Recommended wire material specifications:
A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWGX10 pair)
RS
CS
JD40 recommend cable connector
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
F130–20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J0202–G/E (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (Japan Morex)
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
FG
GND
403
15. CONNECTING TO THE INTEGRATED TYPE
Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63003EN/04
(ii)Wiring (example 2: when converting to D–SUB 9–pin)
PC serial port
D–SUB 9 (example 2)
JD40
SD
11
3
SD
RD
01
2
RD
RS 15
CS 05
7
RS
8
CS
6
DR
4
ER
1
CD
9
RI
5
SG
CD
0V
07
02,12
04,14
Shield
Ground plate
(iii) Wiring (example 3: when connecting to a PC for remote debugging)
Relay connector
D–SUB 9
(example 3)
JD40
SD
RD
RS
CS
11
3
01
2
15
7
05
8
6
4
CD
07
1
9
0V
02,12 ,
04,14
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
Before you make the cable, check the pin layout of the
connector on the PC when the control unit is connected to
a PC for use.
404
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
A
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted Type Panel)
Outline drawing title
Series 16i/18i/21i/20i control unit
Series 160i/180i/210i control unit
Specification drawing number
7.2″ STN
monochrome LCD
panel
Figure
A02B–0236–B531, B532, B533, B538
A02B–0238–B531, B532, B533, B538
A02B–0247–B531, B532, B535, B536
Fig. U1
8.4″ TFT color LCD A02B–0236–B501, B502, B503, B508
panel
A02B–0238–B501, B502, B503, B508
A02B–0247–B501, B502, B505, B506
A02B–0277–B501, B502, B505, B506
Fig. U2
9.5″ STN
monochrome LCD
panel
A02B–0236–B541, B542, B543, B548
A02B–0238–B541, B542, B543, B548
A02B–0247–B541, B542, B545, B546
Fig. U3
10.4″ TFT color
LCD panel
A02B–0236–B611, B612, B613, B618
B621, B622, B623, B628
A02B–0238–B611, B612, B613, B618
B621, B622, B623, B628
A02B–0247–B611, B612, B615, B615
B621, B622, B625, B625
Fig. U4
10.4″ TFT color
LCD panel
A02B–0236–B751, B752, B753, B758
B761, B762, B763, B768
B771, B772, B773, B778
A02B–0238–B751, B752, B753, B758
B761, B762, B763, B768
B771, B772, B773, B778
A02B–0247–B751, B752, B755, B756
B761, B762, B765, B766
B771, B772, B775, B776
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a Stand–alone Type Unit)
Series 16i/18i/21i and Series 160i/180i/210i control units A02B–0265–B501, B503,
A02B–0266–B501, B503
A02B–0267–B501
Fig. U6
10.4″/9.5″ LCD unit
A02B–0265–C071, C061
Fig. U7
7.2″ LCD/MDI unit
A02B–0166–C261#TR, R, TS, S
Fig. U8
7.2″ monochrome LCD unit
A02B–0166–C251
Fig. U9
MDI unit (for 7.2″ LCD)
A02B–0166–C210#TR, TS, R, S
Fig. U10
Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit
A02B–0166–C271#TR, TS, R, S
Fig. U11
Intelligent terminal (without ISA expansion)
A13B–0178–B025, B026, B027
A13B–0178–H040
Fig. U12
Intelligent terminal (with ISA expansion)
407
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
(Outline drawings of other units)
Stand–alone type small For 7.2″/8.4″ panel
MDI unit
A02B–0236–C120#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
Fig. U13
Stand–alone
type For 7.2″/8.4″ panel
standard MDI unit
A02B–0236–C121#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
Fig. U14
Stand–alone
standard
MDI
(horizontal type)
type For 9.5″/10.4″ LCD panel
unit
A02B–0236–C125#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
Fig. U15
Stand–alone
standard
MDI
(vertical type)
type For 9.5″/10.4″ LCD panel
unit
A02B–0236–C126#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
A02B–0236–C127#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS
Fig. U16
A02B–0236–C130#EC, JC,
A02B–0234–C120#EC, JC
Fig. U17 (a)
Typewriter–style keyboard (for debugging purposes)
A86L–0001– 0210, 0211
Fig. U18
Mouse (for debugging purposes)
A86L–0001– 0212
Fig. U19
Floppy disk unit (for debugging purposes)
A02B–0207–C006
Fig. U20
FA typewriter–style keyboard
FA typewriter–style keyboard
(with hard disk + personal computer interface connection unit
+ ISA expansion board)
Fig. U17 (b)
HSSB interface board type 2 on the personal computer side A02B–8100–0100
Fig. U21 (a)
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personal computer A02B–8001–0583
side
Fig. U21 (b)
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personal computer A02B–8001–0582
side
Position coder
4000 rpm
A86L–0027– 0001#102
6000 rpm
A86L–0027– 0001#002
10000 rpm
A860–0309– T302
Fig. U22 (b)
Manual pulse generator
A860–0202– T001
Fig. U23
Pendant manual pulse generator
A860–0202– T004 to T015
Fig. U24
Separate detector interface unit
A02B–0236–C203, C204
Fig. U25
Battery case for separate detector interface unit (ABS)
A06B–6050–K060
Fig. U26
Tap unit for DNC1
A13B–0156–C100
Fig. U27
Terminating resistance unit for DNC1
A13B–0156–C200
Fig. U28
CNC battery unit for external installation
A02B–0236–C281
Fig. U29
Punch
type)
panel (narrow 1 m
A02B–0236–C191
Fig. U30
2m
A02B–0236–C192
5m
A02B–0236–C193
panel (narrow 1 m
A02B–0120–C191
2m
A02B–0120–C192
5m
A02B–0120–C193
α position coder
Punch
type)
Fig. U22 (a)
Fig. U31
Distribution I/O small machine operator’s panel
A02B–0236–C141#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U32
Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel
A02B–0236–C140#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U33
408
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
61–key MDI unit
(vertical type)
For use with the FS16i/18i/21i. Can A02B–0261–C161#MCR, #MCS
be used as either the stand–alone or A02B–0261–C163#MCR, #MCS
LCD–mounted type.
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i.
Can be used as either the 10.4”
LCD–separated or LCD–mounted
type.
Fig. U34
61–key MDI unit
(horizontal type)
For use with the FS16i/18i/21i. Can A02B–0261–C162#MCR, #MCS
be used as either the stand–alone or A02B–0261–C164#MCR, #MCS
LCD–mounted type.
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i.
Can be used as the 10.4”
LCD–separated type only.
Fig. U35
61–key MDI unit
(vertical type)
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i. A02B–0261–C165#MCR, #MCS
Can be used as either the 12.1”
LCD–separated or LCD–mounted
type.
Fig. U36
61–key MDI unit
(horizontal type)
For use with the FS160i/180i/210i. A02B–0261–C166#MCR, #MCS
Can be used as the 12.1”
LCD–separated type only.
Fig. U37
Blank panel
Supplied with the 61–key MDI unit
(A02B–0261–C165 and C166).
Fig. U38
Distributed I/O machine operator’s panel (290 mm wide)
A02B–0236–C150#TBR, #MBR#TBS, #MBS Fig. U39
409
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
With 2 option slots
Number of
option slots
Depth
(D) (mm)
2
3
110
125
4
170
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
With no option slot
244
Mounting
hole diagram
184
5
190
200
Fig. U1 External dimensions of CNC control unit with 7.2″ LCD
410
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
With 2 option slots
Number of
option slots
Depth
(D) (mm)
2
3
110
125
4
170
Mounting
hole diagram
244
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
With no option slot
184
5
190
200
Fig. U2 External dimensions of CNC control unit with 8.4″ LCD
411
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
With 2 option slots
Number of
option slots
Depth
(D) (mm)
2
3
110
125
4
170
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
With no option slot
274
Mounting
hole diagram
204
5
210
220
Fig. U3 External dimensions of CNC control unit with 9.5″ LCD
412
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
With 2 option slots
Number of
option slots
Depth
(D) (mm)
2
3
110
125
4
170
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
With no option slot
274
Mounting
hole diagram
204
5
210
220
Fig. U4 External dimensions of CNC control unit with 10.4″ LCD
413
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
172 (for 3–slot type)
60 (for 1–slot type)
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 2
Memory card
Weight: For 1–slot type, 0.7 kg
For 3–slot type, 1.9 kg
For both types, the stated weight does
not include printed–circuit boards inserted in the slots.
Fig. U6 i Series Control Unit with Stand–alone Type LCD Unit
414
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
280
5
5
210
220
5
5
290
4–f4
4–M3
Mounting hole layout diagram
(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metal
on the rear surface.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U7 10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
415
(Mounting hole layout diagram)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Grounding
stud (M4)
Grounding
stud (M4)
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 3.9 kg
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U8 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit Outline Drawing
416
Grounding stud (M4)
Mounting hole layout diagram
Panel cut pattern layout drawing
Soft-key connector
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 1.6 kg
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U9 7.2″ Monochrome LCD Unit Outline Drawing
417
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Grounding stud (M4)
(Mounting hole
layout diagram)
Grounding stud (M4)
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 1.3 kg
Fig. U10 MDI Unit (for 7.2″ LCD)
418
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Paint color: For case, Munsell code 5GY3.5/0.5, medium gloss
For panel, Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Weight: 7 kg
Fig. U11 Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit
419
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
280
5
5
210
5
5
B–63003EN/04
4–f4
4–M3
Mounting hole layout diagram
(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metal on the rear surface.
The dashed lines in the drawing indicate the maximum outline if options are added to the
intelligent terminal.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U12 Intelligent Terminal
420
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
130
5
5
190
5
5
4–f4
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of
the outside edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U13 External dimensions of stand–alone type small–size MDI unit
421
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within
8 mm of the outside
edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U14 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit
422
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within
8 mm of the outside
edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U15 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (horizontal type)
423
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within
8 mm of the outside
edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U16 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (vertical type)
424
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Mounting hole diagram
274
B–63003EN/04
204
5
5
210
5
M4 stud
280
5
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within
8 mm of the outside
edge is left unpainted.
Fig. U17 (a) External dimensions of FA full keyboard
425
4–f4
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
D The personal computer interface connection unit and ISA expansion unit are installed on the back of
the separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard when shipped.
D For panel cutting information, see the panel cut drawing of the separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard.
[Unit: mm]
D Dependent on the ISA board
used and cable connected
*
*
D The separate MDI unit or FA full keyboard with a personal computer interface connection unit and
ISA expansion unit installed can be mounted only under the main body of the CNC.
Main body of CNC
Hard disk unit
+
Personal computer interface
connection unit
+
ISA expansion unit
Separate MDI unit or
FA full keyboard
Fig. U17 (b) FA full keyboard
(with hard disk + personal computer interface connection unit + ISA expansion unit)
426
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U18 (a) External dimensions of 101–type full keyboard (English)
Specification No.: A86L–0001–0210
NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be
used at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C.
Fig. U18 (b) External dimensions of 106–type full keyboard (Japanese)
Specification No.: A86L–0001–0211
NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be
used at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C.
427
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
66±2
1800± 190
13±1
25+1.5
1.5±1
41.5± 2
104±2
Unit : mm
Fig. U19 External dimensions of mouse
Specification No.: A86L–0001–0212
NOTE
This mouse is not dust–proof. It should be used for program development only. It can be used
at temperatures of between 0 and 40°C. The mouse is fitted with a 1.8–m cable.
428
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
140
134
4–M3
64
(HOLE)
5
70
4–φ3.6
104
140
150
FDD
ACRYLIC
WINDOW
145
5
1.6
5
70
5
Unit: mm
80
Mounting direction
When using the floppy disk unit attached to the machine, mount the floppy disk unit in one of the following directions:
Fig. U20 Floppy disk unit
429
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U21 (a) External dimensions of high–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (for PC)
Specification No.: A20B–8100–0100
–0582
–0583
Weight: 0.2 kg
Fig. U21 (b) High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC)
Specification No.: A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)
430
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
98
30
16
14.3+0
–0.11
1.15+0.14
–0
68
–0.009
2
50 –0.025
15–0.006
–0.017
31
35
+0.15
72
52
20
2
4 f5.4
5 +0012
–0
Key position
+0.05
3 –0
MS3102A20–29P
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:
(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 × 10–3 kg⋅cm⋅sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 g⋅cm or less
(3) Allowable input axis load
Radial load
j56
j68
Thrust load
Operating
10 kg or less
5 kg or less
Idle
20 kg or less
10 kg or less
Driving the timing belt with a pulley directly attached to the
position coder shaft may produce an axis load greater than
the allowed maximum.
(4) Weight: Approx. 1 kg (without the flange)
Fig. U22 (a) External dimensions of position coder
Specification No.: A86L–0027–0001#102 (Max. 4000 rpm)
A86L–0027–0001#002 (Max. 6000 rpm)
431
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U22 (b) α position coder
Specification No.: A860–0309–T302 (10000 rpm maximum)
432
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
8.35
M4X8.0
30.0
50.0
f80.0
f55.0
60.0
PULSE GENERATOR
11.0
On the f72 circumference
FANUC LTD
0V
5V
A
120.0°
B
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U23 External dimensions of manual pulse generator
Specification No.: A860–0202–T001
433
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
A860–0202–T004∼T009
38.0
25
90
39.0
100.0
140
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
A860–0202–T010∼T015
38.0
25
90
39.0
100.0
140
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U24 External dimensions of pendant–type manual pulse generator
Specification No.: A860–0202–T004 to TT015
434
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
JA4A
JF104
JF103
JF102
JF101
CP11
COP10B COP10A
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U25 External dimensions of separate detector interface unit
435
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Negative polarity indication
103
4–M4 counter
sinking
Positive polarity indication
93
103
Plus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
Minus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
FANUC
4–f4.3 mounting hole
40
13.2
106.3
92.2
14.1
Arrow view A
78
78
Note) The battery is not included.
A
Fig. U26 External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate detector
Specification No.: A06B–6050–K060
436
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
25
5
50
25
Á
Á
Á
Á ÁÁ
5
1
2
3
100
120
5
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Á Á
Á
32.5
35
Fig. U27 External dimensions of tap
39.3
16.0
47.0
65
ÁÁ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
Fig. U28 External dimensions of terminal resistance unit
437
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Main unit
Cover
103
115
M4 tap × 4
70
81
93
5
13.5
Mounting panel hole drilling
47
Mounting hole (countersink)
145
The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.
Fig. U29 External dimensions of external CNC battery unit
438
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Mounting hole
diagram
At the rear of the metal
panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
Fig. U30 External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type)
439
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel
sheet metal on the rear surface.
100
115
The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.
20
2–M3
Fig. U31 Punch Panel (Narrow Type)
Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)
440
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
This metal plate can be removed.
Protection grounding stud (M4, back side)
Panel cutting drawing
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U32 Distribution I/O small machine operator’s panel
441
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
This metal plate can be removed.
Protection grounding stud (M4, back side)
Panel cutting drawing
B–63003EN/04
Fig. U33 Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel
442
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Up
Mounting hole diagram
The back of the metal plate is masked, 8 mm wide along the
outside edge, to prevent painting.
B–63003EN/04
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U34 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)
443
B–63003EN/04
Up
Mounting hole diagram
The back of the metal plate is masked, 8 mm wide along the
outside edge, to prevent painting.
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 1.7kg
Fig. U35 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
444
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Connector panel
Up
The back of the metal plate is masked, 8 mm wide along the
outside edge, to prevent painting.
Blank panel
An outline drawing of the blank panel is given in Fig. U38.
B–63003EN/04
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U36 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)
445
Connector panel
Up
Blank panel
An outline drawing of the blank panel is given in Fig. U38.
The back of the metal plate is masked, 8 mm wide along the
outside edge, to prevent painting.
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Protective
grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U37 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
446
The back of the blank panel is masked,
with a diameter of 10.
The hatched portion is an opening of the
connector panel.
B–63003EN/04
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Fig. U38 Blank panel
447
Protective grounding stud (M4) (Back side)
This plate is removable.
Color: Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Note) On the back of the plate attached to the panel, coating is masked
around the peripheral area with a width of 8 mm.
Install the unit from the outside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U39 Distributed I/O machine operator’s panel (290 mm wide)
448
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Connectors
Fig. title
Specification No.
Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type)
PCR–E20FS
Fig.C1 (a)
FI40 connector
FI40–2015S
Fig.C1 (b)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB
Fig.C2 (a)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
FI–20–CV
Fig.C2 (b)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
FCN–240C20–Y/S
Fig.C2 (c)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type)
FI–20–CV7
Fig.C2 (d)
AMP connector (1) for servo side
AMP1–178128–3
Fig.C3 (a)
AMP connector (2) for servo side
AMP2–178128–3
Fig.C3 (b)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply
AMP1–178128–3
Fig.C3 (c)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply
AMP2–178288–3
Fig.C3 (d)
Contact for AMP connector
AMP1–175218–2/5
AMP1–175218–2/5
Fig.C3 (e)
HONDA connector (case)
Fig.C4 (a)
HONDA connector (angled case)
Fig.C4 (b)
HONDA connector (male)
Fig.C4 (c)
HONDA connector (female)
Fig.C4 (d)
HONDA connector (terminal layout)
Fig.C4 (e)
Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown)
SMS3PN–5
Fig.C5
Connector for HIROSE flat cable
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R
HIT3BB–34D–2.54R
Fig.C6
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
LY10–DC20
Fig.C7 (a)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
LY10–C2–3
Fig.C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface
Fig.C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector
Fig.C8 (b)
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH–50FD
Fig. C9
AMP connector (for loader I/O board)
AMP178214–1
Fig. C10
A02B–0166–K330
Fig. C11
449
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)
USAGE
:
GENERAL
:
HONDA PCR–E20L (PLASTIC)
MATING
A
n
2
1
7.3
1.27
n)1
2
7
n
Display
HONDA
15.1
HOUSING
1.27
B
A
PCR–E20FS
21.65
B
11.43
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)
450
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
USAGE
:
HIROSE FI40–2015S
PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING
: HIROSE FI–20–CV
16.25
11.43
15_
1.27
5 4
3
2
1
1.7
9.2
7 6
5.5
2.2
10 9 8
Note
This connector does not
have contacts for positions
11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
7
Tab for
shield
connection
3
4.3
(4)
8.5
5
(3)
1.8
(1)
2.4 2.4
A
Section AA
S
(2)
A
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
9
7
5
3
1
Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector
451
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)
USAGE
:
GENERAL
9.5
21
11.4
(1)
HONDA
37
(2)
30
(3)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
452
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
HIROSE FI–20–CV
USAGE
:
PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
21±0.3
9.5±0.2
(5)
Case
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Cable clamp
Set screw for cable clamp
11.5±0.3
(6)
17.5"0.3
37"0.5
(4)
(3)
30±0.3
(2)
Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
453
(1)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)
USAGE
:
GENERAL
9.5
21
11.4
(2)
F
37
C020–02
30
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
454
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type (Hirose Electric))
455
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AMP1–178128–3
Circuit No.
(25.5)
3
AMP
16.3
X
22.8
D–3
DIMENSION
2
6.55
4.05
3.1
10.16
5.08
2
3
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)
456
7.15
0.6
19.24
1
:
1
TYPE
B–63003EN/04
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
AMP2–178128–3
Circuit No.
(29.7)
DIMENSION
AMP
Y
0.6 " 0.3
" 0.3
6.55
4.05
3.1
1
2
3
Cricuit No.
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector (2)
457
" 0.3
3
10.16
5.08
7.15
2
D–3
16.3" 0.3
22.8 " 0.3
1
(19.24)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
AMP1–178288–3
USAGE
:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1A
3
+24V INPUT
2
1
Circuit No.
(22.96)
1
2
DIMENSION
0V
+24V
3
AMP
16.3
22.8
D–3
X
6.55
4.05
3.1
7.62
3.81
1
2
3
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (c) AMPconnector (3)
458
7.15
0.6
16.7
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
TYPE
:
AMP2–178288–3
USAGE
:
POWER CP1B
3
+24V OUTPUT
2
1
0V
+24V
Circuit No.
1
2
3
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector (4)
459
7.15
6.55
0.6
DIMENSION
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
SEPARATE
:
AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)
AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL
:
AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)
AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE
:
AWG 16, 18, 20
B–63003EN/04
(21.8)
2.9 " 0.5
A–A
±0.4
2.9
1
In case of reel
3
±0.5
B–B
17.8
(9.3)
±0.4
±0.2
" 0.2
5.5
" 0.5
–AMP
2.5
" 0.2
3.4
B
A
2.9
(1.7)
4.2
(2.5)
PLATING 1D–MARK
A
PRESSER 1D–MARK
(f2.6)
B
Fig. C3 (e) Contact for AMP connector
460
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
(2)
(4)
(1)
C
(3)
(5)
(D)
A
(B)
Symbol
Specification
MR–20LMH (Plug)
MR–20LFH
(Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
MR–50LFH
Symbol
1
(Jack)
A
(B)
C
(D)
Number of
terminals
39.3
44.9
39.8
17
20
67.9
73.5
44.8
18
50
Name
Connector cover
2
Cable clamp
3
Stopper
4
Screw for cable clamp
5
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)
461
Outer diameter of the cable
MR–20L dia.10mm max
MR–50L dia.16mm max
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
External dimensions of 50–pin connector
Fig. C4 (b) Honda connector (angled–type case)
462
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
13
2–M2
A
B
6
18.1
2.4
(1)
8.5
(2)
14
15
8
1
16
17
9
2
10
3
18
11
4
5
19
12
6
20
13
HONDA
(3)
7
A
B
MR–20RMH
32.8
27.8
Number of
terminals
20
MR–50RHF
61.4
56.4
50
Symbol
1
Name
Cable clamp
2
Screw 2.6dia.×8
3
Connector (MR–20,–50MH)
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (male)
463
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
13
2–M2
B
A
8.4
(2)
(3)
1
2
8
14
3
9
15
4
10
16
17
5
11
18
6
12
19
7
HONDA
10.9
19.9
2.4
(1)
13
20
A
B
MR–20RMH
32.8
27.8
Number of
terminals
20
MR–50RMH
61.4
56.4
50
Symbol
1
Name
Cable clamp
2
Screw 2.6dia.×8
3
Connector ( MR–20,– 50FH)
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (female)
464
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
HONDA
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
HONDA
19
33
34
20
35
21
36
22
37
23
38
24
39
25
40
26
41
27
42
28
43
29
44
30
45
14
46
15
8
31
16
9
32
47
17
10
48
18
11
49
19
12
20
HONDA
13
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HONDA
14
9
15
10
16
11
17
12
18
13
19
20
Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)
465
MR–50FH
(50–core, jack)
50
1
8
MR–50MH
(50–core,plug)
MR–20MH
(20–core,plug)
MR–20FH
(20–core, jack)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
32 max.
19.06" 0.2
5.08
3
1
2
B–63003EN/04
6 ±0.2
7.7
30
Manufacturer : Burndy Japan Corp.
Name
Connector housing for cable
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS3PNS–5
(Crimp type)
RC16M–23T3
(Solder type)
RC16M–SCT3
Contact
Cables :
Cross sectional area
:
Remarks
Brown
For details on tools
required for crimp
terminals,contact the
manufacturer.
0.75mm2(30/0.18)
Insulation diameter
:
2.8mm max
Peeling length
:
7.2mm
Fig. C5 Connector made by Burndy Japan (3 pins,black)
466
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (HIROSE ELEC. CO.)
HIROSE ELEC. CO.
Specification
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BB
1.27
1.27
14.4
15.6
HIF3BA
1.09
1.27
PROTECTOR
MAIN BODY
A’
A
D
3.6
B
6.0
6.0
2.54
6.0
CRAMP
A
A
A
ASS’Y DIAGRAM
Section B–B’
Section A–A’
2.54
1.27
B’
3.81
B
D
3.8 :1
3.5
:2
2.7
5.1
8.5
0.3
0.95
10.5
7.0 3.5
7.0
:3
1.05
2.3
2.3
3.5
C
4.5
Dimensions
Description
No.of
contact
A
B
C
D
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R
50
68.07
60.96
62.23
63.6
FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR CONTACT NUMBER (HIROSE)
AOI MARK (SIDE)
POLARITY GUIDANCE
20PINS
ROW A
ROW B
01
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
10
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
50PINS
ROW A
ROW B
01
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
21
20
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE Flat cable
467
23
22
25
24
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
+0.2
18
2 (pitch)
±0.15
13
20.5
0
–0.3
21.6
+0.3
0
Fig. C7 (a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
468
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Section A–A
Contact position
Detailed contact diagram
Excluding the crimp terminal
Product name
Fig. C7 (b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
469
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
H
J
A 53.0
B 38.3
C 47.0
D 7.8
E 12.6
F 41.3
G 10.7
H 1.2
J 0.8
A
C
B
A–A cross section
F
10
A
E
A
G
D
6.1
10
2–3.05f
10
10.8
Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface
M2.6 P0.45 screw
Small round
head screw
Interlock screw
1.2groove
6.1
1.2
6.2
12.7
Spring washer
Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate plate for reader/puncher interface connector
470
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63003EN/04
Honda MR type, 50 pins, male, connection printed circuit board soldering type connector
Type No.
Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
MRH–50FD
Pin configuration of Honda MR connector, 50 pins, male
Viewed from the connector side
Fig. C9 Honda connector
471
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Type:
AMP 178214–1
Application:
Used for the loader I/O board
B–63003EN/04
Dimensions:
Fig. C10 AMP connector
Type:
Faston terminal
Use:
Frame grounding
Applicable housing: 170604–1 manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd. or
FVDDF2–250 TYPE I (blue) manufactured by Japan Solderless terminal MFG. co.Ltd.
Dimensions:
7.62
Applicable wire
1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75
21.59
Fig. C11 Faston Terminal
472
B–63003EN/04
B
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
473
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B.1
B–63003EN/04
OVERVIEW
This section provides supplementary information about the
recommended (FANUC–approved) 20–pin interface connectors used
with the following target model.
B.2
FANUC i series
ADDITIONAL
TARGET MODEL
B.3
BOARD–MOUNTED
CONNECTORS
B.3.1
Vertical–type
Connectors
B.3.2
Straight and
Right–angled
Connectors (for Spring
and Screw–fixing
Connector Housings)
Models: PCR–EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)
52618–2011 (Molex Japan)
These board–mounted connectors have been specially developed to
achieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. As
explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors can
be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newly
developed connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR series
connectors. To support this specification extensively, many connector
manufacturers are now developing custom–tailored cable connectors.
(Note that these cables cannot be used with screw–fixing cable connector
housings.)
Models: PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (Honda Tsushin)(straight connector)
PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL (Honda Tsushin)
(right–angled connector)
These connectors are used for the main and option boards of the i series.
As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw–fixing connector
housings as well as the spring locking connector housings.
474
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
B.4
Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The
models listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with an
asterisk are currently being mass–produced as manufacturer’s standard
models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to custom
specifications by FANUC.
CABLE
CONNECTORS
Use
Cable
connector
General
use
(MDI,
IOLINK,
AMP,
SPDL,
etc.)
Type
Manufacturer
Connector
model
Housing
model
Applicable cable
outside diameter
Honda
PCR–E20FA
PCR–V20LA*
f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
Hirose
FI30–20S*
FI–20–CV2*
f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
Fujitsu
FCN–240C020
–Y/S*
52624–2015*
f 5.8mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
Molex
FCN–247J020
–G/E
52622–2011*
Strand wire
press–
mount type
Hirose
FI30–20S*
FI–20–CV7*
(Low screw–
fixing housing)
f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
Soldering
type
Honda
PCR–E20FS
PCR–V20LA*
f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
Hirose
FI40–20S*
FI–20–CV2*
f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
FI40B–20S*
(FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S*
FI–20–CV5*
f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
FI–20–CV6*
f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)
FI40B–2015S*
(FI40–2015S*)
FI–20–CV*
f 8.5mm (f8.0 to 9.0)
FI40B–20S*
(FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S*
FI–20–CV5*
f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
FI–20–CV6*
f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)
PCR–E20FS
PCR–V20LA*
f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
Strand wire
press–mount
type
For
Soldering
pulse coder, type
coaxial
cable,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator,
etc.
Hirose
Honda
Fig. B.4 Cable connectors
475
f 6.2mmf (5.9 to 6.5)
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Cable Connectors
B–63003EN/04
Strand wire press–mount connector :
With this connector, #28AWG wires are
press–connected to each pin at the same time.
The cost of producing a cable/connector
assembly with this connector model is much
lower than with connectors designed for
crimping or soldering.
Also, the following connector housing has
been newly developed for use with the i
series.
Connector model (manufacturer)
FI–20–CV7 (Hirose)
Supplementary description
Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing
can be fastened to a board–mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It is
intended mainly for connecting the board–mounted connectors used on the main
and option boards of the LCD–mounted type i series (see Section B.3.2). Note that
this connector housing cannot be used for conventional board–mounted
connectors.
Soldering type connector : Details of soldering type connectors and their
housings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
D Connectors
Connector model (manufacturer)
Supplementary description
PCR–E20FS (Honda)
Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable
assemblies in small quantities, as well as on–site.
FI40–20S (Hirose)
Equivalent to Honda PCR–E20FS
FI40B–20S (Hirose)
(formerly, FI40A–20S)
Has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,
facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allow
wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B–20S (wires no thicker than
#20AWG can be used with the FI40A–20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, such
as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI–20–CV6.
FI40B–2015S (Hirose)
(formerly, FI40–2015S)
Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinning
out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, the
FI40–2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, provided
that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.
D Housings
Housing model (manufacturer)
Supplementary description
FI–20–CV5 (Hirose)
Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use with
a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
FI–20–CV6 (Hirose)
Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This housing, however, can be used with a
thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI–20–CV5. Its
components are die cast.
In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.4, Hirose soldering–type
connectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure that
the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the
requirements of that housing.
476
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
Connector model
D FI40B–2015S
(formerly FI40–2015S)
D
FI40–20S
FI40B–20S
(formerly FI40A–20S)
477
Housing model
(applicable cable diameter)
FI–20–CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
FI–20–CV2 (f6.2mm)
Those listed
on the left
can be
FI–20–CV6 (f10.25mm) used.
FI–20–CV5 (f9.2mm)
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
B.5
RECOMMENDED
CONNECTORS,
APPLICABLE
HOUSINGS, AND
CABLES
Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables
Connector name
referenced in the
Connection
Manual
FANUC–approved
connector
(manufacturer)
PCR–E20FA
PCR–E20FA
Strand
(Honda Tsushin)
press–mount type
FI30–20S
(Hirose Electric)
FANUC–approved
housing
(manufacturer)
PCR–V20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
Compatible cable (cable diameter)
FANUC development
FANUC specification number
A66L–0001–0284#10P
(6.2 mm in diameter)
Remark
Plastic housing
A66L–0001–0284#10P
(6.2 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
A66L–0001–0284#10P
FCN–247J020–G/E
FCN–240C020–Y/S (6.2 mm in diameter)
(Fujitsu Takamizawa) (Fujitsu Takamizawa)
Plastic housing
52622–2011
(Molex)
FI–20–CV2
(Hirose Electric)
52624–2015
(Molex)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FA
FI30–20S
Strand
wire (Hirose Electric)
press–mount type
FI–20–CV7
(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FS
Soldering type
PCR–E20FS
(Honda Tsushin)
PCR–V20LA
(Honda Tsushin)
Plastic housing
FI40–20S
(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV2
(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
FI40B–2015S
(formerly
FI40–2015S)
(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV5
(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0367
A66L–0001–0368
(9.2 mm in diameter)
FI40B–20S
(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV6
(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0403
(9.8 mm in diameter)
FI40B–2015S
(formerly
FI40–2015S)
15–pin soldering
type
Plastic housing
(*1)
Metal housing
NOTE
*1 Cable A66L–0001–0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be
up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403, have recently been
developed. A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m,
respectively. (See Fig. 4 for detailed specifications.)
Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter,
capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and are
UL– and CSA–certified.
478
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
Press–mount type
connector assembly
tools and jigs
Connector model
referenced in the
Connection Manual
PCR–E20FA
FANUC–approved
connector
(manufacturer)
PCR–E20FA
(Honda Tsushin)
Wire forming tool
Press–mounting
tool
PCS–K2A
FHPT–918A
JGPS–015–1/1–20
JGPS–014
MFC–K1
PCS–K1
Remark
Low cost
(Note 1)
FHAT–918A
FI30–20S
(Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/S
(Fujitsu)
FI30–20CAT
FI30–20/ID
FI30–20CAT1
HHP–502
FI30–20GP
FCN–237T–T043/H
FCN–237T–T109/H
FCN–247T–T066/H
Low cost
FCN–237T–T044/H
FCN–237T–T062/H
52622–2011
(Molex)
57829–5000
57830–5000
57823–5000
57824–5000
Low cost
NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number
A02B–0120–K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the
connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
479
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Materials for cable
assemblies
Material
Use
B–63003EN/04
Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the
materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUC
recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface
connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact
each cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
Constitution
FANUC
specification
number
Manufacturer
Remark
10–pair cable
General use
0.08mm2
10–pair
A66L–0001–0284 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
#10P
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
12–conductor
composite cable
Pulse coder,
linear scale,
manual
pulse
generator
0.5mm2
6–conductor
0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
20 m or less
0.75mm2
6–conductor
0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
30 m or less
Usable on
movable parts
1.25mm2
6–conductor
0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
50 m or less
Usable on
movable parts
5–conductor
coaxial
A66L–0001–0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
50 m or less
5–core coaxial
cable
CRT interface
480
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
10–pair cable
(a) Specifications
Item
Product No.
Unit
Specifications
–
A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer
Hitachi Cable,Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
Rating
Material
–
60°C 30V:UL2789
80°C 30V:UL80276
Conductor
–
Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)
Insulator
–
Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid
–
Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath
–
Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Pairs
10
AWG
28
Conductors
/mm
7/0.127
Outside diameter
mm
0.38
Thickness
mm
Outside diameter (approx.)
mm
0.58
Core style (rating)
mm
UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Outside diameter (approx.)
mm
1.16
Pitch
mm
20 or less
–
Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then
wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
apply a cable separator as required.
mm
3.5
Number of pairs
Conductor
Size
Structure
Insulator
Twisted pair
Lay
Lay diameter (approx.)
Drain wire
0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Conductors Hitachi Cable : Not available
/mm
Oki Electric Cable
: Available,10/0.12
mm
0.12
Braid density
%
85 or more
Color
–
Black
Thickness
mm
1.0
Outside diameter (approx.)
mm
6.2
Standard length
m
200
Packing method
–
Bundle
Ω/km
233 or less
MΩ–km
10 or less
V/min.
300
–
Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
Shield braid
Sheath
Electrical
performance
Element wire diameter
Electric resistance (at 20°C)
Insulation resistance (at 20°C)
Dielectricstrength (AC)
Flame resistance
481
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
(b) Cable structure
Wire identification table (Hitachi)
Insulator color
Wire No.
1
10
2
5
9
3
6
8
4
Second
wire
Twisted
pair wire
1
Blue
White
2
Yellow
White
Binding
tape
3
Green
White
4
Red
White
5
Purple
White
6
Blue
Brown
7
Yellow
Brown
8
Green
Brown
9
Red
Brown
10
Purple
Brown
Shield
braid
Sheath
7
First
wire
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig. B.5 (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
Wire identification table (Oki)
2
6
9
3
7
4
8
5
Shield
braid
Sheath
1 Orange
Dot mark
(1 pitch)
10
Twisted
–pair
wire
Binding
tape
Insulator color
1
Pair No.
Drain
wire
Dot mark
color
First
wire
Black
2
–
–
Red
Gray
Red
Black
3
white
–
Red
Black
4 Yellow
–
Red
Black
Pink
–
Red
Black
5
– –
Red
Black
7
Gray
– –
Red
Black
8
White
6 Orange
– –
Red
Black
9 Yellow
– –
Red
Black
Pink
– –
Red
Black
10
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig. B.5 (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable
482
Second
wire
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
Composite 12–core
cable
(a) Specifications
Item
Unit
Specifications
Product No.
–
A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer
–
Oki Cable, Ltd.
Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating
–
80°C, 30V
Conductor,braid–shielded
wire,drain wire
–
Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator
–
Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath
–
Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Material
Number of wires (wire ons.)
Cores
6 (1 to 6)
6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Conductor
mm2
0.5
0.18
Conductors
/mm
20/0.18
7/0.18
Outside diameter
mm
0.94
0.54
Standard
thickness
(The
minimum thickness is at least
80% of the standard thickness.)
mm
0.25
0.2
Outside diameter
mm
1.50
0.94
Outside diameter
mm
1.88
–
Left
mm
20 or less
Size
Structure
Insulator
Twisted pair
Direction of lay
Pitch
Lay
–
Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer
is right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.
mm
5.7
mm2
0.3
Wires/mm
12/0.18
Outside diameter
mm
0.72
Element wire diameter
mm
0.12
Thickness
mm
0.3
%
70
mm
6.3
Lay diameter
Drain wire
Size
Structure
Shield braid
Braid density
Outside diameter
483
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Item
B–63003EN/04
Unit
Specifications
–
Black
Standard
thickness
(The
minimum thickness is at least
85% of the standard thickness.)
mm
1.1
Outside diameter
mm
8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length
m
100
Packing method
–
Bundle
Sheath
Electrical
performance
Color
Electric resistance (at 20°C)
(wire nos.)
Ω/km
Insulation resistance (at 20°C)
MΩ–km
15
V/min.
500
–
Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,
Dielectric strength (AC)
Flame resistance
39.4(1 to 6)
113(7 to 9)
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain
wire.
(b) Cable structure
The cable structure is shown below.
Drain wire
Red
6
Red
7
White
Red
5
Red
8
Black
4
Red
Black
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
1
Black
2
black
3
black
9
White
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
484
0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
(c) Specifications
Item
Specification
FANUC specification number
A66L–0001–0402
A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer
Conductor
Insulation
(polyester)
Pair twisting
Assembling
by twisting
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor
B–conductor
A–conductor
B–conductor
Constitution
Number of conductors/mm
16/0.12
(0.18mm2)
3/22/0.12
(0.75mm2)
16/0.12
(0.18mm2)
7/16/0.12
(1.25mm2)
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
0.55
1.20
0.55
1.70
White, red, black
Red, black
White, red, black
Red, black
Typical thickness (mm)
0.16
0.23
0.16
0.25
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
0.87
1.66
0.87
2.20
Color
Constitution
White–red,
white–black, and
black–red
White–red,
white–black, and
black–red
Direction of twisting
Left
Typical pitch:
20 mm
Left
Typical pitch:
20 mm
Number of strands or
conductors
Direction of twisting
Taping
3
6
Left
Typical
(mm)
strand
80
A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Sheath
Color
(polyurethane)
Typical thickness (mm)
Vertical taping
Outside diameter (mm)
Finished
assembly
6.9
0.14
Typical density (mm)
Drain
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape.
5.7
diameter
6
Left
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Braided
shielding
3
6.4
7.6
Black (matted)
1.05
1.1
Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
8.5"0.3
Typical length (m)
9.8"0.3
100
Short size
Basically not approved.
485
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
Item
Specification
FANUC specification number
A66L–0001–0402
A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor
Finished
assembly
performance
Rating
Standard
Shall comply with VW–1 and FT–1.
Conductor resistance
Ω/km (20°C)
103 or lower
25.5 or lower
A. C 500
Tensile strength
N/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation %
100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging
%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging %
At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition
For 168 hours at 113°C
Tensile strength
N/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation %
100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging
%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging %
At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition
Cable cross
section
103 or lower
1 or higher
Dielectric strength
V–min
Sheathing
performance
B–conductor
Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
FT–1.
Insulation resistance
MΩ/km (20°C)
Insulation
performance
A–conductor
80_C 30V
Flame resistance
Electrical
performance
B–conductor
For 168 hours at 113°C
Tape
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
White
Red
Red
Black
Sheath
486
Red
Black
Black
White
Black
Twisted pair A
Black
Red
Solid wire B
Braided shielding
Red
Drain
15.0 or lower
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
5–core coaxial cable
D Specifications
Item
Unit
Description
Specification
–
A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture
–
HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification
–
CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75–SB5X0.14SQ
Number of Conductors
Core
5
Inside Conductor
mm2
0.14
Conductors
(PCS)/m
m
7/0.16
Insulator
Outside
Conductor
Size
Components
Material
–
Diameter
mm
Material (Color)
0.48
Polyethylene (White)
Thickness
mm
0.71
Diameter
mm
1.90
Material
–
Diameter of Component–Wire
Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)
mm
0.08
%
95 or more
Diameter
mm
0.2
Material
–
Vinyl
Color
–
Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Density
Jacket
–
Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Thickness
mm
0.15
Diameter
mm
2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter
mm
7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape
mm
0.05
Shield
braid
mm
Wire dia. Material
Density
Sheath
%
0.12
Tin–coaded soft copper wire
80 or more
Thickness
mm
0.3
Diameter
mm
7.8
Material, Color
Thickness
Finish Diameter
Conductor Resistance (20°C)
Withstand Voltage (A.C.)
–
Oil Tight Vinyl
Black
mm
0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
mm
9.2 "0.3
W/km
143 or less
V/min.
1000
MW–km
1000 or more
W
75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz)
nF/km
56
Standard Attention (10MHz)
dB/km
53
Weight
kg/km
105
Standard Length
m
200
Package form
–
Bundle
Insulation Resistance (20°C)
Impedance (10MHz)
487
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B–63003EN/04
Red
Red
Green
Black
Green
Black
White
White
Blue
Blue
An example of circuit testing 20–pin interface cable
.
.
.
Ω
Resistor
Check
every pin
.
.
.
Cable (20–pin interface connector)
PCB connector
488
PCR–E20LMD (Honda)
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
B–63003EN/04
C
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units
Cable type
Use and condition
Maximum
cable length
(m)
MDI cable
Control unit–to–MDI unit
50 m
I/O Link cable
Electrical cable
10 m Note 2
Electrical–to–optical conversion
adapter
2m
Optical cable
200 m
Electrical cable (control
unit–to–spindle servo unit)
20 m
Electrical–to–optical conversion
adapter
2m
Optical cable
200 m
Position coder cable
Control unit position coder
50 m
MPG cable
Connector panel I/O operator’s panel
I/O module–to–manual pulse
generator
50 m
FSSB cable
See APPENDIX D.
HSSB cable
See APPENDIX D.
RS–232C
communication cable
4800 baud or less
100 m
9600 baud or less
50 m
9600 baud or less
800 m
19.2 kbaud
50 m
Serial spindle cable
RS–422
communication cable
NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when
the respective recommended cables stated in the text are
used. If a non–recommended cable is used, the maximum
cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other than
those listed above are used between units in the i series
CNC. See the respective descriptions in this manual for
details of these cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within
the cabinet.
489
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Purpose
Spindle signal
cable
B–63003EN/04
Description
Specification
Length
A02B–
0236–
K845
5m
A02B–
0236–
K846
5m
A02B–
0236–
K847
1m
A02B–
0236–
K843
5m
A02B–
0236–
K812
25 m
A02B–
0236–
K813
45 m
A02B–
0166–
K880
55 m
PCR–E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are
connected)
Electrical–to–electr
ical
FI–20–CV7
Spindle signal
cable
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are
connected)
PCR–E20FA
For serial
connection
between the
second and third
spindles
Spindle signal
cable
PCR–E20FA
PCR–E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are
connected)
When an electrical
-to-optical
conversion adapter
is used
Power supply
cable for I/O unit
FI–20–CV7
AMP2–178288–3
Control unit
(CP1B)
á
I/O Unit
(CP31)
MDI signal cable
SMS3PNS–5
FI–20–CV7
Integrated control
unit or stand–alone
type LCD unit
(CA55)
á
MDI unit
(CK1)
Power supply
cable for
stand–alone type
LCD unit
LY10–DC20
AMP2–178288–3
stand–alone type
MDI (CPD2)
á
Stand–alone type
LCD (CP5)
AMP1–178288–3
490
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
B–63003EN/04
Purpose
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for one unit)
Control unit (JA3)
á
Description
FI40–2015S
Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
Specification
Length
A02B–
0120–
K847
7m
A02B–
0120–
K848
7m
A02B–
0120–
K841
7m
A02B–
0120–
K842
5m
A02B–
0124–
K830
5m
M3 crimp style terminal
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for two units)
Control unit (JA3)
á
Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
FI40–2015S
M3 crimp style terminal
Manual pulse
generator cable
(for three units)
Control unit (JA3)
á
FI40–2015S
Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
3
3
3
3
M3 crimp style terminal
2
2
2
2
I/O Link cable
Control unit (JD1A)
á
I/O unit (JD1B)
Control unit power
supply cable
PCR–E20FA
M3 crimp style terminal
Stabilized power
supply (24 VDC)
á
Control unit
(CP1A)
AMP1–178288–3
491
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Purpose
B–63003EN/04
Description
Specification
Length
A02B–
0236–
K844
1m
A02B–
0236–
K810
5m
Serial spindle
signal cable
Control unit (JA41)
á
Electric/optical
converter
PCR–E20FA
Serial spindle
signal cable
Control unit (JA41)
á
a series amplifier
(JA7B)
PCR–E20FA
492
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
D
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
The i Series CNC uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces.
This table lists the usable combinations.
Interface
Recommended
optical cable
Maximum allowable
transmission distance
Applicable junction adapter
Serial spindle interface
A66L–6001–0026#L~
200 m
A63L–0020–0002
I/O Link interface
A66L–6001–0026#L~
200 m
A63L–0020–0002
High–speed serial bus
(HSSB) interface (Note)
A66L–6001–0026#L~
100 m
None
A66L–6001–0029#L~
55 m
A63L–0020–0002
A66L–6001–0023#L~
10 m
None
A66L–6001–0026#L~
100 m
None
Serial servo bus (FSSB)
interface
Remark
For junction only
NOTE
For printed–circuit boards with the following former ordering
information, the maximum allowable transmission distance
with –0026#L~ is lowered to 50 m, and connection with
A63L–0020–0004 is impossible.
·A20B–8001–0580 ·A20B–8001–0581
·A20B–8001–0640 ·A20B–8100–0100
493
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
Notes on the
specifications of optical
fiber cable C
(1) Supported optical fiber cables
(a) Internal cord type cable: A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
Cable length: 0.15 to 10 m
Code diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Tensile strength:
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mm
Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
Unit: mm
7
6.7
14 max.
Two cords are bound together.
100 typ.
21
Code
Fig. D.1 External dimensions of internal cord type cable
(b) External type cable: A66L–6001–0026#LjRjjj
Cable length: 1 to 50 m
Optical fiber cord diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Diameter of cable with reinforced cover: 7.6 mm
Tensile strength: Cable with reinforced cover – 75 kg
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mm
Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover: 50 mm
Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover): 1
0 million bending cycles at room temperature
(when the bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance: Equivalent to UL VW–1
Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
Unit: mm
8.2
6.7
19 max.
150 typ.
35 typ.
21
Code
Bush
Fig. D.2 External dimensions of external cable
494
Reinforced cover
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
Table D.1 Standard cable length
Internal cord type cable
External cable
A66L–6001–0023#
A66L–6001–0026#
Specification
Length
Specification
Length
L150R0
0.15 m
L1R003
1.0 m
L300R0
0.3 m
L2R003
2.0 m
L500R0
0.5 m
L3R003
3.0 m
L1R003
1.0 m
L5R003
5.0 m
L2R003
2.0 m
L7R003
7.0 m
L3R003
3.0 m
L10R03
10.0 m
L5R003
5.0 m
L15R03
15.0 m
L7R003
7.0 m
L20R03
20.0 m
L10R03
10.0 m
L30R03
30.0 m
L50R03
50.0 m
L100R03
100.0 m
L200R03
200.0 m
2. Cable selection
D Always use an external cable (A66L–6001–0026#) when the cable
is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unit
cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
D Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to
movement. For example, when connecting a portable operation
pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an external
cable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, or
twisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is not
expected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cable
is installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to be
taken into consideration.
D Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a
danger.
Although the internal cord type cable
(A66L–6001–0023#) is covered by nonflammable resin, the cover,
if exposed to frame for a long time, may melt, allowing the fiber
cable inside to burn.
D Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled with
considerable force during installation (the force applied to the cable
must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). For
example, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can be
regarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type must
be selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cable
during installation.
D Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil
and heat resistance properties.
495
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
3. Procuring the cable
All the optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable products
with optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to
ensure the required system performance and reliability. It is
technically impossible for users to produce these cables or process (cut
and reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchase
cables of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables are
available from either FANUC or any of the FANUC–approved
manufacturers listed in Table D.2.
Table D.2 FANUC–approved cable manufacturers and cable model
numbers (retail)
(1) Internal cord type cable A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
Manufacturer
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd.
Model number
Remarks
:–353373–:
Japan Aviation Electronics PF–2HB209–::M–F–1 :: indicates the
Industry, Ltd.
cable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
H07–P22–F2VCFA–:: :: indicates the
cable length (m).
(2) External Cable A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
Manufacturer
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd.
Model number
Remarks
:–353199–:
Japan Aviation Electronics CF–2HB208–::M–F–1 :: indicates the
Industry, Ltd.
cable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
H07–P22–F2NCFA–:: :: indicates the
cable length (m).
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. OPC201HPXF–::MB
:: indicates the
cable length (m).
4. Handling precautions
(1) Protection during storage
When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the
printed circuit board and the optical fiber cable are not in use, their
mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with which
they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likely
to become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.
496
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
Electrical/optical conversion module
Lid
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable caps
Fig. D.3 Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)
(2) Optical fiber cable
• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficient
mechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on the
cable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or
disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical fiber cord itself.
(The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord and
connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to
cause the connector to come off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by
the lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the lock
levers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the
correct orientation, always take note of the connector’s orientation
before making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or
a tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connector
and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D.4. This
is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the
fiber cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied between the
fiber cord and connector when installing the cable, you can hold the
reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the case
of an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, apply
the same protective measures, as instructed in Fig. D.4, for that
portion of the cable where the two cords are bound together, in
order to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber
cord and connector. In the same way as for an external cable, if no
tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector during
installation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and
pull it. Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords is
only 14 kg, however, avoid applying too great a force to the cable
during installation, regardless of whether you have taken the
protective measures.
497
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
Optical connector
Reinforcing cover
Reinforcing cover
Optical connector
Wire with a hook
Tension member
Tape
Tape
2 cords combined
Fig. D.4 Prior to installing a cable
D Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and
PCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or
absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cotton
may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent
other than ethyl alcohol.
D Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding
portion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, as
shown in Fig. D.5, to prevent the weight of the optical fiber cable
from being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical
connector.
(Recommended cable clamp):
Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp
that grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should not
apply excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable:
CKN–13SP (with sponge)(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable:
MN–1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
498
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
Optical connector
Reinforcing cover of external
cable or cord binding portion of
internal cord type cable
Optical fiber cord
Bending radius of 25 mm or more
(Make the bending radius as large as
possible.)
Cable clamp
Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)
Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)
(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)
Fig. D.5 Fixing the cable with a clamp
D Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops.
Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loop
is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (for
an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops
may produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radius
limit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in a
greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communication
failure.
D When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the
instructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bending
force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp.
Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
External cable:
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band.
When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping
force is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure that
the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the
reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the
clamping force should be 5 kg or less.
Internal cord type cable:
Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cable
shield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be
1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due care
is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external
cable.
499
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
5. Optical fiber cable relay
When used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical fiber cables
can be connected by using an optical fiber adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical fiber adapter
32"0.3
10.16
8.2
6.6
R1.6
21"0.5
18.2"0.5
42"0.5
2.2
3.2
(b) Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter
Optical fiber adapter (A63L–0020–0002)
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTE
Up to one relay points are permitte.
500
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
6. Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high–speed serial bus
With the FANUC high–speed serial bus, special low–loss optical
cables can be connected by using a special low–loss optical relay
adapter as an optical fiber relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low–loss optical relay adapter
32"0.5
10.16
8.2
6.6
R1.6
21"0.3
3.2
2.2
18.1
42"1.0
(b) Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter
Low–loss optical relay adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
Low–loss optical fiber cable
Low–loss optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.
501
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
7. Precautions for connection with low–loss optical junction adapter
D Features of and handling precautions for low–loss optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1)
are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the optical
fiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) may protrude from the tip of
the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiber
protrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against each
other.
In the low–loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted
against each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeater
loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low–loss
optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) is used as even one of the two
optical fiber cables for joining the low–loss optical junction
adapter, both cables may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated
characteristics.
NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the
fiber is bonded to the ferrule.
Ferrule
Protective cover
Optical cable
Optical connector
D Features of low–loss optical cable (A66L–6001–0029)
A low–loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF optical
cables (A66L–6601–0026). The selected cable offers low loss, and
its connector section is given special treatment; the fiber ends are
provided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted against
each other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss optical
junction adapter must be of low–loss type.
D Appearance of the low–loss optical junction adapter and cable
(how to distinguish them from conventional types)
The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black, but
that of the low–loss optical junction adapter is blue. In addition,
the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF optical cable
is black, but that of the low–loss optical cable is blue.
502
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
8. Installing the optical fiber junction adapter
The optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,
as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,
protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectors
and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air
by, for example, covering them with packing.
9. Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter
D The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when
optical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are very
small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not be
expected.
D When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junction
adapter installed in a normal environment (such as within a
cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapter
and optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal optical
linkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust and
dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normal
environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on the
adapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when the
optical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junction
adapter and the optical connector using the optical fiber junction
adapter cleaning method described below.
D Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those optical
cable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not covered
with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and fiber
end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunction
may occur.
10.Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical–to–electrical conversion
module, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to the
following procedures.
D Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electrical
conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened
with, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternative
CFC; High Shower spray can DS–2168, manufactured by Sun
Hayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe
them with a cotton swab or the like.
503
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
B–63003EN/04
D Cleaning optical cables
For the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their
ends. Any soiling on the optical fiber end surfaces will hamper
optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the optical
fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with
a soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol or
HCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton
swabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low–loss
optical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soiling
from the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or
gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the
ferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminated
with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber end
surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion
module, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the optical
fiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
504
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
B–63003EN/04
E
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
Brightness of the
monochrome LCD
When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD
decreases. (In particular, the LCD screen immediately after power–on is
dark.) This is not a failure but a property of the LCD. As the ambient
temperature rises, the LCD screen becomes brighter.
The monochrome LCD provides a function for adjusting its brightness.
For an explanation of how to adjust the brightness, refer to the
maintenance manual or operator’s manual of the i Series.
LCD with a touch panel
The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For
touch panel operation, be sure to use the FANUC–supplied pen
(A02B–0236–K111) provided with the touch panel. If the LCD screen is
touched using a sharp–tipped pen, the surface of the LCD screen may be
damaged. Moreover, the LCD screen must not be touched by with your
fingers. Otherwise, the operability may be degraded, and the screen is
likely to become dirty.
Protection sheet for the
touch panel
A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel to
protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. The protection sheet is
itself covered by a film to protect against damage in transit. After
connecting the CNC to the machine, peel off the film as shown below.
The protection film is less transparent, so the display screen will be less
visible if the protection film is not removed.
Protection film
When replacing the protection sheet, use the procedure below.
D Remove the protection sheet from the front of the LCD. Then, wipe
away any moisture or oil from the front of the LCD.
D Peel off the white backing sheet from the back (side which attaches to
the LCD) of a new protection sheet.
D When the white protection sheet is removed, the protection sheet is
ready to be applied. Attach the protection sheet onto the front of the
LCD. At this time, do not allow dirt and dust to enter between the LCD
and protection sheet.
505
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
B–63003EN/04
D Finally, remove the film from the protection sheet.
Ordering code of the protection sheet: A02B–0236–K110
Old protection sheet
White backing of new protection sheet
506
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
F
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Overview
Using the memory card interface located on the left side of the LCD,
input/output of data inside the CNC and remote diagnosis using a modem
card can be performed. This appendix describes the memory card
interface for data input/output. For an explanation of remote diagnosis
using a modem card, see the related document.
Compatible and
incompatible cards
SRAM card
D JEIDA (4.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
D PCMCIA (2.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
D PC Card Standard
SRAM cards conforming to any of the above standards can be used.
However, SRAM cards operating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3
V cannot be inserted physically. Such SRAM cards cannot be used.
The operation of the following FANUC–recommended SRAM cards has
been confirmed by FANUC:
256KB SRAM card
Fujitsu
MB98A90823–20
512KB SRAM card
Fujitsu
MB98A90923–20
1MB SRAM card
Fujitsu
MB98A91023–20
2MB SRAM card
Fujitsu
MB98A91123–20
Flash memory card
With the i Series incorporating personal computer functions, no flash
memory card can be used. With the i Series, Intel series 2 flash memory
cards (or equivalent) can be used. However, flash memory cards
operating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3 V cannot be inserted
physically. Such flash memory cards cannot be used.
Basically, flash memory cards with non–Intel on–chip flash memories
cannot be used. However, such flash memory cards, if formatted or
written by a personal computer, may be read with the i Series. The
operation of the following FANUC–recommended flash memory card has
been confirmed by FANUC:
4MB flash memory card
507
Fujitsu
IMC004FLSA
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Memory card capacity
The capacity of a memory card usually indicates an unformatted capacity.
After formatting, the usable capacity decreases slightly. So, a memory
card with a capacity larger than the size of data and programs actually
stored needs to be prepared.
Example:When the size of data to be stored is 512KB
A memory card with a capacity of 1MB or more is required.
When a flash memory card is used, the last 128KB of the memory card
is used as a buffer area, so that the usable space decreases additionally by
128KB.
Memory card formatting
The BOOT SYSTEM formats a memory card using method called the
FAT file system. The formatting method called the flash file system is
also supported. However, the FAT file system and flash file system are
not compatible with each other, and the read and list functions cannot be
used.
File operation with a
flash memory card
Flash memory cards do not allow individual files to be deleted; all the files
on a flash memory card need to be deleted at the same time. Accordingly,
the following operations cannot be performed:
D Deletion of an existing file
D Renaming of a file
D Overwriting of a file
Notes on formatting a
flash memory card with
CardPro
CardPro uses the flash file system as standard to format a flash memory
card. When using CardPro to format a flash memory card used with the
boot system, use the following command to format the card.
A:CPFORMAT drive–name:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
Using a flash memory
card formatted with the
BOOT SYSTEM on other
systems
Ramzo
CardPro
Reading of files
f
f
Addition of files
No file addition function
is available.
f
f
Ramzo
CardPro
Reading of files
f
f
Addition of files
f
Listing of files
f
Listing of files
Using a flash memory
card formatted with
other systems on the
BOOT SYSTEM
f
NOTE
1 Ramzo is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Adtech System Science.
2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Data IO.
508
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Names and functions of
components
Write
protect
switch
Battery
case
Name
1
Function
Write protect Writing to the memory card can be disabled by setting the
switch
write protect switch.
Writing is enabled.
2
Writing is disabled.
Battery case A battery for data backup is housed within an SRAM
memory card.
Flash memory cards do not have a battery case.
Inserting a memory card
A memory card has an insertion guide to protect against reverse insertion.
Pay attention to the orientation of the memory card. The front of the
memory card must face the LCD of the i Series.
Battery
The batteries used with FANUC–supplied SRAM memory cards were of
the CR2325 and BR2325 types.
These batteries were difficult to obtain, so the CR2025 battery was
introduced to replace these batteries in May, 1997.
By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cards
that used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the new
battery (CR2025).
SRAM memory cards
1) A87L–0001–0150#jjj
Manufacturer’s model: MB98A9jj33–20
Battery type
1) Before the change: CR2325 or BR2325
D Indication on the side of the memory card:
9jj33–20 S000 jjj jjj
2) After the change: CR2025 or equivalent
(common battery intended for use in electronic calculators)
D Indication on the side of the memory card:
9jj33–20 9157 jjj jjj
509
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
Battery holder replacement
1) By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cards
that used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the new
battery (CR2025).
2) The battery holder set for CR2025 is available from shops handling
Fujitsu electronic devices.
D Ordering code: MB98XXX–holder set–09146
D Contents of the set: Battery holder (1), battery (CR2025) (1),
manual (1)
Battery replacement
(1) While pressing down the fixing claw, pull out the battery case.
(2) Replace the battery with a new one.
Match the + mark of the battery with the + mark on the battery case.
Battery case
(3) Return the battery case to its original position, then check that the
battery operates normally.
510
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
ATA CARD
1. Overview
Memory card–based data input/output in the current Series CNC can
be done only with a flash memory card. For those models shipped
from FANUC in and after October 1998, however, a flash ATA card
(5 V version) can also be used for data input/output. Because the flash
ATA card incorporates a storage device and controller, it enables data
input/output for a personal computer equipped with a PCMCIA
interface without using any special PC card writer.
2. Supported hardware versions and software editions
On models other than the FS20i, the following conditions must be
satisfied.
2–1 Hardware
The motherboard must be OF one of the versions listed below.
Model
Printed–circuit board
specification
General version
FS16i
A20B–8100–0130
12E and later
FS18i
A20B–8100–0135
12E and later
FS21i (with SA5)
A20B–8100–0136
10E and later
FS21i (with SA1)
A20B–8100–0137
10E and later
2–2 Software
The software must be OF one of the editions listed below.
System software
Series/model
Edition
B1F1/FS16i–TA
Edition 16 or later
B0F1/FS16i–MA
Edition 17 or later
BEF1/FS18i–TA
Edition 16 or later
BDF1/FS18i–MA
Edition 17 or later
DEF1/FS21i–TA
Edition 11 or later
DDF1/FS21i–MA
Edition 11 or later
Boot software
Series
60M3
Edition
Edition 09 or later
511
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
3. Inappropriate version/edition combinations
3–1 If neither hardware nor software are supported
No normal operation is guaranteed. For a listing of the symptoms,
see Section 3-3, “If the Hardware is Supported, but the Software
is Not.”
3–2 If the software is supported, but the hardware is not
An ATA card may not be recognized as such when it is inserted.
In this case, a symptom described in Section 3-3 occurs. Even if
the ATA card is recognized, however, FANUC does not guarantee
its operation.
3–3 If the hardware is supported, but the software is not
The FS16i–MA is exemplified below. The symptoms listed
below are only examples. They will not always occur.
If the system software is not supported (BOF1/Edition 16)
Operation
Memory card–based input/output
Symptom (example)
MEMORY CARD ERROR
READ/WRITE and other operations on I/O WRITE (READ, LIST) ERROR
the PMC I/O screen
FORMAT on the PMC I/O screen
930 CPU INTERRUPT
If the boot software is not supported (60M3/Edition 08)
Operation
Symptom (example)
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE
CARD. HIT SEL.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT
NMI OCCURRED, PLEASE POWER
OFF.
4. Flash ATA card specification
The Flash ATA card must comply with the following standards and
must be of one of the following types. However, it is not guaranteed
that all ATA cards that comply with these standards will operate
normally in the CNC. See Section 5 for those ATA cards whose
normal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
4–1 Card standards
The ATA card to be used in the CNC must comply with PCMCIA
(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PC
Card standard Release 2.1 and PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release
1.02.
4–2 Card Shapes
PCMCIA Type I and Type II
4–3 Card Operation Mode
PC–ATA specification
4–4 Card Operating Voltage
ATA cards that can operate on 5 V (single voltage power source)
and 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used in the CNC.
512
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
B–63003EN/04
5. ATA cards whose normal operation has been confirmed
The following table lists those ATA cards whose normal operation has
been confirmed by FANUC (as of August, 1998). (All the listed ATA
cards are 5 V versions.)
Manufacturer
Hitachi, Ltd.
Model
Storage capacity
HB286008A3
8MB
HB286015A3
15MB
HB286030A3
30MB
HB286045A3
45MB
Matsushita
Electric BN–012AB
Industrial Co., Ltd.
BN–020AB
12MB
BN–040AB
40MB
20MB
NOTE
1 FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
ATA card other than those listed above.
2 3.3 V versions of ATA cards cannot be used in the CNC.
3 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) versions can be used only
in the i Series.
For any CNC other than the i series, these ATA cards can
be inserted into a memory card slot, but they or the CNC
control unit may be damaged electrically when the power is
switched on. Be very careful when using these cards.
6. Miscellaneous
D The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using a
personal computer.
D It is impossible to use ATA cards with the memory card access
function of a C executor application.
513
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
G
B–63003EN/04
ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
514
B–63003EN/04
G.1
OUTLINE
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
The MMX–Pentium version has been added to the i series with
display–integrated PC. This chapter describes the differences between the
Pentium version and the MMX–Pentium version, connections and
dimensions.
515
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
G.2
B–63003EN/04
Refer to the following table.
COMPARISON
BETWEEN
MMX–Pentium
VERSION
160i/180i/210i AND
Pentium VERSION
Functional differences between the new and old functions on the 160i/180i/210i
with built–in display–integrated PC functions
Item
MMX–Pentium version
Pentium version
Remarks
Hardware differences
Procurement
specifications
On the following options, the procurement drawings differ from those for the
Pentium version. Be sure to refer to separate sheet “160i/180i/210i New/Old
Order Specifications Comparison Table” before procuring for the
MMX–Pentium version.
The Pentium version cannot be used on the MMX–Pentium version.
D Basic unit
D PC card
D Hard disk unit
D Separate type MDI
D FA full keyboard
D PC I/F separate wiring unit
D ISA expansion unit
D Driver disk
Basic unit
LCD panel
10.4″ color TFT LCD (640
or
12.1″ color TFT LCD (800
External
dimensions
290
340
480 dot) 10.4″ color TFT LCD (640
only
600 dot)
200 mm (w/ 10.4″ LCD)
280 mm (w/ 12.1″ LCD)
290x220mm
480 dot)
Installation is the same
for the unit w/ 10.4″ LCD.
PC card
CPU
MMX–Pentium 166MHz
Pentium 120MHz
Main memory
32MB, 64MB (16 MB not available)
16MB, 32MB, 64MB
VGA chip
The Trident Cyber9320 exclusive The NeoMagic NM2093 exclusive Provided on driver disk
driver is required.
driver is required.
Hard disk unit
Hard disk
3.5″ type used
External
dimensions
Installation dimensions differ from
those for the Pentium version. (When
special installation is performed at
MTB, be sure to first check the
dimensions.)
2.5″ type used
For
details
installation,
separate sheet.
on
see
For
details
installation,
separate sheet.
on
see
PC I/F separate wiring unit, ISA expansion unit
External
dimensions
Installation dimensions differ from
those for the Pentium version. (When
special installation is performed at
MTB, be sure to first check the
dimensions.)
516
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
B–63003EN/04
Functional differences between the new and old functions on the 160i/180i/210i
with built–in display–integrated PC functions
Item
MMX–Pentium version
Pentium version
Remarks
Separate type MDI unit, FA full keyboard
MDI unit,
A special tool is required for A special tool is required for mounting
FA full keyboard mounting 3.5″ HDD to rear.
2.5″ HDD to rear.
Installation
dimensions
(vertical type for unit w/ 10.4″ LCD)
(vertical type for unit w/ 12.1″ LCD)
290 x 220 mm (vertical type)
Internal power supply differences
UMB area
Memory space C8000H to DBFFFH Memory space CA000H to CBFFFH
can be used.
and CD000H to DFFFFH can be used.
Address mapping Mapped to I/O space 378H
of printer board
Mapped to I/O space 3BCH
Address mapping C8000H to CBFFFH
of PCMCIA driver
CC000H to CFFFFH
Setting
for
PCMCIA
“PlayAtWill”
DOS
driver
Setting and installation procedure differences
BIOS setting (1)
Do not enable suspend. If suspend is
enabled, the power must be turned
OFF and then back ON again to
reboot after the suspend state is
entered.
BIOS setting (2)
HDD standby mode migration time is HDD standby mode migration time is 0 Change the setting only
set to 15 minutes (default).
minutes (default) and is then set to 15 when there is a problem
minutes (factory setting)
on the system. Note,
however, that when this
setting is shortened, the
life of the HDD may
become shorter.
OS
installation The VGA chip must be specified.
method
No special items need to be specified.
Windows
95 The mother board resource and IDE
device manager controller are marked by a “|”.
ATA card use
Especially, there is no
problem in the operation.
Setting is required.
Other
Suspend
When suspend is selected in the
Windows Start menu, reboot is
possible only to turn the power ON
again.
CNC
screen On a 12.1″ LCD type, this function
display function
cannot be used.
There may be other functional differences in addition to the above. Be
sure to fully check on an operational machine.
517
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
B–63003EN/04
G.3
CONNECTION
G.3.1
Connector Positions
(Basic Unit)
Rotary switch
(for maintenance)
Fuse
Pentium
version
MMX–Pentium Remarks
version
Connector for PC separate wiring unit CNY1
CNY1
Same
PC serial port ch1
JD33
JD33
Same
MDI connector
CA55
CA55
Same
Servo check connector
CA54
CA54
Same
NC serial port ch1
JD36A
JD36A
Same
NC serial port ch2
JD36B
JD36B
Same
Analog output, HDI
JD40
JD40
Same
I/O link
JD1A
JD1A
Same
Serial spindle, position coder
JA41
JA41
Same
FDD signal
CD34
CD34
Same
HDD signal
CNH1
CNH3
Modified
Mouse
CD32B
CD32B
Same
FDD power supply
CN2
CN2
Same
HDD fan motor
–
CN39
Added
HDD power supply
–
CN2B
Added
Keyboard
CD32A
CD32A
Same
24V input
CP1
CP1
Same
In the MMX–Pentium version, CN2B and CN39 have been added, and
CNH1 becomes CNH3.
518
B–63003EN/04
G.3.2
HDD Unit
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
1) HDD signal (CNH3)
In the current Pentium version, the HDD signal connector (CNH1 or
CNH2) is provided for the 2.5″ HDD. When there is a PC separate
wiring unit, this connector is connected to; when there is no PC
separate wiring unit, the main board is connected to.
In the MMX–Pentium version, a 3.5″ HDD is used, and CNH3 on the
main board is connected to at all times.
2) HDD signal (CN2B)
Power is supplied to the 3.5″ HDD currently used in the
MMX–Pentium version by a power cable. (For the 2.5″ HDD
currently used in the current Pentium version, a power line is contained
in the signal cable.) Connect the power cable to CN2B on the main
board.
3) Fan motor for HDD unit (CN39)
In the MMX–Pentium version, a fan motor is used as a heat
countermeasure. Connect the cables coming from the fan unit
mounted on the HDD unit or the PC separate wiring unit to CN39 on
the main board.
519
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
G.3.3
PC Separate Wiring
Unit
B–63003EN/04
The PC separate wiring unit for the MMX–Pentium version differs from
that for the current Pentium version.
The PC separate wiring unit for the MMX–Pentium version has a serial
port on the PC side (2 channels), a parallel port and a connector for the
ISA expansion unit.
Rotary switch
(for setting I/O address
between CNC and PC)
JN1
(ISA expansion unit)
Connector
Pentium
Version
MMX–Pentium Remarks
Version
PC serial port ch2
JD36F
JD36F
Same
Parallel port
JD9
JD9
Same
–
JD37
–
Deleted
–
CN3
–
Deleted
ISA expansion unit connector
JN1
JN1
Same
HDD signal
CNH2
–
Deleted
In the MMX–Pentium version, JD37. CN3 and CNH2 have been deleted.
520
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
B–63003EN/04
G.3.4
The figure below shows the differences in the wiring for the HDD unit and
PC separate wiring unit in the current Pentium version and new
MMX–Pentium version.
Connecting the HDD
Unit and PC Separate
Wiring Unit
Without PC separate wiring unit
With PC separate wiring unit
Basic unit
Basic unit
Pentium
version
PC separate
wiring unit
HDD unit
(2.5″)
Basic unit
HDD unit
(2.5″)
Basic unit
CN2B
CN2B
MMX–Pentium
version
HDD power
cable
HDD fan
cable
Fan
HDD unit
(3.5″)
HDD signal
cable
521
PC separate
Fan wiring unit
HDD unit
(3.5″)
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
G.4
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS OF
UNIT
B–63003EN/04
The figures on the following page onwards show the external dimensions
of the units for the MMX–Pentium version and the panel cut dimensions.
In these figures, space [A] should be ensured for improving the flow of
air, and space [B] should be ensured if necessary for wiring cables and
connectors. It is also desirable that space [B] be provided for improving
the flow of air. Space [C] may sometimes be necessary as space for wiring
cables and connectors depending on the ISA expansion board in use by
MTB.
1) The external dimensions and panel cut dimensions of the basic unit
with 10.4″ LCD are the same as for the current Pentium version.
2) Figures 1 to 6 show the external dimension of the basic unit with 12.1″
LCD.
Number of slots
No slots
2/3/4 slots
Without soft keys and touch panel
Fig. 1
Fig. 4
With soft keys
Fig. 2
Fig. 5
With touch panel
Fig. 3
Fig. 6
3) Figures 7 to 12 show the external dimensions of the FA full keyboard
and each of the units mounted on the full keyboard.
LCD size on basic unit
For 10.4″
For 12.1″
HDD unit only
Fig. 7
Fig. 10
HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit
Fig. 8
Fig. 11
HDD unit, PC separate wiring unit and ISA Fig. 9
expansion unit
Fig. 12
4) Figures 13 to 18 show the external dimensions of the MDI and each
of the units mounted on the MDI.
LCD size on basic unit
For 10.4″
For 12.1″
HDD unit only
Fig. 13
Fig. 16
HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit
Fig. 14
Fig. 17
HDD unit, PC separate wiring unit and ISA Fig. 15
expansion unit
Fig. 18
5) Figure 19 shows the panel cut dimensions of the basic unit with 12.1″
LCD, FA full keyboard and MDI unit.
522
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 1
523
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 2
524
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 3
525
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 4
526
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 5
527
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 6
528
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 7
529
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 8
530
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 9
531
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 10
532
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 11
533
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 12
534
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 13
535
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 14
536
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 15
537
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 16
538
B–63003EN/04
B–63003EN/04
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 17
539
G. ABOUT THE MMX–Pentium VERSION 160i/180i/210i
Fig. 18
540
B–63003EN/04
Index
B–63003EN/04
ƠSymbolsơ
Connecting one to four serial spindles, 134
Connecting the FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link, 341
+24V input power specifications, 58
Connecting the HDD unit and PC separate wiring unit, 521
Connecting the high–speed skip (HDI), 122
Connecting the PC interface, 165
ƠNumbersơ
Connecting the servo check adapter, 163
20–pin interface connectors and cables, 473
Connecting the signal ground (SG) of the control unit, 44
2A DO (output signal) connection, 236
Connecting to peripheral devices, 399
2A output connector pin allocation, 235
2A output DO signal specifications, 237
Connecting to the 7.2″ LCD unit by the display link (multiple
connection), 95
61–key MDI unit, 79
Connecting to the integrated type Series 160is/180is/210is, 396
Connecting to the manual pulse generator on the FS20i, 246
Connecting to the MDI unit for the FS20i, 79
ƠAơ
Connection, 188, 213, 338, 342, 518
Connection between the basic unit and expansion unit, 158
About the MMX–Pentium version 160i/180i/210i, 514
Connection cable (supplied from us), 489
Action against noise, 40
Connection diagram, 226, 390
Additional target model, 474
Connection of basic and extension modules, 249
Address assignment by ladder, 343
Connection of battery for separate absolute detector, 156
Allocation, 359
Connection of connector panel I/O module, 225
Analog input connector pin allocation, 238
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by electric cable, 215
Analog input signal connections, 239
Connection of FANUC I/O Link optical fiber cable, 216
Analog input signal specifications, 241
Connection of FDDS (floppy disk drives) (signal & power), 170
Analog input specifications, 242
Connection of HDD (hard disk drive), 177
Analog spindle interface, 142
Connection of machine operator’s panel interface unit, 294
Connection of MDI unit (LCD–mounted type), 72
Connection of one to two serial spindles, 132
ƠBơ
Connection of operator’s panel connection unit, 317
Connection of operator’s panel I/O module (for matrix input),
261
Backup unit, 399
Batteries, 63
Connection of operator’s panel I/O module and power
magnetics cabinet I/O module, 278
Battery for absolute pulse coder built into the motor (6 VDC),
70
Connection of power supply, 149
Battery for memory backup (3VDC), 63
Connection of serial port, 167
Battery for separate absolute pulse coders (6VDC), 69
Connection of source output type connection unit, 324
Battery in the intelligent terminal (3 VDC), 68
Connection of the detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit via the
display link, 99
Board–mounted connectors, 474
Connection of the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel,
344
Connection of the PC interface connector panel unit, 179
ƠCơ
Connection to CNC peripherals, 71
Cable clamp and shield processing, 47
Connection to FANUC I/O Link, 211
Cable connectors, 475
Connection to other networks, 395
Cable for power supply to control unit, 62
Connection to the full–keyboard and mouse, 174
Cable length for manual pulse generator, 245
Connection to the high–speed skip (HDI), 123
Cabling diagram, 54
Connection to the MDI unit (LCD–mounted type), 73
Centronics parallel port, 181, 204
Connection to the servo amplifiers, 145
Comparison between MMX–Pentium version 160i/180i/210i
and Pentium version, 516
Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Links are
Used, 220
Configuration, 1, 225
Connection with an intelligent terminal, 105
Configurations of LCD–mounted type control units, 2
Connection with input/output devices, 107
Configurations of stand–alone type control units, 4
Connection with the 10.4″/9.5″ LCD unit, 88
Connecting I/O devices, 109
Connection with the 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link, 91
i–1
INDEX
B–63003EN/04
Connection with the display/MDI units (for the stand–alone
type i Series CNC), 87
Function overview, 294
Fuse mounting position, 316
Connection with the standard MDI unit, 74
Connector (on the cable side) specifications, 312
ƠGơ
Connector layout diagram, 196
Connector layout for operator’s panel connection unit, 321
General connection diagrams, 189
Connector locations, 159
General–purpose DI signal connection, 350
Connector mounting diagram, 347
General–purpose DO signal connection, 354
Connector pin layout for source output type connection unit,
330
Ground, 42
Connector positions (basic unit), 518
ƠHơ
Control unit, 52
Control unit configuration and component names, 2
Handling precautions, 200, 209, 394
Hardware overview, 15
HDD unit, 519
ƠDơ
Heat output of each unit, 35
Design and installation conditions of the machine tool magnetic
cabinet, 32
High–speed serial bus (HSSB), 201, 388
DI (general–purpose input signal) connection, 264, 281
ƠIơ
DI (input signal) connection, 230
DI (matrix input signal) connection, 266
I/O Link interface, 338
DI/DO connector pin arrangement, 263, 280
DI/DO connector pin assignment, 229
Input signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit,
318
DI/DO signal specifications, 233
Input signal requirements, 154
Differences between the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel
and distribution I/O machine operator’s panel, 344
Input signal rules for the high–speed skip (HDI), 125
Dimensions of source output type connection unit, 333
Input signal specifications for source output type connection
unit, 325
Distribution I/O setting, 258
Installation, 27, 160, 398
DNC1 interface, 386
Installation environment, 391
Installation environment conditions of control unit, 398
DNC2 interface (RS–232–C), 385
Installation environmental conditions, 193
DO (output signal) connection, 232, 267, 285
Installation method, 208
Dustproof measures for cabinets and pendant boxes, 54
Installation of the control unit, 52
Installation procedure, 183
Installation space, 195
ƠEơ
Installing the stand–alone type control unit, 53
Emergency stop signal, 376
Intelligent terminal having a touch panel but no soft key, 192
Emergency stop signal connection, 349
Intelligent terminal having neither soft keys nor a touch panel,
189
Environmental requirements outside the cabinet, 28
Intelligent terminal having soft keys but no touch panel, 191
Ethernet (10Base–T), 402
Interface, 299
External dimensions of each unit, 407
Interface to the servo amplifiers, 146
External dimensions of unit, 522
ISA expansion board, 208
External view, 271, 287
ISA expansion units, 183
External view of operator’s panel connection unit, 323
ƠKơ
ƠFơ
Key layout of separate–type MDI, 75
FANUC Handy File connection, 121
Keyboard addresses, 356
FANUC I/O Link connection unit, 334
FANUC intelligent terminal type 2, 186
ƠLơ
Floppy disk drive (signal and power supply), 198
Full keyboard, 175
Linear scale interface, 150
i–2
INDEX
B–63003EN/04
Power supply for the control unit, 57
Liquid crystal display (LCD), 505
Power supply specification, 194
Power–off sequence, 61
ƠMơ
Power–on sequence, 60
Procedure for installing personal computer interface boards,
392
Machine operator’s panel interface unit dimension diagram
(including connector locations), 313
Machine operator’s panel interface unit mounting dimension
diagram, 314
ƠRơ
Main power supply input, 197
Major connection precautions, 311
Recommended cables, 394
Manual pulse generator connection, 244, 270, 287, 355
Maximum number of units that can be connected, 343
Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables,
478
Measures against surges due to lightning, 50
Relay terminal connection, 355
Memory card interface, 507
Remote buffer interface (including FANUC DNC1 and DNC2),
378
Module installation, 250
Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 381
Module specifications, 227
Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 383
Mouse, 176, 203
RS–232–C interface specification, 112
Multipoint connection, 386
RS–232–C serial port, 110
ƠNơ
ƠSơ
Names of control unit parts and connector layout, 398
Separate detector interface, 147
Noise suppressor, 46
Separate detector interface unit specification, 149
Notes on installing a separate detector interface unit, 161
Separating signal lines, 40
Serial port, 403
Serial port 1, 206
ƠOơ
Serial port 2, 182, 205
Operating environment, 200
Serial spindle, 132
Operating precautions, 185
Servo interface, 144
Shutdown, 194
Operator’s panel, 367
Signal assignment, 297
Optical fiber cable, 493
Soft keys, 207
Other signal addresses, 358
Specification, 335
Output signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit,
320
Specifications, 193, 272, 288, 361
Output signal specifications for source output type connection
unit, 326
Spindle connection, 126
Stand–alone type pulse coder interface, 151
Overall connection diagram, 261, 278, 346, 397
State of the LEDs on the machine operator’s panel interface
unit, 311
Straight and right–angled connectors (for spring and
screw–fixing connector housings), 474
ƠPơ
System configuration, 296
PC separate wiring unit, 520
Peripheral equipment and connection, 196
ƠTơ
Personal computer specification, 391
PMC addresses, 310
Temperature rise within the cabinet, 34
Point–to–point connection, 387
Thermal design of operator’s panel, 38
Position coder interface, 143
Thermal design of the cabinet, 34
Power connection, 262, 279
Total connection diagrams, 20
Power supply capacities of CNC–related units, 29
Turning on and off the power to the control unit, 57
Power supply capacity, 29
Typewriter–style keyboard, 202
Power supply connection, 55, 348
i–3
INDEX
B–63003EN/04
ƠUơ
ƠVơ
Units that can be connected using FANUC I/O Link, 224
Vertical–type connectors, 474
Use environment, 173
i–4
Jul., 2000
Aug., 1999
March, 1999
Mar., 1997
Date
04
03
02
01
Edition
Contents
D Addition of Series 21i/210i
D Addition of Stand–alone type
D Addition of Series 20i
D Correction of errors
D Addition of “61–key MDI unit”
D Addition of “+24V input power specifications”
D Addition of “Dustproof measures for cabinets and pendant
boxes”
D Addition of “Measures against surges due to lightning”
D Deletion of the heat exchanger
Edition
Date
Contents
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B–63003EN)
Revision Record
·
No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
·
All specifications and designs
are subject to change without
notice.